dect
/
asl
Archived
13
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Releases Activity
This repository has been archived on 2022-02-17. You can view files and clone it, but cannot push or open issues or pull requests.
asl/doc_EN/as.tex

11522 lines
497 KiB
TeX
Raw Permalink Blame History

%% Hello altogether,
%%
%% this is a release of the english AS manual. I haven't
%% done the entire translation myself, large parts of it are the work of some
%% other people around the net who deserve my deep appreciation for this job.
%% My parts of the translation are the results of a brute-force attempt,
%% so there are surely tons of spelling errors and passages that will
%% make people with english as their mother tongue either laugh or cry...
%% Alfred Arnold
%% translation by: Oliver Sellke (OSIP, D-65199 Wiesbaden)
%% (proof-read in parts by Stefan Hilse, Wiesbaden)
%% Alfred Arnold
%% Stephan Kanthak
%% Vittorio De Tomasi
%%
%% thanks to the authors of:
%% FB-translator
%% GNU-ispell
%%
%% ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
%%TITLE User's Manual for Macro Assembler AS
\documentstyle[12pt,twoside,makeidx]{report}
\pagestyle{headings}
\sloppy
%%\textwidth 15cm
%%\evensidemargin 0.5cm
%%\oddsidemargin 0.5cm
\topsep 1mm
\parskip 0.3cm plus0.25cm minus0.25cm
\parindent 0cm
\newcommand{\ii}[1]{{\it #1}}
\newcommand{\bb}[1]{{\bf #1}}
\newcommand{\tty}[1]{{\tt #1}}
\newcommand{\tin}[1]{{\scriptsize #1}}
\newcommand{\ttindex}[1]{\index{#1@{\tt #1}}}
\font\mengft=cmss9 scaled \magstep1
\def \rz{\hbox{\mengft{I \hskip -1.7mm R}}}
\makeindex
%%===========================================================================
\begin{document}
\thispagestyle{empty}
\
\vspace{7cm}\par
\begin{raggedright}
{\large Alfred Arnold, Stefan Hilse, Stephan Kanthak, Oliver
Sellke, Vittorio De Tomasi}
\vspace{1cm}\par
{\huge Macro Assembler AS V1.41r8}\\
\rule{9.5cm}{0.3mm}\\
\vspace{2mm}\par
{\huge User's Manual}
\vspace{1cm}\par
{\large Edition November 1999}
\end{raggedright}
\clearpage
\thispagestyle{empty}
\ \vspace{5cm}
{\em IBM, PPC403Gx, OS/2, and PowerPC} are registered trademarks of IBM
Corporation.
{\em Intel, MCS-48, MCS-51, MCS-251, MCS-96, MCS-196 und MCS-296} are
registered trademarks of Intel Corp. .
{\em Motorola and ColdFire} are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. .
{\em UNIX} is a registered trademark of X/Open Company.
{\em Linux} is a registered trademark of Linus Thorvalds.
{\em Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS} are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks not explicitly mentioned in this section and used in
this manual are properties of their respective owners.
\vspace{7cm}
This document has been processed with the LaTeX typesetting system using
Digital Unix, Linux, and OS/2 operating systems running on AMD K6 and
DEC Alpha processors.
\clearpage
%%===========================================================================
{\parskip 0cm plus0.1cm \tableofcontents}
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Introduction}
This instruction is meant for those people who are already very familiar
with Assembler and who like to know how to work with AS. It is rather a
reference than a user's manual and so it neither tries to explain the
''language assembler'' nor the processors. I have listed further
literature in the bibliography which was substantial in the implementation
of the different code generators. There is no book I know where you can
learn Assembler from the start, so I generally learned this by ''trial and
error''.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{License Agreement}
\label{SectLicense}
Before we can go ''in medias res'', first of all the inevitable prologue:
I publish AS, in the present version, as ''Public Domain''.
This means, the program and overlay files and also the
utility and tool programs appended may be copied and use for free (of
charge). There are no plans to convert AS into a commercial or
shareware program. This permission however is valid only under the
following premises:
\begin{enumerate}
\item{The start message of the programs - especially the copyright
message - must not be removed or overwritten.}
\item{The compensation charged for copying and shipping must not
exceed D(E)M 20,-- (around US\$ 14.00).}
\end{enumerate}
On request the source code of this program can also be made available.
Programs or derivates structured hereon must be passed-on under the
same conditions as this program.
I explicitly encourage you to spread this program by disc or
mailbox, BBS, resp. Internet!
May be, you have got this program as enclosure to a commercial
program. The license agreement for the commercial program in no case
applies to AS.
If you took so much pleasure in this assembler that you like to
send me some money, I would ask you kindly to give the amount
to Greenpeace.
I have been trying to make the programs as bug free as possible.
But since there is principally no bug free software (the only people
making no mistakes are lying in the cemetery!), I do not take any
warranty for the function of the assembler in a particular environment
(hard or software) or liability for damages. Naturally I will always
be thankful for bug-reports or improvements and will work on the fixing.
To accelerate the error diagnose and correction, please add the
following details to the bug report:
\begin{itemize}
\item{hardware: \begin{itemize}
\item{processor type (with/without coprocessor)}
\item{amount of memory installed}
\item{video card}
\item{hard-disk type(s) and their interface(s)}
\end{itemize}}
\item{software: \begin{itemize}
\item{operating system (MS-DOS, Novell-DOS, DR-DOS, OS/2,
Windows) and version}
\item{resident (TSR) programs installed}
\item{version of AS including dates of the \tty{EXE}-files}
\end{itemize}}
\item{if possible, the source file, in which the bug occurs}
\end{itemize}
You can contact me as follows:
\begin{itemize}
\item{by Surface Mail: \begin{description}
\item{Alfred Arnold}
\item{Hirschgraben 29}
\item{D-52062 Aachen}
\item{Germany}
\end{description}}
\item{by E-Mail: \tty{alfred@ccac.rwth-aachen.de}}
\end{itemize}
If someone likes to meet me personally to ask questions and lives
near Aachen (= Aix-la-Chapelle), you will be able to meet me there.
You can do this most probably on thursdays from 7pm to 9pm at the
computerclub inside the RWTH Aachen (Eilfschornsteinstrasse 16,
cellar of philosophers' building, backdoor entry).
Please don't call me by phone. First, complex relations are
extremely hard to discuss at phone. Secondly, the telephone
companies are already rich enough...
The latest german version of AS (DOS,DPMI,OS/2) is available from
the following FTP-Server:
\begin{verbatim}
ftp.uni-stuttgart.de, directory
pub/systems/msdos/programming/as
\end{verbatim}
The sources of the C version can be fetched from the following server:
\begin{verbatim}
sunsite.unc.edu, directory
pub/Linux/devel/lang/assemblers/asl-<version>.tar.gz
\end{verbatim}
..and of course thereby from every Sunsite mirror of the world!
Whoever has no access to an FTP-Server can ask me to send the assembler
by mail. Only requests containing floppies (2 pieces 1.44 Mbytes, for
720Kbytes/1.2Mbytes format 4/3 pieces) and a self-addressed, (correctly)
stamped envelope will be answered. Don't send any money!
Now, after this inevitable introduction we can turn to the actual
documentation:
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{General Capabilities of the Assembler}
In contrast to ordinary assemblers, AS offers the possibility to
generate code for totally different processors. At the moment, the
following processor families have been implemented:
\begin{itemize}
\item{Motorola 68000..68040,683xx incl. coprocessor and MMU}
\item{Motorola ColdFire}
\item{Motorola DSP5600x,DSP56300}
\item{Motorola M-Core}
\item{Motorola/IBM MPC601/MPC505/PPC403}
\item{Motorola 6800, 6805, 68HC08, 6809, 68(HC)11 68HC12, 68HC16, and Hitachi
6301}
\item{Hitachi 6309}
\item{Hitachi H8/300(H)}
\item{Hitachi H8/500}
\item{Hitachi SH7000/7600/7700}
\item{Rockwell 6502 and 65(S)C02}
\item{CMD 65816}
\item{Mitsubishi MELPS-740}
\item{Mitsubishi MELPS-7700}
\item{Mitsubishi MELPS-4500}
\item{Mitsubishi M16}
\item{Mitsubishi M16C}
\item{Intel 4004}
\item{Intel MCS-48/41}
\item{Intel MCS-51/251}
\item{Intel MCS-96/196(Nx)/296}
\item{Intel 8080/8085}
\item{Intel i960}
\item{Signetics 8X30x}
\item{Philips XA}
\item{Atmel AVR}
\item{AMD 29K}
\item{Siemens 80C166/167}
\item{Zilog Z80, Z180, Z380}
\item{Zilog Z8}
\item{Toshiba TLCS-900(L)}
\item{Toshiba TLCS-90}
\item{Toshiba TLCS-870}
\item{Toshiba TLCS-47}
\item{Toshiba TLCS-9000}
\item{Microchip PIC16C54..16C57}
\item{Microchip PIC16C84/PIC16C64}
\item{Microchip PIC17C42}
\item{SGS-Thomson ST6}
\item{SGS-Thomson ST7}
\item{SGS-Thomson ST9}
\item{SGS-Thomson 6804}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS32010/32015}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS3202x}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS320C3x}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS320C20x/TMS320C5x}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS320C6x}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS9900}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS7000}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS370xxx}
\item{Texas Instruments MSP430}
\item{National Semiconductor SC/MP}
\item{National Semiconductor COP8}
\item{National Semiconductor SC144xx}
\item{Fairchild ACE}
\item{NEC $\mu$PD 78(C)1x}
\item{NEC $\mu$PD 75xxx (alias 75K0)}
\item{NEC $\mu$PD 78xxx (alias 78K0)}
\item{NEC $\mu$PD7720/7725}
\item{NEC $\mu$PD77230}
\item{Symbios Logic SYM53C8xx (yes, they are programmable!)}
\item{Fujitsu F$^2$MC8L}
\end{itemize}
under work / planned / in consideration :
\begin{itemize}
\item{Intel 4004/8008}
\item{Analog Devices ADSP21xx}
\item{SGS-Thomson ST20}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS320C4x}
\item{Texas Instruments TMS320C8x}
\item{Toshiba TC9331}
\end{itemize}
I'm currently searching for documentation about the following
families:
\begin{itemize}
\item{NEC 78K4}
\item{the complete set of OKI controllers}
\end{itemize}
unloved, but now, however, present :
\begin{itemize}
\item{Intel 80x86, 80186, Nec V30\&V35 incl. coprocessor 8087}
\end{itemize}
The switch to a different code generator is allowed even within one
file, and as often as one wants!
The reason for this flexibility is that AS has a history, which may also
be recognized by looking at the version number. AS was created as an
extension of a macro assembler for the 68000 family. On special request, I
extended the original assembler so that it was able to translate 8051
mnemonics. On this way (decline ?!) from the 68000 to 8051, some other
processors were created as by-products. All others were added over time
due to user requests. So At least for the processor-independent core of
AS, one may assume that it is well-tested and free of obvious bugs.
However, I often do not have the chance to test a new code generator in
practice (due to lack of appropriate hardware), so surprises are not
impossible when working with new features. You see, the things stated in
section \ref{SectLicense} have a reason...
This flexibility implies a somewhat exotic code format, therefore I
added some tools to work with it. Their description can be found in
chapter \ref{ChapTools}.
AS is a macro assembler, which means that the programmer has the
possibility to define new ''commands'' by means of macros.
Additionally it masters conditional assembling. Labels inside macros
are automatically processed as being local.
For the assembler, symbols may have either integer, string or floating
point values. These will be stored - like interim values in formulas -
with a width of 32 bits for integer values, 80 or 64 bits for floating
point values, and 255 characters for strings. For a couple of micro
controllers, there is the possibility to classify symbols by segmentation.
So the assembler has a (limited) possibility to recognize accesses to
wrong address spaces.
The assembler does not know explicit limits in the nesting depth of
include files or macros; a limit is only given by the program stack
restricting the recursion depth. Nor is there a limit for the
symbol length, which is only restricted by the maximum line length.
From version 1.38 on, AS is a multipass-assembler. This pompous term
means no more than the fact that the number of passes through the
source code need not be exactly two. If the source code does not
contain any forward references, AS needs only one pass. In case AS
recognizes in the second pass that it must use a shorter or longer
instruction coding, it needs a third (fourth, fifth...) pass to
process all symbol references correctly. There is nothing more behind
the term ''multipass'', so it will not be used further more in this
documentation.
After so much praise a bitter pill: AS cannot generate linkable code.
An extension with a linker needs considerable effort and is not planned
at the moment.
As regards ''release of sources'': the sources of AS are not
presented in a form which allows easy understanding (== no
comments). So I will emit sources only in case somebody really wants
to work on it (e.g. to port AS into another computer system) and the
derivates become again Public Domain. Particularly I want to prevent
that someone changes 5 lines (most popular the copyright entry) and
sell the result commercially as ''his own'' program.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Supported Platforms}
Though AS started as a pure DOS \marginpar{{\em DOS}} program, there are a
couple of versions available that are able to exploit a bit more than the
Real Mode of an Intel CPU. Their usage is kept as compatible to the DOS
version as possible, but there are of course differences concerning
installation and embedding into the operating system in question.
Sections in this manual that are only valid for a specific version of AS
are marked with a corresponding sidemark (at this paragraph for the DOS
version) aheaded to the paragraph. In detail, the following further
versions exist (distributed as separate packages):
In case you run \marginpar{{\em DPMI}}into memory problems when assembling
large and complex programs under DOS, there is a DOS version that runs in
protected mode via a DOS extender and can therefore make use of the whole
extended memory of an AT. The assembly becomes significantly slower by
the extender, but at least it works...
There is a native OS/2 \marginpar{{\em OS/2}} version of AS for friends of
IBM's OS/2 operating system. This is currently only a 16-bit version, but
at least this way saves the roundtrips via DOS boxes and one does not have
any problems any more with longer file names.
You can leave \marginpar{{\em UNIX}} the area of PCs-only with the C
version of AS that was designed to be compilable on a large number of UNIX
systems (this includes OS/2 with the emx compiler) without too much of
tweaking. In contrast to the previously mentioned versions, the C version
is delivered in source code, i.e. one has to create the binaries by
oneself using a C compiler. This is by far the simpler way (for me) than
providing a dozen of precompiled binaries for machines I sometimes only
have limited access to...
People who have read \marginpar{{\em ???}} this enumeration up to this
point will notice that world's best-selling operating system coming from
Redmont is missing in this enumeration. People who know me personally
will know that I do not regard Windows to be a pat solution (regardless if
its 3.X, 95, or NT). Frankly said, I am a 'windows hater'. A large
number of people will now regard this to be somewhere between obsolete and
ridiculous, and they will tell me that I withhold AS from a large part of
potential users, but they will have to live with it: I primarily continue
to improve AS because I have fun doing it; AS is a non-commercial project
and I therefore take the freedom not to look at potential market shares. I
select platforms for me where I have fun programming, and I definitely do
not have any fun when programming for Windows! By the way, there was a
time when I had to write Windows programs so I do not simply jabber
without having an idea what I am talking about. If someone wants to port
AS into this direction, I will not stand in his way, but (s)he should not
expect anything more from me than providing sources (which is why (s)he
will have to deal with questions like 'why does AS not work any more after
I changed the JUNK-CAD 18.53 registry entry from upper to lower case?').
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Assembler Usage}
\begin{quote}\begin{raggedright}{\it
Scotty: Captain, we din\verb!'! can reference it! \\
Kirk: Analysis, Mr. Spock? \\
Spock: Captain, it doesn\verb!'!t appear in the symbol table. \\
Kirk: Then it\verb!'!s of external origin? \\
Spock: Affirmative. \\
Kirk: Mr. Sulu, go to pass two. \\
Sulu: Aye aye, sir, going to pass two. \\
}\end{raggedright}\end{quote}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Hardware Requirements}
The hardware requirements of AS vary substantially from version to
version:
The DOS version \marginpar{{\em DOS}} will principally run on any
IBM-compatible PC, ranging from a PC/XT with 4-dot-little megahertz up to
a Pentium. However, similar to other programs, the fun using AS increases
the better your hardware is. An XT user without a hard drive will
probably have significant trouble placing the overlay file on a floppy
because it is larger than 500 Kbytes...the PC should therefore have at
least a hard drive, allowing acceptable loading times. AS is not very
advanced in its main memory needs: the program itself allocates less than
300 Kbytes main memory, AS should therefore work on machines with at least
512 Kbytes of memory.
The version of AS \marginpar{{\em DPMI}} compiled for the DOS Protected
Mode Interface (DPMI) requires at least 1 Mbyte of free extended memory.
A total memory capacity of at least 2 Mbytes is therefore the absolute
minimum given one does not have other tools in the XMS (like disk caches,
RAM disks, or a hi-loaded DOS); the needs will rise then appropriately.
If one uses the DPMI version in a DOS box of OS/2, one has to assure that
DPMI has been enabled via the box's DOS settings (set to \tty{on} or
\tty{auto}) and that a sufficient amount of XMS memory has been assigned
to the box. The virtual memory management of OS/2 will free you
from thinking about the amount of free real memory.
The hardware requirements of the OS/2 \marginpar{{\em OS/2}} version
mainly result from the needs of the underlying operating system, i.e. at
minimum an 80386SX processor, 8 Mbytes of RAM (resp. 4 Mbytes without the
graphical user interface) and 100..150 Mbytes of hard disk space. AS2 is
only a 16-bit application and therefore it should also work on older OS/2
versions (thereby reducing the processor needs to at least an 80286
processor); I had however no chance to test this.
The C version of AS \marginpar{{\em UNIX}} is delivered as source code and
therefore requires a UNIX or OS/2 system equipped with a C compiler. The
compiler has to fulfill the ANSI standard (GNU-C for example is
ANSI-compliant). You can look up in the \tty{README} file whether your
UNIX system has already been tested so that the necessary definitions have
been made. You should reserve about 15 Mbytes of free hard disk space for
compilation; this value (and the amount needed after compilation to store
the compiled programs) strongly differs from system to system, so you
should take this value only as a rough approximation.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Delivery}
Principally, you can obtain AS in one of two forms: as a {\em binary} or a
{\em source} distribution. In case of a binary distribution, one gets AS,
the accomanying tools and auxiliary files readily compiled, so you can
immediately start to use it after unpacking the archive to the desired
destination on your hard drive.
Binary distibutions are made for widespread platforms, where either the
majority of users does not have a compiler or the compilation is tricky
(currently, this includes DOS and OS/2). A source distribution in
contrast contains the complete set of C sources to generate AS; it is
ultimately a snapshot of the source tree I use for development on AS. The
generation of AS from the sources and their structure is described in
detail in appendix \ref{ChapSource}, which is why at this place, only the
contents and installation of a binary distribution will be described:
The contents of the archive is separated into several subdirectories,
therefore you get a directory subtree immediately after unpacking without
having to sort out things manually. The individual directories contain
the following groups of files:
\begin{itemize}
\item{{\tt BIN}: executable programs, text resources;}
\item{{\tt INCLUDE}: include files for assembler programs, e.g. register
definitions or standard macros;}
\item{{\tt MAN}: quick references for the individual programs in Unix
'man' format.}
\end{itemize}
A list of the files found in every binary distribution is given in tables
\ref{TabCommonPackageList1} to \ref{TabCommonPackageList3}. In case a
file listed in one of these (or the following) tables is missing, someone
took a nap during copying (probably me)...
\begin{table*}[htp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
File & function \\
\hline
\hline
{\bf Directory BIN} & \\
\hline
AS.EXE & executable of assembler \\
PLIST.EXE & lists contents of code files \\
PBIND.EXE & merges code files \\
P2HEX.EXE & converts code files to hex files \\
P2BIN.EXE & converts code files to binary files \\
AS.MSG & text resources for AS \\
PLIST.MSG & text resources for PLIST \\
PBIND.MSG & text resources for PBIND \\
P2HEX.MSG & text resources for P2HEX \\
P2BIN.MSG & text resources for P2BIN \\
TOOLS.MSG & common text resources for all tools \\
CMDARG.MSG & common text resources for all programs \\
DECODECMD.MSG & \\
IOERRS.MSG & \\
\hline
\hline
{\bf Directory DOC} & \\
\hline
AS\_DE.DOC & german documentation, ASCII format \\
AS\_DE.HTML & german documentation, HTML format \\
AS\_DE.TEX & german documentation, LaTeX format \\
AS\_EN.DOC & english documentation, ASCII format \\
AS\_EN.HTML & english documentation, HTML format \\
AS\_EN.TEX & english documentation, LaTeX format \\
\hline
\hline
{\bf Directory INCLUDE} & \\
\hline
BITFUNCS.INC & functions for bit manipulation \\
CTYPE.INC & functions for classification of \\
& characters \\
80C50X.INC & register addresses SAB C50x \\
80C552.INC & register addresses 80C552 \\
H8\_3048.INC & register addresses H8/3048 \\
REG166.INC & addresses and instruction macros 80C166/167 \\
REG251.INC & addresses and bits 80C251 \\
REG29K.INC & peripheral addresses AMD 2924x \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Standard Contents of a Binary Distribution - Part 1
\label{TabCommonPackageList1}}
\end{table*}
\begin{table*}[htp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
File & Function \\
\hline
\hline
{\bf Directory INCLUDE} & \\
\hline
REG53X.INC & register addresses H8/53x \\
REG683XX.INC & register addresses 68332/68340/68360 \\
REG7000.INC & register addresses TMS70Cxx \\
REG78K0.INC & register addresses 78K0 \\
REG96.INC & register addresses MCS-96 \\
REGACE.INC & register addresses ACE \\
REGAVR.INC & register and bit addresses AVR family \\
REGCOP8.INC & register addresses COP8 \\
REGHC12.INC & register addresses 68HC12 \\
REGM16C.INC & register addresses Mitsubishi M16C \\
REGMSP.INC & register addresses TI MSP430 \\
REGST9.INC & register and Makrodefinitionen ST9 \\
REGZ380.INC & register addresses Z380 \\
STDDEF04.INC & register addresses 6804 \\
STDDEF16.INC & instruction macros and register addresses \\
& PIC16C5x \\
STDDEF17.INC & register addresses PIC17C4x \\
STDDEF18.INC & register addresses PIC16C8x \\
STDDEF2X.INC & register addresses TMS3202x \\
STDDEF37.INC & register and bit addresses TMS370xxx \\
STDDEF3X.INC & peripheral addresses TMS320C3x \\
STDDEF47.INC & instruction macros TLCS-47 \\
STDDEF51.INC & definition of SFRs and bits for \\
& 8051/8052/80515 \\
STDDEF56K.INC & register addresses DSP56000 \\
STDDEF5X.INC & peripheral addresses TMS320C5x \\
STDDEF60.INC & instruction macros and register addresses \\
& PowerPC \\
STDDEF62.INC & register addresses and Makros ST6 \\
STDDEF75.INC & register addresses 75K0 \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Standard Contents of a Binary Distribution - Part 2
\label{TabCommonPackageList2}}
\end{table*}
\begin{table*}[htp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
File & Function \\
\hline
\hline
{\bf Directory INCLUDE} & \\
\hline
STDDEF87.INC & register and memory addresses TLCS-870 \\
STDDEF90.INC & register and memory addresses TLCS-90 \\
STDDEF96.INC & register and memory addresses TLCS-900 \\
STDDEFXA.INC & SFR and bit addresses Philips XA \\
STDDEFZ8.INC & register addresses Z8 family \\
\hline
\hline
{\bf Directory LIB} & \\
\hline
\hline
{\bf Directory MAN} & \\
\hline
ASL.1 & quick reference for AS \\
PLIST.1 & quick reference for PLIST \\
PBIND.1 & quick reference for PBIND \\
P2HEX.1 & quick reference for P2HEX \\
P2BIN.1 & quick reference for P2BIN \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Standard Contents of a Binary Distribution - Part 3
\label{TabCommonPackageList3}}
\end{table*}
Depending on the platform, a binary distribution however may contain more
files to allow operation, like files necessary for DOS extenders. In case
of the DOS DPMI version \marginpar{{\em DPMI}}, the extensions listed in
table \ref{TabDPMIPackageList} result. Just to mention it: it is
perfectly O.K. to replace the tools with their counterparts from a DOS
binary distribution; on the on hand, they execute significantly faster
without the extender's overhead, and on the other hand, they do not need
the extended memory provided by the extender.
\begin{table*}[htp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
File & Function \\
\hline
\hline
{\bf Directory BIN} & \\
\hline
DPMI16BI.OVL & DPMI server for the assembler \\
RTM.EXE & runtime module of the extender \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Additional Files in a DPMI Binary Distribution
\label{TabDPMIPackageList}}
\end{table*}
An OS/2 binary distribution \marginpar{{\em OS/2}} contains in addition to
the base files a set of DLLs belonging to the runtime environment of the
emx compiler used to build AS (table \ref{TabOS2PackageList}). In case
you already have these DLLs (or newer versions of them), you may delete
these and use your ones insted.
\begin{table*}[htp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
File & function \\
\hline
\hline
{\bf Directory BIN} & \\
\hline
EMX.DLL & runtime libraries for AS and \\
EMXIO.DLL & its tools \\
EMXLIBC.DLL & \\
EMXWRAP.DLL & \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Additional Files in an OS/2 binary distribution
\label{TabOS2PackageList}}
\end{table*}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Installation}
There is no need for a \marginpar{{\em DOS}} special installation prior to
usage of AS. It is sufficient to unpack the archive in a fitting place
and to add a few minor settings. For example, this is an installation a
user used to UNIX-like operating systems might choose:
Create a directory \verb!c:\as! an (I will assume in the following that
you are going to install AS on drive C), change to this directory and
unpack the archiv, keeping the path names stored in the archive (when
using PKUNZIP, the command line option \verb!-d! is necessary for that).
You now should have the following directory tree:
\begin{verbatim}
c:\as
c:\as\bin
c:\as\include
c:\as\lib
c:\as\man
c:\as\doc
c:\as\demos
\end{verbatim}
Now, append the directory \verb!c:\as\bin! to the \tty{PATH} statement in
your \tty{AUTOEXEC.BAT}, which allows the system to find AS and its tools.
With your favourite text editor, create a file named \tty{AS.RC} in the
\tty{lib} directory with the following contents:
\begin{verbatim}
-i c:\as\include
\end{verbatim}
This so-called {\em key file} tells AS where to search for its include
files. The following statement must be added to your \tty{AUTOEXEC.BAT}
to tell AS to read this file:
\begin{verbatim}
set ASCMD=@c:\as\lib\as.rc
\end{verbatim}
There are many more things you can preset via the key file; they are
listed in the following section.
The installation of the DPMI version \marginpar{{\em DPMI}} should
principally take the same course as for the pure DOS version; as soon as
the PATH contains the {\tt bin} directory, the DOS extender's files will
be found automatically and you should not notice anything of this
mechanism (except for the longer startup time...). When working on an
80286-based computer, it is theoretically possible tha you get confronted
with the following message upon the first start:
\begin{verbatim}
machine not in database (run DPMIINST)
\end{verbatim}
Since the DPMIINST tool ins not any more included in newer versions of
Borland's DOS extender, I suppose that this is not an item any more...in
case you run into this, contact me!
The installation of the OS/2 version \marginpar{{\em OS/2}} can generally
be done just like for the DOS version, with the addition that the DLLs
have to be made visible for the operating system. In case you do not want
to extend the {\tt LIBPATH} entry in your {\tt CONFIG.SYS}, it is of
course also valid to move the DLLs into a directory already listed in {\tt
LIBPATH}.
As already mentioned, the installation instructions in this section limit
themselves to binary distributions. Since an installation under Unix
\marginpar{{\em UNIX}} is currently alway a source-based installation, the
only hint I can give here is a reference to appendix \ref{ChapSource}.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Start-Up Command, Parameters}
\label{SectCallConvention}
AS is a command line driven program, i.e. all parameters and file
options are to be given in the command line.
A couple of message files belongs to AS (recognizable by their suffix {\tt
MSG}) AS accesses to dynamically load the messages appropriate for the
national language. AS searches the following directories for these files:
\begin{itemize}
\item{the current directory;}
\item{the EXE-file's directory;}
\item{the directory named in the {\tt AS\_MSGPATH} environment variable,
or alternitavely the directories listed in the {\tt PATH} environment
variable;}
\item{the directory compiled into AS via the {\tt LIBDIR} macro.}
\end{itemize}
These files are {\em indispensable} for a proper operation of AS, i.e. AS
will terminate immediately if these files are not found.
The language selection (currently only German and English) is based on the
{\tt COUNTRY} setting under DOS and OS/2 respectively on the {\tt LANG}
environment variable under Unix.
In order to fulfill \marginpar{{\em DOS}} AS's memory requirements under
DOS, the various code generator modules of the DOS version were moved into
an overlay which is part of the EXE file. A separate OVR file like in
earlier versions of AS therefore dose not exist any more, AS will however
still attempt to reduce the overlaying delays by using eventually
available EMS or XMS memory. In case this results in
trouble, you may suppress usage of EMS or XMS by setting the environment
variable \tty{USEXMS} or \tty{USEEMS} to \tty{n}. E.g., it is possible to
suppress the using of XMS by the command:
\begin{verbatim}
SET USEXMS=n
\end{verbatim}
Since AS performs all in- and output via the operating system (and
therefore it should run also on not 100\% compatible DOS-PC's) and
needs some basic display control, it emits ANSI control sequences
during the assembly.
In case you \marginpar{{\em DOS/}} should see strange characters in the
messages displayed by AS, your \tty{CONFIG.SYS} is obviously lacking a
line like this:
\begin{verbatim}
device=ansi.sys
\end{verbatim}
but the further \marginpar{{\em DPMI}} functions of AS will not be
influenced hereby. Alternatively you are able to suppress the output of
ANSI sequences completely by setting the environment variable
\tty{USEANSI} to \tty{n}.
The DOS extender of the DPMI version \marginpar{{\em DPMI}} can be
influenced in its memory allocation strategies by a couple of environment
variables; if you need to know their settings, you may look up them in the
file \tty{DPMIUSER.DOC}. ASX is additionally able to extend the available
memory by a swap file. To do this, set up an environment variable
\tty{ASXSWAP} in the following way:
\begin{verbatim}
SET ASXSWAP=<size>[,file name]
\end{verbatim}
The size specification has to be done in megabytes and \bb{has} to be done.
The file name in contrast is optional; if it is missing, the file is
named \tty{ASX.TMP} and placed in the current directory. In any case, the
swap file is deleted after program end.
The command line parameters can roughly be divided into three categories:
switches, key file references (see below) and file specifications.
Parameters of these two categories may be arbitrarily mixed in the command
line. The assembler evaluates at first all parameters and then assembles
the specified files. From this follow two things:
\begin{itemize}
\item{the specified switches affect all specified source files. If
several source files shall be assembled with different switches,
this has to be done in separate runs.}
\item{it is possible to assemble more than one file in one shot and to
bring it to the top, it is allowed that the file specs contain
wildcards.}
\end{itemize}
Parameter switches are recognized by AS by starting with
a slash (/) or hyphen (-). There are switches that are only one
character long and additionally switches composed of a whole word.
Whenever AS cannot interpret a switch as a whole word, it tries to
interprete every letter as an individual switch. For example, if you
write
\begin{verbatim}
-queit
\end{verbatim}
instead of
\begin{verbatim}
-quiet
\end{verbatim}
AS will take the letters \tty{q, u, e, i}, and \tty{t} as individual
switches. Multiple-letter switches additionally have the difference to
single-letter switches that AS will accept an arbitrary mixture of upper
and lower casing, whereas single-letter switches may have a different
meaning depending on whether upper or lower case is used.
At the moment, the following switches are defined:
\ttindex{SHARED}
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{l}: sends assembler listing to console terminal (mostly screen).
In case several passes have to be done, the listing of all
passes will be send to the console (in opposite to the next
option).}
\item{\tty{L}: writes assembler listing into a file. The list file will get
the same name as the source file, only the extension is
replaced by \tty{LST}.}
\item{\tty{o}: Sets the new name of the code file generated by AS. If this
option is used multiple times, the names will be assigned, one
after the other, to the source files which have to be
assembled. A negation (see below) of this option in
connection with a name erases this name from the list. A
negation without a name erases the whole list.}
\item{\tty{SHAREOUT}:ditto for a SHARE file eventually to be created.}
\item{\tty{c}: SHARED-variables will be written in a format which permits
an easy integration into a C-source file. The extension of
the file is \tty{H}.}
\item{\tty{p}: SHARED-variables will be written in a format which permits
easy integration into the CONST-block of a Pascal program.
The extension of the file is \tty{INC}.}
\item{\tty{a}: SHARED-variables will be written in a format which permits
easy integration into an assembler source file. The
extension of the file is \tty{INC}.}
\end{itemize}
Concerning effect and function of the SHARED-symbols please see
chapters \ref{ChapShareMain} resp. \ref{ChapShareOrder}.
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{g}: This switch instructs AS to create an additional file that
contains debug information for the program. Allowed formats are the
AS-specific \tty{MAP} format, a \tty{NoICE}-compatible command file,
and the \tty{Atmel} format used by the AVR tools. The information
stored in the MAP format is comprised of a symbol table and a table
describing the assignment of source lines to machine addresses. A
more detailed description of the MAP format can be found in section
\ref{SectDebugFormat} The file's extension is \tty{MAP}, \tty{NOI},
resp. \tty{OBJ}, depending on the chosen format. If no explicit
format specification is done, the MAP format is chosen.}
\item{\tty{w}: suppress issue of warnings;}
\item{\tty{E [file]}: error messages and warnings produced by AS will be
redirected to a file. Instead of a file, the 5 standard
handles (STDIN..STDPRN) can also be specified as
\tty{!0} to \tty{!4} . Default is \tty{!2}, meaning STDERR. If the
file option is left out, the name of the error file
is the same as of the source file, but with the
extension \tty{LOG}.}
\item{\tty{q}: This switch suppresses all messages of AS, the exceptions are
error messages and outputs which are are forced from the
source file. The time needed for assembly is slightly reduced
hereby and if you call AS from a shell there is no redirection
required. The disadvantage is that you may ''stay in the dark''
for several minutes ... It is valid to write \tty{quiet} instead
of \tty{q}.}
\item{\tty{h}: write hexadecimal numbers in lowercase instead of capital
letters. This option is primarily a question of personal
taste.}
\item{\tty{i $<$path list$>$}: issues a list of directories where the
assembler shall automatically search for include
files, in case it didn't find a file in the
current directory. The different directories
have to be separated by semicolons.}
\item{\tty{u}: calculate a list of areas which are occupied in the segments.
This option is effective only in case a listing is
produced. This option requires considerable additional
memory and computing performance. In normal operation it
should be switched off.}
\item{\tty{C}: generates a list of cross references. It lists which (global)
symbols are used in files and lines. This list will also be
generated only in case a listing is produced. This option
occupies, too, additional memory capacity during assembly.}
\item{\tty{s}: issues a list of all sections (see chapter
\ref{ChapLocSyms}). The nesting is indicated by indentations
(Pascal like).}
\item{\tty{t}: by means of this switch it is possible to separate single
components of the standard issued assembler-listing. The assignment
of bits to parts can be found in the next section, where the exact
format of the assembly listing is explained.}
\item{\tty{D}: defines symbols. The symbols which are specified behind this
option and separated by commas are written to the
global symbol table before starting the assembly. As default
these symbols are written as integer numbers with the
value TRUE, by means of an appended equal sign, however, you
can select other values. The expression following the equals
sign may include operators or internal functions, but \bb{not}
any further symbols, even if these should have been defined
before in the list! Together with the commands for
conditional assembly (see there) you may produce different
program versions out of one source file by command line
inputs.}
\item{\tty{A}: stores the list of global symbols in another, more compact
form. Use this option if the assembler crashes with a stack
overflow because of too long symbol tables. Sometimes this
option can increase the processing speed of the assembler, but
this depends on the sources.}
\item{\tty{x}: Sets the level of detail for error messages. The level
is increased resp. decreased by one each time this option is given.
While on level 0 (default) only the error message itself is printed,
an extended message is added beginning at level 1 that should
simplify the identification of the error's cause. Appendix
\ref{ChapErrMess} lists which error messages carry which extended
messages. At level 2 (maximum), the source line containing the
error is additionally printed.}
\item{\tty{n}: If this option is set, the error messages will be issued
additionally with their error number (see appendix
\ref{ChapErrMess}). This is primarily intended for use with shells
or IDE's to make the identification of errors easier by those
numbers.}
\item{\tty{U}: This option switches AS to the case-sensitive mode, i.e.
upper and lower case in the names of symbols, sections, macros,
character sets, and user-defined functions will be distinguished.
This is not the case by default.}
\item{\tty{P}: Instructs AS to write the source text processed by macro
processor and conditional assembly into a file. Additional
blank and pure comment lines are missing in this file. The
extension of this file is \tty{I}.}
\item{\tty{M}: If this switch is given, AS generates a file, that contains
definitions of macros defined in the source file that did not
use the \tty{NOEXPORT} option. This new file has the same name as
the source file, only the extension is modified into \tty{MAC}.}
\item{\tty{G}: this switch defines whether AS should produce code or not.
If switched off, the processing will be stopped after the macro
processor. This switch is activated by default (logically,
otherwise you would not get a code file). This switch can be
used in conjunction with the \tty{P} switch, if only the macro
processor of AS shall be used.}
\item{\tty{r [n]}: issue warnings if situations occur that force a further
pass. This information can be used to reduce the number of
passes. You may optionally specify the number of the
first pass where issuing of such messages shall start.
Without this argument, warnings will come starting with
the first pass. Be prepared for a bunch of messages!!}
\item{\tty{cpu $<$name$>$}: this switch allows to set the target processor
AS shall generate code for, in case the source file does not contain
a {\tt CPU} instruction and is not 68008 code.}
\item{\tty{alias $<$new$>$=$<$old$>$}:
defines the processor type \tty{$<$new$>$} to be an alias for the
type \tty{$<$old$>$}. See section \ref{SectAlias} for the sense of
processor aliases.}
\end{itemize}
As long as switches require no arguments and their concatenation does
not result in a multi-letter switch, it is possible to specify several
switches at one time, as in the following example :
\begin{verbatim}
as test*.asm firstprog -cl /i c:\as\8051\include
\end{verbatim}
All files \tty{TEST*.ASM} as well as the file \tty{FIRSTPROG.ASM} will be
assembled, whereby listings of all files are displayed on the
console terminal. Additional sharefiles will be generated in the C-
format. The assembler should search for additional include files
in the directory \verb!C:\AS\8051\INCLUDE!.
This example shows that the assembler assumes \tty{ASM} as the default
extension for source files.
A bit of caution should be applied when using switches that have
optional arguments: if a file specification immediately follows such
aswitch without the optional argument, AS will try to interprete the
file specification as argument - what of course fails:
\begin{verbatim}
as -g test.asm
\end{verbatim}
The solution in this case would either be to move the -g option the
end or to specify an explicit MAP argument.
Beside from specifying options in the command line, permanently
needed options may be placed in the environment variable \tty{ASCMD}. For
example, if someone always wants to have assembly listings and has a
fixed directory for include files, he can save a lot of typing with
the following command:
\begin{verbatim}
set ascmd=-L -i c:\as\8051\include
\end{verbatim}
The environment options are processed before the command line,
so options in the command line can override contradicting ones in the
environment variable.
In the case of very long path names, space in the \tty{ASCMD} variable may
become a problem. For such cases a key file may be the alternative,
in which the options can be written in the same way as in the command
line or the \tty{ASCMD}-variable. But this file may contain several lines
each with a maximum length of 255 characters. In a key file it is
important, that for options which require an argument, switches and
argument have to be written in the \bb{same} line. AS gets informed of
the name of the key file by a \tty{@} aheaded in the \tty{ASCMD} variable,
e.g.
\begin{verbatim}
set ASCMD=@c:\as\as.key
\end{verbatim}
In order to neutralize options in the \tty{ASCMD} variable (or in the
key file), prefix the option with a plus sign. For example, if you
do not want to generate an assembly listing in an individual case,
the option can be retracted in this way:
\begin{verbatim}
as +L <file>
\end{verbatim}
Naturally it is not consequently logical to deny an option by a
plus sign.... UNIX soit qui mal y pense.
References to key files may not only come from the {\tt ASCMD} variable,
but also directly from the command line. Similarly to the {\tt ASCMD}
variable, prepend the file's name with a \@ character:
\begin{verbatim}
as @<file> ....
\end{verbatim}
The options read from a key file in this situation are processed as if
they had been written out in the command line in place of the reference,
{\em not} like the key file referenced by the {\tt ASCMD} variable that is
processed prior to the command line options.
Referencing a key file from a key file itself is not allowed and will be
answered wit an error message by AS.
In case that you like to start AS from another program or a shell and
this shell hands over only lower-case or capital letters in the
command line, the following workaround exists: if a tilde (\verb!~!) is put
in front of an option letter, the following letter is always
interpreted as a lower-case letter. Similarly a \tty{\#} demands the
interpretation as a capital letter. For example, the following
transformations result for:
\begin{verbatim}
/~I ---> /i
-#u ---> -U
\end{verbatim}
In dependence of the assembly's outcome, the assembler ends with
the following return codes:
\begin{description}
\item[0]{error free run, at maximum warnings occurred}
\item[1]{The assembler displayed only its command-line parameters and
terminated immediately afterwards.}
\item[2]{Errors occurred during assembly, no code file has been produced.}
\item[3]{A fatal error occurred what led to immediate termination of the run.}
\item[4]{An error occurred already while starting the assembler.
This may be a parameter error or a faulty overlay file.}
\item[255]{An internal error occurred during initialization that should not
occur in any case...reboot, try again, and contact me if the
problem is reproducible!}
\end{description}
Similar to UNIX, OS/2 \marginpar{{\em OS/2}} extends an application's data
segment on demand when the application really needs the memory.
Therefore, an output like
\begin{verbatim}
511 KByte available memory
\end{verbatim}
does not indicate a shortly to come system crash due to memory lack,
it simply shows the distance to the limit when OS/2 will push up the
data segment's size again...
As there is no compatible way in C \marginpar{{\em UNIX}} under different
operating systens to find out the amount of available memory resp. stack,
both lines are missing completely from the statistics the C version prints.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Format of the Input Files}
\label{AttrTypes}
Like most assemblers, AS expects exactly one instruction per line
(blank lines are naturally allowed as well). The lines must not be
longer than 255 characters, additional characters are discarded.
A single line has following format:
\begin{verbatim}
[label[:]] <mnemonic>[.attr] [param[,param..]] [;comment]
\end{verbatim}
The colon for the label is optional, in case the label starts in the
first column (the consequence is that a mnemonic must not start in
column 1). It is necessary to set the colon in case the label does
not start in the first column so that AS is able to distinguish it
from a mnemonic. In the latter case, there must be at least one space
between colon and mnemonic if the processor belongs to a family that
supports an attribute that denotes an instruction format and is
separated from the mnemonic by a colon. This restriction is
necessary to avoid ambiguities: a distinction between a mnemonic with
format and a label with mnemonic would otherwise be impossible.
Some signal processor families from Texas Instruments optionally use a
double line (\verb!||!) in place of the label to signify the prallel
execution with the previous instruction(s). If these two assembler
instructions become a single instruction word at machine level (C3x), an
additional label in front of the second instruction of course does not
make sense and is not allowed. The situation is different for the C6x
with its instruction packets of variable length: If someone wants to jump
into the middle of an instruction packet (bad style, if you ask me...), he
has to place the necessary label {\em before} into a separate line. The
same is valid for conditions, which however may be combined with the
double line in a single source line.
The attribute is used by a couple of processors to specify variations or
different codings of a certain instruction. The most prominent usage of
the attibute is is the specification of the operand size, for example in
the case of the 680x0 family (table \ref{TabAttrs}).
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
\hline
attribute & arithmetic-logic instruction & jump instruction\\
\hline
\hline
B & byte (8 bits) & --------- \\
W & word (16 bits) & --------- \\
L & long word (32 bits) & 16-bit-displacement \\
Q & quad word (64 bits) & --------- \\
S & single precision (32 bits) & 8-bit-displacement \\
D & double precision (64 bits) & --------- \\
X & extended precision (80/96 bits) & 32-bit-displacement \\
P & decimal floating point (80/96 bits) & --------- \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Allowed Attributes (Example 680x0) \label{TabAttrs}}
\end{table*}
\par
Since this manual is not also meant as a user's manual for the processor
families supported by AS, this is unfortunately not the place to enumerate
all possible attributes for all families. It should however be mentioned
that in general, not all instructions of a given instruction set allow all
attributes and that the omission of an attribute generally leads to the
usage of the ''natural'' operand size of a processor family. For more
thorough studies, consult a reasonable programmer's manual, e.g.
\cite{Williams} for the 68K's.
In the case of TLCS-9000, H8/500, and M16(C), the attribute serves
both as an operand size specifier (if it is not obvious from the
operands) and as a description of the instruction format to be used.
A colon has to be used to separate the format from the operand size,
e.g. like this:
\begin{verbatim}
add.w:g rw10,rw8
\end{verbatim}
This example does not show that there may be a format specification
without an operand size. In contrast, if an operand size is used
without a format specification, AS will automatically use the
shortest possible format. The allowed formats and operand sizes
again depend on the machine instruction and may be looked up e.g. in
\cite{Tosh900}, \cite{HitH8_5}, \cite{MitM16}, resp. \cite{MitM16C}.
The number of instruction parameters depends on the mnemonic and is
principally located between 0 and 20. The separation of the parameters
from each other is to be performed only by commas (exception: DSP56xxx,
its parallel data transfers are separated with blanks). Commas that
are included in brackets or quotes, of course, are not taken into
consideration.
Instead of a comment at the end, the whole line can consist of
comment if it starts in the first column with a semicolon.
To separate the individual components you may also use tabulators
instead of spaces.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Format of the Listing}
The listing produced by AS using the command line options i or I is
roughly divisible into the following parts :
\begin{enumerate}
\item{issue of the source code assembled;}
\item{symbol list;}
\item{usage list;}
\item{cross reference list.}
\end{enumerate}
The two last ones are only generated if they have been demanded by
additional command line options.
In the first part, AS lists the complete contents of all source files
including the produced code. A line of this listing has the following
form:
\begin{verbatim}
[<n>] <line>/<address> <code> <source>
\end{verbatim}
In the field \tty{n}, AS displays the include nesting level. The main file
(the file where assembly was started) has the depth 0, an included
file from there has depth 1 etc.. Depth 0 is not displayed.
In the field \tty{line}, the source line number of the referenced file is
issued. The first line of a file has the number 1. The address at
which the code generated from this line is written follows after the
slash in the field \tty{address}.
The code produced is written behind \tty{address} in the field \tty{code},
in hexadecimal notation. Depending on the processor type and actual
segment the values are formatted either as bytes or 16/32-bit-words.
If more code is generated than the field can take, additional lines
will be generated, in which case only this field is used.
Finally, in the field \tty{source}, the line of the source file is issued in
its original form.
The symbol table was designed in a way that it can be displayed on an
80-column display whenever possible. For symbols of ''normal length'',
a double column output is used. If symbols exceed (with their name
and value) the limit of 40 columns (characters), they will be issued
in a separate line. The output is done in alphabetical order.
Symbols that have been defined but were never used are marked with a
star (*) as prefix.
The parts mentioned so far as well as the list of all macros/functions
defined can be selectively masked out from the listing.
This can be done by the already mentioned command line switch \tty{-t}.
There is an internal byte inside AS whose bits represent which parts
are to be written. The assignment of bits to parts of the listing is
listed in table \ref{TabTBits}.
\par
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
bit & part \\
\hline
\hline
0 & source file(s) + produced code \\
1 & symbol table \\
2 & macro list \\
3 & function list \\
4 & line numbering \\
5 & register symbol list \\
7 & character set table \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Assignment of Bits to Listing Components\label{TabTBits}}
\end{table*}
All bits are set to 1 by default, when using the switch
\begin{verbatim}
-t <mask>
\end{verbatim}
Bits set in \tty{$<$mask$>$} are cleared, so that the respective listing
parts are suppressed. Accordingly it is possible to switch on single
parts again with a plus sign, in case you had switched off too much
with the \tty{ASCMD} variable... If someone wants to have, for example,
only the symbol table, it is enough to write:
\begin{verbatim}
-t 2
\end{verbatim}
The usage list issues the occupied areas hexadecimally for every
single segment. If the area has only one address, only this is written,
otherwise the first and last address.
The cross reference list issues any defined symbol in alphabetical
order and has the following form:
\begin{verbatim}
symbol <symbol name> (=<value>,<file>/<line>):
file <file 1>:
<n1>[(m1)] ..... <nk>[(mk)]
.
.
file <file l>:
<n1>[(m1)] ..... <nk>[(mk)]
\end{verbatim}
The cross reference list lists for every symbol in which files and lines
it has been used. If a symbol was used several times in the same line,
this would be indicated by a number in brackets behind the line number.
If a symbol was never used, it would not appear in the list; The same is
true for a file that does not contain any references for the symbol in
question.
\bb{CAUTION!} AS can only print the listing correctly if it was
previously informed about the output media's page length and width!
This has to be done with the \tty{PAGE} instruction (see there). The
preset default is a length of 60 lines and an unlimited line width.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Symbol Conventions}
\label{SectSymConv}
Symbols are allowed to be up to 255 characters long (as hinted already
in the introduction) and are being distinguished on the whole
length, but the symbol names have to meet some conventions:
Symbol names are allowed to consist of a random combination of
letters, digits, underlines and dots, whereby the first character must
not be a digit. The dot is only allowed to meet the MCS-51 notation of
register bits and should - as far as possible - not be used in own symbol
names. To separate symbol names in any case the underline (\tty{\_}) and not
the dot (\tty{.}) should be used .
AS is by default not case-sensitive, i.e. it does not matter whether
one uses upper or lower case characters. The command line switch \tty{U}
however allows to switch AS into a mode where upper and lower case
makes a difference. The predefined symbol \tty{CASESENSITIVE} signifies
whether AS has been switched to this mode: TRUE means case-sensitiveness,
and FALSE its absence.
Table \ref{TabPredefined} shows the most important symbols which are
predefined by AS.
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
name & meaning \\
\hline
\hline
TRUE & logically ''true'' \\
FALSE & logically ''false'' \\
CONSTPI & Pi (3.1415.....) \\
VERSION & version of AS in BCD-coding, \\
& e.g. 1331 hex for version 1.33p1 \\
ARCHITECTURE & target platform AS was compiled for, in \\
& the style processor-manufacturer-operating \\
& system \\
DATE & date and \\
TIME & time of the assembly (start) \\
MOMCPU & current target CPU \\
& (see the CPU instruction) \\
MOMFILE & current source file \\
MOMLINE & line number in source file \\
MOMPASS & number of the currently running pass \\
MOMSECTION & name of the current section \\
& or an empty string \\
\verb!*!, \$ resp. PC & current value of program counter \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Predefined Symbols\label{TabPredefined}}
\end{table*}
\bb{CAUTION!} While it does not matter in case-sensitive mode which
combination of upper and lower case to use to reference predefined
symbols, one has to use exactly the version given above (only upper
case) when AS is in case-sensitive mode!
Additionally some pseudo instructions define symbols that reflect the
value that has been set with these instructions. Their descriptions
are explained at the individual commands belonging to them.
A hidden feature (that has to be used with care) is that symbol names
may be assembled from the contents of string symbols. This can be
achieved by framing the string symbol's name with braces and
inserting it into the new symbol's name. This allows for example to
define a symbol's name based on the value of another symbol:
\begin{verbatim}
cnt set cnt+1
temp equ "\{CNT}"
jnz skip{temp}
.
.
skip{temp}: nop
\end{verbatim}
\bb{CAUTION:} The programmer has to assure that only valid symbol names
are generated!
A complete list of all symbols predefined by AS can be found in
appendix \ref{AppInternSyms}.
Apart from its value, every symbol also owns a marker which signifies to
which {\em segment} it belongs. Such a distinction is mainly needed for
processors that have more than one address space. The additional
information allows AS to issue a warning when a wrong instruction is used
to access a symbol from a certain address space. A segment attribute is
automatically added to a symbol when is gets defined via a label or a
special instruction like \tty{BIT}; a symbol defined via the ''allround
instructions'' \tty{SET} resp. \tty{EQU} is however ''typeless'', i.e. its
usage will never trigger warnings. A symbol's segment attribute may be
queried via the buit-in function \tty{SYMTYPE}, e.g.:
\begin{verbatim}
Label:
.
.
Attr equ symtype(Label) ; results in 1
\end{verbatim}
The individual segment types have the assigned numbers listed in table
\ref{TabSegNums}. Register symbols which do not really fit into the order
of normal symbols are explained in section \ref{SectRegSyms}. The
\tty{SYMTYPE} function delivers -1 as result when called with an undefined
symbol as argument.
\begin{table}[htb]
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{|l|c|}
\hline
segment & return value \\
\hline
$<$none$>$ & 0 \\
CODE & 1 \\
DATA & 2 \\
IDATA & 3 \\
XDATA & 4 \\
YDATA & 5 \\
BITDATA & 6 \\
IO & 7 \\
REG & 8 \\
ROMDATA & 9 \\
$<$register symbol$>$ & 128 \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\caption{return values of the \tty{SYMTYPE} function\label{TabSegNums}}
\end{table}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Formula Expressions}
In most places where the assembler expects numeric inputs, it is
possible to specify not only simple symbols or constants, but also
complete formula expressions. The components of these formula
expressions can be either single symbols and constants. Constants may be
either integer, floating point, or string constants.
\subsection{Integer Constants}
\label{SectIntConsts}
Integer constants describe non-fractional numbers. They may either be
written as a sequence of digits or as a sequence of characters enclosed in
{\em single} quotation marks. In case they are written as a sequence of
digits, this may be done in different numbering systems (table
\ref{TabSystems}).
\par
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|}
\hline
& Intel mode & Motorola mode & C mode \\
& (Intel, Zilog, & (Rockwell, Motorola, & (PowerPC, \\
& Thomson Texas, & Microchip, Thomson, & AMD 29K, \\
& Toshiba, NEC, & Hitachi, Atmel) & National, \\
& Siemens, Philips, & & Symbios) \\
& Fujitsu, Fairchild) & & \\
\hline
\hline
decimal & direct & direct & direct \\
hexadecimal & followed by H & aheaded \$ & aheaded 0x \\
binary & followed by B & aheaded \% & aheaded 0b \\
octal & followed by O & aheaded @ & aheaded 0 \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Possible Numbering Systems\label{TabSystems}}
\end{table*}
In case the numbering system has not been explicitly stated by adding the
special control characters listed in the table, AS assumes the base given
with the {\tt RADIX} statement (which has itself 10 as default). This
statement allows to set up 'unusual' numbering systems, i.e. others than
2, 8, 10, or 16.
Valid digits are numbers from 0 to 9 and letters from A to Z (value 10 to
35) up to the numbering system's base minus one. The usage of letters in
integer constants however brings along some ambiguities since symbol names
also are sequences of numbers and letters: a symbol name must not start
with a character from 0 to 9. This means that an integer constant which
is not clearly marked a such with a special prefix character never mav
begin with a letter. One has to add an additional, otherwise superfluous
zero in front in such cases. The most prominent case is the writing of
hexadecimal constants in Intel mode: If the leftmost digit is between A
and F, the trailing H doesn't help anything, an additional 0 has to be
prefixed (e.g. 0F0H instead of F0H). The Motorola and C syntaxes whis
both mark the numbering system at the front of a constant do not have this
problem (\ii{hehehe..}).
Quite tricky is furthermore that the higher the default numbering system
set via {\tt RADIX} becomes, the more letters used to denote numbering
systems in Intel and C syntax become 'eaten'. For example, you cannot
write binary constants anymore after a {\tt RADIX 16}, and starting at
{\tt RADIX 18}, the Intel syntax even doesn't allow to write hexadecimal
constants any more. Therefore {\bf CAUTION!}
With the help of the \tty{RELAXED} instruction (see section \ref{SectRELAXED}),
the strict assignment of a syntax to a certain target processor can be
removed. The result is that an arbitrary syntax may be used (loosing
compatibility to standard assemblers). This option is however turned off
by default.
Integer constants may also be written as ASCII values, like in
the following examples:
\begin{verbatim}
'A' ==$41
'AB' ==$4142
'ABCD' ==$41424344
\end{verbatim}
It is important to write the characters in {\em single quotes}, to
distinguish them from string constants (discussed somewhat later).
\subsection{Floating Point Constants}
Floating point constants are to be written in the usual scientific
notation, which is known in the most general form:
\begin{verbatim}
[-]<integer digits>[.post decimal positions][E[-]exponent]
\end{verbatim}
\bb{CAUTION!} The assembler first tries to interprete a constant as an
integer constant and makes a floating-point format try only in case
the first one failed. If someone wants to enforce the evaluation as
a floating point number, this can be done by dummy post decimal
positions, e.g. \tty{2.0} instead of \tty{2}.
\subsection{String Constants}
\label{SectStringConsts}
String constants have to be included in {\em double quotation} marks (to
distinguish them from the abovementioned ASCII-integers). In order to
make it possible to write quotation marks and special characters without
trouble in string constants, an ''escape mechanism'' has been implemented,
which should sound familiar for C programmers:
The assembler understands a backslash (\verb!\!) with a following decimal
number of three digits maximum in the string as a character with the
according decimal ASCII value. The numerical value may alternitavely be
written in hexadecimal or octal notation if it is prefixed with an x resp.
a 0. In case of hexadecimal notation, the maximum number of digits is
limited to 2. For example, it is possible to include an ETC character by
writing {\tt\verb!\!3}. But be careful with the definition of NUL
characters! The C \marginpar{{\em UNIX}} version currently uses C strings
to store strings internally. As C strings use a NUL character for
termination, the usage of NUL characters in strings is currently not
portable!
Some frequently used control characters can also be reached with the
following abbreviations:
\begin{verbatim}
\b : Backspace \a : Bell \e : Escape
\t : Tabulator \n : Linefeed \r : Carriage Return
\\ : Backslash \' or \H : Apostrophe
\" or \I : Quotation marks
\end{verbatim}
Both upper and lower case characters may be used for the
identification letters.
By means of this escape character, you can even work formula
expressions into a string, if they are enclosed by braces: e.g.
\begin{verbatim}
message "root of 81 : \{sqrt(81)}"
\end{verbatim}
results in
\begin{verbatim}
root of 81 : 9
\end{verbatim}
AS chooses with the help of the formula result type the correct
output format, further string constants, however, are to be avoided
in the expression. Otherwise the assembler will get mixed up at the
transformation of capitals into lower case letters. Integer results will
by default be written in hexadecimal notation, which may be changed via
the \tty{OUTRADIX} instruction.
Except for the insertion of formula expressions, you can use this
''escape-mechanism'' as well in ASCII defined integer constants,
like this:
\begin{verbatim}
move.b #'\n',d0
\end{verbatim}
However, everything has its limits, because the parser with higher
priority, which disassembles a line into op-code and parameters, does
not know what it is actually working with, e.g. here:
\begin{verbatim}
move.l #'\'abc',d0
\end{verbatim}
After the third apostrophe, it will not find the comma any more,
because it presumes that it is the start of a further character
constant. An error message about a wrong parameter number is the result.
A workaround would be to write e.g., \verb!\i! instead of \verb!\'!.
\subsection{Evaluation}
The calculation of intermediary results within formula expressions is
always done with the highest available resolution, i.e. 32 bits for
integer numbers, 80 bit for floating point numbers and 255 characters
for strings. An possible test of value range overflows is done only
on the final result.
The portable C version \marginpar{{\em UNIX}} only supports floating
point values up to 64 bits (resulting in a maximum value of roughly
$10^{308}$), but in turn features integer lengths of 64 bits on some
platforms.
\subsection{Operators}
The assembler provides the operands listed in table \ref{TabOps} for
combination.
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|c|l|c|c|c|c|c|}
\hline
operand & function & \#operands & integer & float & string & rank \\
\hline
\hline
$<>$ & inequality & 2 & yes & yes & yes & 14 \\
$>=$ & greater or equal & 2 & yes & yes & yes & 14 \\
$<=$ & less or equal & 2 & yes & yes & yes & 14 \\
$<$ & truly smaller & 2 & yes & yes & yes & 14 \\
$>$ & truly greater & 2 & yes & yes & yes & 14 \\
$=$ & equality & 2 & yes & yes & yes & 14 \\
$==$ & alias for $=$ & & & & & \\
& & & & & & \\
$!!$ & log. XOR & 2 & yes & no & no & 13 \\
$||$ & log. OR & 2 & yes & no & no & 12 \\
\&\& & log. AND & 2 & yes & no & no & 11 \\
\verb! ~~ ! & log. NOT & 1 & yes & no & no & 2 \\
& & & & & & \\
- & difference & 2 & yes & yes & no & 10 \\
+ & sum & 2 & yes & yes & yes & 10 \\
\# & modulo division & 2 & yes & no & no & 9 \\
/ & quotient & 2 & yes*) & yes & no & 9 \\
\verb! * ! & product & 2 & yes & yes & no & 9 \\
\verb! ^ ! & power & 2 & yes & yes & no & 8 \\
& & & & & & \\
$!$ & binary XOR & 2 & yes & no & no & 7 \\
$|$ & binary OR & 2 & yes & no & no & 6 \\
\& & binary AND & 2 & yes & no & no & 5 \\
$><$ & mirror of bits & 2 & yes & no & no & 4 \\
$>>$ & log. shift right & 2 & yes & no & no & 3 \\
$<<$ & log. shift left & 2 & yes & no & no & 3 \\
\verb! ~ ! & binary NOT & 1 & yes & no & no & 1 \\
\hline
\multicolumn{7}{|l|}{*) remainder will be discarded} \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Operators Predefined by AS\label{TabOps}}
\end{table*}
''Rank'' is the priority of an operator at the separation of expressions
into subexpressions. The operator with the highest rank will be
evaluated at the very end. The order of evaluation can be defined by
new bracketing.
The compare operators deliver TRUE in case the condition fits,
and FALSE in case it doesn't. For the logical operators an expression
is TRUE in case it is not 0, otherwise it is FALSE.
The mirroring of bits probably needs a little bit of explanation: the
operator mirrors the lowest bits in the first operand and leaves the
higher priority bits unchanged. The number of bits which is to be
mirrored is given by the right operand and may be between 1 and 32 .
A small pitfall is hidden in the binary complement: As the
computation is always done with 32 resp. 64 bits, its application on
e.g. 8-bit masks usually results in values taht do not fit into 8-bit
numbers any more due to the leading ones. A binary AND with a
fitting mask is therefore unavoidable!
\subsection{Functions}
In addition to the operators, the assembler defines another line of
primarily transcendental functions with floating point arguments which are
listed in tables \ref{TabFuncs1} and \ref{TabFuncs2}.
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|l|}
\hline
name & meaning & argument & result \\
\hline
\hline
SQRT & square root & $arg \geq 0$ & floating point \\
& & & \\
SIN & sine & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
COS & cosine & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
TAN & tangent & $arg \neq (2n+1)*\frac{\pi}{2}$ & floating point \\
COT & cotangent & $arg \neq n*\pi$ & floating point \\
& & & \\
ASIN & inverse sine & $\mid arg \mid \leq 1$ & floating point \\
ACOS & inverse cosine & $\mid arg \mid \leq 1$ & floating point \\
ATAN & inverse tangent & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
ACOT & inverse cotangent & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
& & & \\
EXP & exponential function & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
ALOG & 10 power of argument & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
ALD & 2 power of argument & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
SINH & hyp. sine & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
COSH & hyp. cosine & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
TANH & hyp. tangent & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
COTH & hyp. cotangent & $arg \neq 0$ & floating point \\
& & & \\
LN & nat. logarithm & $arg > 0$ & floating point \\
LOG & dec. logarithm & $arg > 0$ & floating point \\
LD & bin. logarithm & $arg > 0$ & floating point \\
ASINH & inv. hyp. Sine & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
ACOSH & inv. hyp. Cosine & $arg \geq 1$ & floating point \\
ATANH & inv. hyp. Tangent & $arg < 1$ & floating point \\
ACOTH & inv. hyp. Cotangent & $arg > 1$ & floating point \\
& & & \\
INT & integer part & $arg \in \rz$ & floating point \\
\hline
BITCNT & number of one's & integer & integer \\
FIRSTBIT & lowest 1-bit & integer & integer \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Functions Predefined by AS - Part 1 (Integer and
Floating Point Functions \label{TabFuncs1}}
\end{table*}
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|l|}
\hline
name & meaning & argument & result \\
\hline
\hline
LASTBIT & highest 1-bit & integer & integer \\
BITPOS & unique 1-bit & integer & integer \\
& & & \\
SGN & sign (0/1/-1) & floating point & integer \\
& & or integer & \\
ABS & absolute value & integer or & integer or \\
& & floating point & floating point \\
TOUPPER & matching capital & integer & integer \\
TOLOWER & matching lower case & integer & integer \\
& & & \\
UPSTRING & changes all & string & string \\
& characters & & \\
& into capitals & & \\
& & & \\
LOWSTRING & changes all & string & string \\
& characters & & \\
& into to lower case & & \\
& & & \\
STRLEN & returns the length & string & integer \\
& of a string & & \\
& & & \\
SUBSTR & extracts parts of a & string, & string \\
& string & integer, & \\
& & integer & \\
STRSTR & searches a substring & string, & integer \\
& in a string & string & \\
VAL & evaluates contents & string & depends on \\
& as expression & & argument \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Functions Predefined by AS - Part 2 (Integer and
String Functions \label{TabFuncs2}}
\end{table*}
The functions \tty{FIRSTBIT}, \tty{LASTBIT}, and \tty{BITPOS} return -1 as
result if no resp. not exactly one bit is set. \tty{BITPOS} additionally
issues an error message in such a case.
The string function \tty{SUBSTR} expects the source string as first
parameter, the start position as second and the number of characters to be
extracted as third parameter (a 0 means to extract all characters up to
the end). \tty{STRSTR} returns the first occurence of the second string
within the first one resp. -1 if the search pattern was not found. Both
functions number characters in a string starting at 0!
If a function expects floating point arguments, this does not mean it
is impossible to write e.g.
\begin{verbatim}
sqr2 equ sqrt(2)
\end{verbatim}
In such cases an automatic type conversion is engaged. In the reverse
case the \tty{INT}-function has to be applied to convert a floating point
number to an integer. When using this function, you have to pay
attention that the result produced always is a signed integer and
therefore has a value range of approximately +/-2.0E9.
When AS is switched to case-sensitive mode, predefined functions may be
accessed with an arbitrary combination of upper and lower case (in
contrast to predefined symbols). However, in the case of user-defined
functions (see section \ref{SectFUNCTION}), a distinction between upper
and lower case is made. This has e.g. the result that if one defines a
function \tty{Sin}, one can afterwards access this function via \tty{Sin}, but all
other combinations of upper and lower case will lead to the predefined
function.
For a correct conversion \marginpar{{\em DOS/DPMI}} of lower case letters
into capital letters a DOS version $\geq$ 3.30 is required.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Forward References and Other Disasters}
This section is the result of a significant amount of hate on the
(legal) way some people program. This way can lead to trouble in
conjunction with AS in some cases. The section will deal with
so-called 'forward references'. What makes a forward reference
different from a usual reference? To understand the difference, take
a look at the following programming example (please excuse my bias
for the 68000 family that is also present in the rest of this
manual):
\begin{verbatim}
move.l d0,#10
loop: move.l d1,(a1)
beq skip
neg.l d1
skip: move.l (a1+),d1
dbra d0,loop
\end{verbatim}
If one overlooks the loop body with its branch statement, a program
remains that is extremely simple to assemble: the only reference is
the branch back to the body's beginning, and as an assembler
processes a program from the beginning to the end, the symbol's value
is already known before it is needed the first time. If one has a
program that only contains such backward references, one has the nice
situation that only one pass through the source code is needed to
generate a correct and optimal machine code. Some high level
languages like Pascal with their strict rule that everything has to
be defined before it is used exploit exactly this property to speed
up the compilation.
Unfortunately, things are not that simple in the case of assembler,
because one sometimes has to jump forward in the code or there are
reasons why one has to move variable definitions behind the code.
For our example, this is the case for the conditional branch that is
used to skip over another instruction. When the assembler hits the
branch instruction in the first pass, it is confronted with the
situation of either leaving blank all instruction fields related to
the target address or offering a value that ''hurts noone'' via the
formula parser (which has to evaluate the address argument). In case
of a ''simple'' assembler that supports only one target architecture
with a relatively small number of instructions to treat, one will
surely prefer the first solution, but the effort for AS with its
dozens of target architectures would have become extremely high.
Only the second way was possible: If an unknown symbol is detected in
the first pass, the formula parser delivers the program counter's
current value as result! This is the only value suitable to offer an
address to a branch instruction with unknown distance length that
will not lead to errors. This answers also a frequently asked
question why a first-pass listing (it will not be erased e.g. when AS
does not start a second pass due to additional errors) partially
shows wrong addresses in the generated binary code - they are the
result of unresolved forward references.
The example listed above however uncovers an additional difficulty of
forward references: Depending on the distance of branch instruction
and target in the source code, the branch may be either long or
short. The decision however about the code length - and therefore
about the addresses of following labels - cannot be made in the first
pass due to missing knowledge about the target address. In case the
programmer did not explicitly mark whether a long or short branch
shall be used, genuine 2-pass assemblers like older versions of MASM
from Microsoft ''solve'' the problem by reserving space for the longest
version in the first pass (all label addresses have to be fixed after
the first pass) and filling the remaining space with \tty{NOP}s in the
second pass. AS versions up to 1.37 did the same before I switched
to the multipass principle that removes the strict separation into
two passes and allows an arbitrary number of passes. Said in detail,
the optimal code for the assumed values is generated in the first
pass. In case AS detects that values of symbols changed in the second
pass due to changes in code lengths, simply a third pass is done, and
as the second pass'es new symbol values might again shorten or
lengthen the code, a further pass is not impossible. I have seen
8086 programs that needed 12 passes to get everything correct and
optimal. Unfortunately, this mechanism does not allow to specify a
maximum number passes; I can only advise that the number of passes
goes down when one makes more use of explicit length specifications.
Especially for large programs, another situation might arise: the
position of a forward directed branch has moved so much in the second
pass relative to the first pass that the old label value still valid
is out of the allowed branch distance. AS knows of such situations
and suppresses all error messages about too long branches when it is
clear that another pass is needed. This works for 99\% of all cases,
but there are also constructs where the first critical instruction
appears so early that AS had no chance up to now to recognize that
another pass is needed. The following example constructs such a
situation with the help of a forward reference (and was the reason
for this section's heading...):
\begin{verbatim}
cpu 6811
org $8000
beq skip
rept 60
ldd Var
endm
skip: nop
Var equ $10
\end{verbatim}
Due to the address position, AS assumes long addresses in the first
pass for the \tty{LDD} instructions, what results in a code length of 180
bytes and an out of branch error message in the second pass (at the
point of the \tty{BEQ} instruction, the old value of \tty{skip} is still valid,
i.e. AS does not know at this point that the code is only 120 bytes
long in reality) is the result. The error can be avoided in three
different ways:
\begin{enumerate}
\item{Explicitly tell AS to use short addressing for the \tty{LDD}
instructions (\tty{ldd <Var})}
\item{Remove this damned, rotten forward reference and place the \tty{EQU}
statement at the beginning where it has to be (all right, I'm
already calming down...)}
\item{For real die-hards: use the \tty{-Y} command line option. This
option tells AS to forget the error message when the address
change has been detected. Not pretty, but...}
\end{enumerate}
Another tip regarding the \tty{EQU} instruction: AS cannot know in which
context a symbol defined with \tty{EQU} will be used, so an \tty{EQU} containing
forward references will not be done at all in the first pass. Thus,
if the symbol defined with \tty{EQU} gets forward-referenced in the second
pass:
\begin{verbatim}
move.l #sym2,d0
sym2 equ sym1+5
sym1 equ 0
\end{verbatim}
one gets an error message due to an undefined symbol in the second
pass...but why on earth do people do such things?
Admittedly, this was quite a lengthy excursion, but I thought it was
necessary. Which is the essence you should learn from this section?
\begin{enumerate}
\item{AS always tries to generate the shortest code possible. A
finite number of passes is needed for this. If you do not tweak
AS extremely, AS will know no mercy...}
\item{Whenever sensible and possible, explicitly specify branch and
address lengths. There is a chance of significantly reducing the
number of passes by this.}
\item{Limit forward references to what is absolutely needed. You make
your and AS's live much easier this way!}
\end{enumerate}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Register Symbols}
\label{SectRegSyms} \ttindex{register symbols}
{\em valid for: PowerPC, M-Core, 4004, 80C16x, AVR}
Sometimes it is desirable not only to assign symbolic names to memory
addresses or constants, but also to a register, to emphasize its function
in a certain program section. This is no problem for processors that
treat registers simply as another address space, as this allows to use
numeric expressions and one can use simple \tty{EQU}s to define such
symbols. (e.g. for the MCS-96 or TMS70000). However, for most
processors, register identifiers are fixed literals which are seperately
treated by AS for speed reasons. A special mechanism is therefore
necessary to define symbolic register names. A register symbol is usually
defined via the \tty{REG} instruction, which has otherwise the same syntax
as an \tty{EQU} definition. This however has a couple of restrictions: A
register symbol is a pure character string stored 'as is' which may
exclusively be used this way. For example, no arithmetic is allowed to
calculate a register's successor, like in the following example:
\begin{verbatim}
myreg reg r17 ; definition of register symbol
addi myreg+1,3 ; does not work!
\end{verbatim}
Additionally, a register symbol has to be defined prior to ist first
usage; a forward reference would have the result that AS suspects a
forward reference to a memory location in case a register symbol is not
found. Since the usage of memory operands is far more limited on most
processors, a bunch of errors would be the result...
Analogous to ordinary symbols, register symbols are local to sections and
it is possible to access a register symbol from a specific section by
appending the section's name enclosed in brackets. Due to the missing
ability to do forward references, there is nothing like a \tty{FORWARD}
directive, and an export by something comparable to \tty{PUBLIC} or
\tty{GLOBAL} is also not possible since register symbols generally have
their meaning in a small context.
If there is both an ordinary and a register symbol of same name present in
a context, the register symbol will be preferred. This is however not the
case when the name is embedded into a complex expression (parentheses are
sufficient!), the normal symbol will be used then.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Sharefile}
\label{ChapShareMain}
\ttindex{SHARED}
This function is a by-product from the old pure-68000 predecessors of
AS, I have kept them in case someone really needs it. The basic
problem is to access certain symbols produced during assembly,
because possibly someone would like to access the memory of the
target system via this address information. The assembler allows to
export symbol values by means of \tty{SHARED} pseudo commands (see there).
For this purpose, the assembler produces a text file with the required
symbols and its values in the second pass. This file may be included
into a higher-level language or another assembler program. The
format of the text file (C, Pascal or Assembler) can be set by the
command line switches \tty{p, c} or, \tty{a}.
\bb{CAUTION!} If none of the switches is given, no file will be
generated and it makes no difference if \tty{SHARED}-commands are in the
source text or not!
When creating a Sharefile, AS does not check if a file with the
same name already exists, such a file will be simply overwritten.
In my opinion a request does not make sense, because AS would
ask at each run if it should overwrite the old version of the
Sharefile, and that would be really annoying...
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Processor Aliases}
\label{SectAlias}
Common microcontroller families are like rabbits: They become more at
a higher speed than you can provide support for them. Especially the
development of processor cores as building blocks for ASICs and of
microcontroller families with user-definable peripherals has led to a
steeply rising number of controllers that only deviate from a
well-known type by a slightly modified peripheral set. But the
distinction among them is still important, e.g. for the design of
include files that only define the appropriate subset of peripherals.
I have struggled up to now to integrate the most important
reperesentatives of a processor family into AS (and I will continue
to do this), but sometimes I just cannot keep pace with the
development...there was an urgent need for a mechanism to extend the
list of processors by the user.
The result are processor aliases: the alias command line option allows to
define a new processor type, whose instruction set is equal to another
processor built into AS. After switching to this processor via the
\tty{CPU} instruction, AS behaves exactly as if the original processor had
been used, with a single difference: the variables \tty{MOMCPU} resp.
\tty{MOMCPUNAME} are set to the alias name, which allows to use the new
name for differentiation, e.g. in include files.
There were two reasons to realize the definition of aliases by the
command line and not by pseudo instructions: first, it would anyway be
difficult to put the alias definitions together with register definitions
into a single include file, because a program that wants to use such a
file would have to include it before and after the CPU instruction - an
imagination that lies somewhere between inelegant and impossible. Second,
the definition in the command line allows to put the definitions in a key
file that is executed automatically at startup via the \tty{ASCMD}
variable, without a need for the program to take any further care about
this.
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Pseudo Instructions}
Not all pseudo instructions are defined for all processors. A note
that shows the range of validity is therefore prepended to every
individual description.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Definitions}
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SET and EQU}
\ttindex{SET}\ttindex{EQU}
{\em valid for: all processors}
\tty{SET} and \tty{EQU} allow the definition of typeless constants, i.e. they
will not be assigned to a segment and their usage will not generate warnings
because of segment mixing. \tty{EQU} defines constants which can not be
modified (by \tty{EQU}) again, but \tty{SET} permits the definition of
variables, which can be modified during the assembly. This is useful e.g.
for the allocation of resources like interrupt vectors, as shown in the
following example:
\begin{verbatim}
VecCnt set 0 ; somewhere at the beginning
.
.
.
DefVec macro Name ; allocate a new vector
Name equ VecCnt
VecCnt set VecCnt+4
endm
.
.
.
DefVec Vec1 ; results in Vec1=0
DefVec Vec2 ; results in Vec2=4
\end{verbatim}
constants and variables are internally stored in the same way, the only
difference is that they can be modified by \tty{SET} and not by
\tty{EQU}. It is therefore possible to define a symbol with \tty{EQU} and
to change it with \tty{SET} (even if this is not its real business).
There is also another reason to avoid this explicitly: In contrast to
\tty{SET}, \tty{EQU} checks whether the newly assigned value is different
to from a value that previously might have existed. As the value should
not change for constants defined with \tty{EQU}, AS assumes a phase error
and starts another pass...for example, if one would use \tty{EQU} instead of
\tty{SET} to initialize the counter in the previous example, AS would not
quarrel as a single reassignment per pass is valid (this line is executed
only $n$ times in $n$ passes), but endless repassing would be the result as
the counter's initial value is always different to the final value in the
previous pass.
\tty{EQU/SET} allow to define constants of all possible types, e.g.
\begin{verbatim}
IntTwo equ 2
FloatTwo equ 2.0
\end{verbatim}
Some processors unfortunately have already a \tty{SET} instruction. For
these targets, \tty{EVAL} must be used instead of \tty{SET}.
A simple equation sign may be used instead of \tty{EQU}. Similarly, one
may simply write \tty{:=} instead of \tty{SET} resp. \tty{EVAL}.
Symbols defined with \tty{SET} or \tty{EQU} are typeless by default, but
optionally a segment name (\tty{CODE, DATA, IDATA, XDATA, YDATA, BITDATA,
IO}, or \tty{REG}) or \tty{MOMSEGMENT} for the currently active segment
may be given as a second parameter, allowing to assign the symbol to a
specific address space. AS does not check at this point if the used
address space exists on the currently active target processor!
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SFR and SFRB}
\ttindex{SFR}\ttindex{SFRB}
{\em valid for: various, \tty{SFRB} only MCS-51}
These instructions act like \tty{EQU}, but symbols defined with them are
assigned to the directly addressable data segment, i.e. they serve
preferential for the definition of RAM-cells and (as the name lets guess)
hardware registers mapped into the data area. The allowed range of values
is equal to the range allowed for \tty{ORG} in the data segment (see
section \ref{SectORG}). The difference between \tty{SFR} and \tty{SFRB}
is that \tty{SFRB} marks the register as bit addressable, which is why AS
generates 8 additional symbols which will be assigned to the bit segment
and carry the names xx.0 to xx.7, e.g.
\begin{verbatim}
PSW sfr 0d0h ; results in PSW = D0H (data segment)
PSW sfrb 0d0h ; results in extra PSW.0 = D0H (bit)
; to PSW.7 = D7H (bit)
\end{verbatim}
The \tty{SFRB} instruction is not any more defined for the 80C251 as it
allows direct bit access to all SFRs without special bit symbols; bits
like \tty{PSW.0} to \tty{PSW.7} are automatically present.
Whenever a bit-addressable register is defined via \tty{SFRB}, AS checks
if the memory address is bit addressable (range 20h..3fh resp. 80h, 88h,
90h, 98h...0f8h). If it is not bit-addressable, a warning is issued and
the generated bit symbols are undefined.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{XSFR and YSFR}
\ttindex{XSFR}\ttindex{YSFR}
{\em valid for: DSP56xxx}
Also the DSP56000 has a few peripheral registers memory-mapped to the RAM,
but the affair becomes complicated because there are two data areas, the
X- and Y-area. This architecture allows on the one hand a higher
parallelism, but forces on the other hand to divide the normal \tty{SFR}
instruction into the two above mentioned variations. They works
identically to \tty{SFR}, just that \tty{XSFR} defines a symbol in the X-
addressing space and YSFR a corresponding one in the Y-addressing space.
The allowed value range is 0..\$ffff.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{LABEL}
\ttindex{LABEL}
{\em valid for: all processors}
The function of the \tty{LABEL} instruction is identical to \tty{EQU}, but
the symbol does not become typeless, it gets the attribute ''code''.
\tty{LABEL} is needed exactly for one purpose: Labels are normally local
in macros, that means they are not accessible outside of a macro. With an
\tty{EQU} instruction you could get out of it nicely, but the phrasing
\begin{verbatim}
<name> label $
\end{verbatim}
generates a symbol with correct attributes.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{BIT}
\ttindex{BIT}
{\em valid for: MCS/(2)51, XA, 80C166, 75K0, ST9}
\tty{BIT} serves to equate a single bit of a memory cell with a symbolic
name. This instruction varies from target platform to target platform due
to the different ways in which processors handle bit manipulation and
addressing:
The MCS/51 family has an own address space for bit operands. The function
of \tty{BIT} is therefore quite similar to \tty{SFR}, i.e. a simple integer
symbol with the specified value is generated and assigned to the
\tty{BDATA} segment. For all other processors, bit addressing is done in
a two-dimensional fashion with address and bit position. In these cases,
AS packs both parts into an integer symbol in a way that depends on the
currently active target processor and separates both parts again when the
symbol is used. The latter is is also valid for the 80C251: While an
instruction like
\begin{verbatim}
My_Carry bit PSW.7
\end{verbatim}
would assign the value 0d7h to \tty{My\_Carry} on an 8051, a value of
070000d0h would be generated on an 80C251, i.e. the address is located in
bits 0..7 and the bit position in bits 24..26. This procedure is equal to
the way the \tty{DBIT} instruction handles things on a TMS370 and is also
used on the 80C166, with the only difference that bit positions may range
from 0..15:
\begin{verbatim}
MSB BIT r5.15
\end{verbatim}
On a Philips XA, the bit's address is located in bits 0..9 just with
the same coding as used in machine instructions, and the 64K bank of
bits in RAM memory is placed in bits 16..23.
The \tty{BIT} instruction of the 75K0 family even goes further: As bit
expressions may not only use absolute base addresses, even expressions
like
\begin{verbatim}
bit1 BIT @h+5.2
\end{verbatim}
are allowed.
The ST9 in turn allows to invert bits, what is also allowed in the
\tty{BIT} instruction:
\begin{verbatim}
invbit BIT r6.!3
\end{verbatim}
More about the ST9's \tty{BIT} instruction can be found in the processor
specific hints.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DBIT}
\ttindex{DBIT}
{\em valid for: TMS 370xxx}
Though the TMS370 series does not have an explicit bit segment, single bit
symbols may be simulated with this instruction. \tty{DBIT} requires two
operands, the address of the memory cell that contains the bit and the
exact position of the bit in the byte. For example,
\begin{verbatim}
INT3 EQU P019
INT3_ENABLE DBIT 0,INT3
\end{verbatim}
defines the bit that enables interrupts via the INT3 pin. Bits defined
this way may be used in the instructions \tty{SBIT0, SBIT1, CMPBIT,
JBIT0}, and \tty{JBIT}.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{PORT}
\ttindex{PORT}
{\em valid for: 8080/8085/8086, XA, Z80, 320xx, TLCS-47, AVR}
\tty{PORT} works similar to \tty{EQU}, just the symbol becomes assigned to the
I/O-address range. Allowed values are 0..7 at the 3201x, 0..15 at the
320C2x, 0..65535 at the 8086, 0..63 at the AVR, and 0..255 at the rest.
Example : an 8255 PIO is located at address 20H:
\begin{verbatim}
PIO_port_A port 20h
PIO_port_B port PIO_port_A+1
PIO_port_C port PIO_port_A+2
PIO_ctrl port PIO_port_A+3
\end{verbatim}
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{REG}
\ttindex{REG}
{\em valid for: AVR, M*Core, ST9, 80C16x}
Though it always has the same syntax, this instruction has a slightly
different meaning from processor to processor: If the processor uses a
separate addressing space for registers, \tty{REG} has the same effect as
a simple \tty{EQU} for this address space (e.g. for the ST9). \tty{REG}
defines register symbols for all other processors whose function is
described in section \ref{SectRegSyms}.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{LIV and RIV}
\ttindex{LIV}\ttindex{RIV}
{\em valid for: 8X30x}
\tty{LIV} and \tty{RIV} allow to define so-called ''IV bus objects''.
These are
groups of bits located in a peripheral memory cell with a length of 1
up to 8 bits, which can afterwards be referenced symbolically. The
result is that one does not anymore have to specify address,
position, and length separately for instructions that can refer to
peripheral bit groups. As the 8X30x processors feature two
peripheral address spaces (a ''left'' and a ''right'' one), there are two
separate pseudo instructions. The parameters of these instructions
are however equal: three parameters have to be given that specify
address, start position and length. Further hints for the usage of
bus objects can be found in section \ref{8X30xSpec} .
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{CHARSET}
\ttindex{CHARSET}
{\em valid for: all processors}
Single board systems, especially when driving LCDs, frequently use
character sets different to ASCII. So it is probably purely coincidental
that the umlaut coding corresponds with the one used by the PC. To avoid
error-prone manual encoding, the assembler contains a translation table
for characters which assigns a target character to each source-code. To
modify this table (which initial translates 1:1), one has to use the
\tty{CHARSET} instruction. \tty{CHARSET} may be used with different
numbers and types of parameters. If there is only a single parameter, it
has to be a string expression which is interpreted as a file name by AS.
AS reads the first 256 bytes from this table and copies them into the
translation table. This allows to activate complex, externally generated
tables with a single statement. For all other variants, the first
parameter has to be an integer in the range of 0 to 255 which designates
the start index of the entries to be modified in the translation table.
One or two parameters follow, giving the type of modification:
A single additional integer modies exactly one entry. For example,
\begin{quote}{\tt
CHARSET '\"a',128
}\end{quote}
means that the target system codes the '\"a' into the number 128
(80H). If however two more integers are given, the first one describes
the last entry to be modified, and the second the new value of the first
table entry. All entries up to the index end are loaded sequentially.
For example, in case that the target system does not support lower-case
characters, a simple
\begin{verbatim}
CHARSET 'a','z','A'
\end{verbatim}
translates all lower-case characters automatically into the
matching capital letters.
For the last variant, a string follows the start index and contains the
characters to be placed in the table. The last example therefore may also
be written as
\begin{verbatim}
CHARSET 'a',"ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ"
\end{verbatim}
\tty{CHARSET} may also be called without any parameters, which however has
a drastical effect: the translation table is reinitialized to its initial
state, i.e. all character translations are removed.
\bb{CAUTION!} \tty{CHARSET} not only affects string constants stored in
memory, but also integer constants written as ''ASCII''. This means that
an already modified translation table can lead to other results in the
above mentioned examples!
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{CODEPAGE}
\ttindex{CODEPAGE}
{\em valid for: all processors}
Though the \tty{CHARSET} statement gives unlimited freedom in the
character assignment between host and target platform, switching among
different character {\em sets} can become quite tedious if several
character sets have to be supported on the target platform. The
\tty{CODEPAGE} instruction however allows to define and keep different
character sets and to switch with a single statement among them.
\tty{CODEPAGE} expects one or two arguments: the name of the set to be
used hereafter and optionally the name of another table that defines its
initial contents (the second parameter therefore only has a meaning for
the first switch to the table when AS automatically creates it). If the
second parameter is missing, the initial contents of the new table are
copied from the previously active set. All subsequent \tty{CHARSET}
statements {\em only} modify the new set.
At the beginning of a pass, AS automatically creates a single character
set with the name \tty{STANDARD} with a one-to-one translation. If no
\tty{CODEPAGE} instructions are used, all settings made via \tty{CHARSET}
refer to this table.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{ENUM}
\ttindex{ENUM}
{\em valid for: all processors}
Similar to the same-named instruction known from C, \tty{ENUM} is used to
define enumeration types, i.e. a sequence of integer constants that
are assigned sequential values starting at 0. The parameters are the
names of the symbols, like in the following example:
\begin{verbatim}
ENUM SymA,SymB,SymC
\end{verbatim}
This instruction will assign the values 0, 1, and 2 to the symbols
\tty{SymA, SymB,} and \tty{SymC}.
\tty{ENUM} instructions are always single-line instructions, i.e. the
enumeration will again start at zero when a new \tty{ENUM} instruction is
found. Multi-line enumerations may however be achieved with a small trick
that exploits the fact that the internal counter can be set to a new value
with an explicit assignment, like in the following case:
\begin{verbatim}
ENUM January=1,February,March,April,May,June
\end{verbatim}
The numeric values 1..6 are assigned to month names. One can
continue the enumeration in the following way:
\begin{verbatim}
ENUM July=June+1,August,September,October
ENUM November=October+1,December
\end{verbatim}
A definition of a symbol with \tty{ENUM} is equal to a definition with
\tty{EQU}, i.e. it is not possible to assign a new value to a symbol that
already exists.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{STRUCT and ENDSTRUCT}
\ttindex{STRUCT}\ttindex{ENDSTRUCT}
{\em valid for: all processors}
Even for assembler programs, there is from time to time the need to
define complex data structures similar to high-level languages. AS
supports this via the instructions \tty{STRUCT} and \tty{ENDSTRUCT} that begin
resp. finish the definition of such a structure. The operation is
simple: Upon occurrence of a \tty{STRUCT}, the current value of the program
counter is saved and the PC is reset to zero. By doing so, all
labels placed obtain the offset values of the structure's members.
The reservation of space for the individual fields is done with the
instructions used on the currently active processor to reserve memory
space, e.g. \tty{DS.x} for Motorolas and \tty{DB} \& co. for Intels. The label
prepended to \tty{STRUCT} (not optional) is the record's name and may
optionally be repeated for the \tty{ENDSTRUCT} statement. \tty{ENDSTRUCT}
furthermore places the record's total length in the symbol
\tty{$<$Name\_len$>$}
(one may force the usage of another symbol by giving its name as an
argument to \tty{ENDSTRUCT}). For example, in the definition
\begin{verbatim}
Rec STRUCT
Ident db ?
Pad db ?
Pointer dd ?
Rec ENDSTRUCT
\end{verbatim}
the symbol \tty{Rec\_len} would obtain the value 6. \bb{CAUTION!} Inside
of a structure definition, no instructions may be used that generate code,
as this is a pure placement of elements in the address space!
\tty{STRUCT} definitions may be nested; after the inner \tty{STRUCT} definition
has been ended, the address counter of the outer structure will be
automatically incremented by the inner structure's size (the counting
inside the inner structure of course starts at zero).
To avoid ambiguities when fields in different structures have same
names, AS by default prepends the structures name to the field names,
separated by an underbar. For the example listed above, the symbols
\tty{Rec\_Ident, Rec\_Pad,} and \tty{Rec\_Pointer} would be created. This
behaviour can be suppressed by giving \tty{NOEXTNAMES} as a parameter to
the \tty{STRUCT} statement. This works in the same sense for nested
structure definitions, i.e. field names are extended by the names of all
structures that did not obtain a \tty{NOEXTNAMES} directive.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{PUSHV and POPV}
\ttindex{PUSHV}\ttindex{POPV}
{\em valid for: all processors}
\tty{PUSHV} and \tty{POPV} allow to temporarily save the value of a symbol
(that is not macro-local) and to restore it at a later point of time. The
storage is done on stacks, i.e. Last-In-First-Out memory structures. A
stack has a name that has to fulfill the general rules for symbol names
and it exists as long as it contains at least one element: a stack that
did not exist before is automatically created upon \tty{PUSHV}, and a
stack becoming empty upon a \tty{POPV} is deleted automatically. The name
of the stack that shall be used to save or restore symbols is the first
parameter of \tty{PUSH} resp. \tty{POPV}, followed by a list of symbols as
further parameters. All symbols referenced in the list already have to
exist, it is therefore \bb{not} possible to implicitly define symbols with
a \tty{POPV} instruction.
Stacks are a global resource, i.e. their names are not local to
sections.
It is important to note that symbol lists are \bb{always} processed from
left to right. Someone who wants to pop several variables from a stack
with a \tty{POPV} therefore has to use the exact reverse order used in the
corresponding \tty{PUSHV}!
The name of the stack may be left blank, like this:
\begin{verbatim}
pushv ,var1,var2,var3
.
.
popv ,var3,var2,var1
\end{verbatim}
AS will then use a predefined internal default stack.
AS checks at the end of a pass if there are stacks that are not empty and
issues their names together with their ''filling level''. This allows to
find out if there are any unpaired \tty{PUSHVs} or \tty{POPVs}. However,
it is in no case possible to save values in a stack beyond the end of a
pass: all stacks are cleared at the beginning of a pass!
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Code Modification}
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{ORG}
\label{SectORG}
\ttindex{ORG}
{\em valid for: all processors}
\tty{ORG} allows to load the internal address counter (of the assembler)
with a new value. The value range depends on the currently selected
segment and on the processor type (tables \ref{TabORG1} to \ref{TabORG4}).
The lower bound is always zero, and the upper bound is the given value
minus 1:
\small
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
\hline
\tin{processor} & \tin{CODE} & \tin{DATA} & \tin{IDATA} & \tin{XDATA} & \tin{YDATA} & \tin{BITDATA} & \tin{IO} & \tin{REG} & \tin{ROMDATA} \\
\hline
\hline
\input{../doc_DE/taborg1.tex}
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Address Ranges for \tty{ORG} --- Part 1\label{TabORG1}}
\end{table*}
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
\hline
\tin{processor} & \tin{CODE} & \tin{DATA} & \tin{IDATA} & \tin{XDATA} & \tin{YDATA} & \tin{BITDATA} & \tin{IO} & \tin{REG} & \tin{ROMDATA} \\
\hline
\hline
\input{../doc_DE/taborg2.tex}
\hline
\multicolumn{10}{|l|}{*) As the 8051 does not have any RAM beyond 80h, this value has to be} \\
\multicolumn{10}{|l|}{ adapted with ORG for the 8051 as target processor!!}\\
\hline
\multicolumn{10}{|l|}{+) As the Z180 still can address only 64K logically, the whole}\\
\multicolumn{10}{|l|}{ address space can only be reached via \tty{PHASE} instructions!}\\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Address Ranges for \tty{ORG} --- Part 2\label{TabORG2}}
\end{table*}
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
\hline
\tin{processor} & \tin{CODE} & \tin{DATA} & \tin{IDATA} & \tin{XDATA} & \tin{YDATA} & \tin{BITDATA} & \tin{IO} & \tin{REG} & \tin{ROMDATA} \\
\hline
\hline
\input{../doc_DE/taborg3.tex}
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Address Ranges for \tty{ORG} --- Part 3\label{TabORG3}}
\end{table*}
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
\hline
\tin{processor} & \tin{CODE} & \tin{DATA} & \tin{IDATA} & \tin{XDATA} & \tin{YDATA} & \tin{BITDATA} & \tin{IO} & \tin{REG} & \tin{ROMDATA} \\
\hline
\hline
\input{../doc_DE/taborg4.tex}
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Address Ranges for \tty{ORG} --- Part 4\label{TabORG4}}
\end{table*}
\normalsize
In case that different variations in a processor family have address
spaces of different size, the maximum range is listed for each.
\tty{ORG} is mostly needed to give the code a new starting address or to
put different, non-continuous code parts into one source file. In case
there is no explicit other value listet in a table entry, the initial
address for this segment (i.e. the start address used without {\tt ORG})
is 0.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{CPU}
\ttindex{CPU}
{\em valid for: all processors}
This command rules for which processor the further code shall be
generated. Instructions of other processor families are not
accessible afterwards and will produce error messages!
The processors can roughly be distinguished in families, inside the
families different types additionally serve for a detailed
distinction:
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
\begin{tabbing}
\hspace{0.7cm} \= \kill
a) \> 68008 $\rightarrow$ 68000 $\rightarrow$ 68010 $\rightarrow$ 68012 $\rightarrow$ \\
\> MCF5200 $\rightarrow$ 68332 $\rightarrow$ 68340 $\rightarrow$ 68360 $\rightarrow$ \\
\> 68020 $\rightarrow$ 68030 $\rightarrow$ 68040
\end{tabbing}
\end{quote}
The differences in this family lie in additional instructions and
addressing modes (starting from the 68020). A small exception is the step
to the 68030 that misses two instructions: \tty{CALLM} and \tty{RTM}. The
three representors of the 683xx family have the same processor core (a
slightly reduced 68020 CPU), however completely different peripherals.
MCF5200 represents the ColdFire family from Motorola, RISC processors
downwardly binary compatible to the 680x0. For the 68040, additional
control registers (reachable via \tty{MOVEC}) and instructions for control
of the on-chip MMU and caches were added.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
b) 56000 $\longrightarrow$ 56002 $\longrightarrow$ 56300
\end{quote}
While the 56002 only adds instructions for incrementing and decrementing
the accumulators, the 56300 core is almost a new processor: all address
spaces are enlarged from 64K words to 16M and the number of instructions
almost has been doubled.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
c) PPC403 $\rightarrow$ MPPC403 $\rightarrow$ MPC505 $\rightarrow$ MPC601 $\rightarrow$ RS6000
\end{quote}
The PPC403 is a reduced version of the PowerPC line without a floating
point unit, which is why all floating point instructions are disabled for
him; in turn, some microcontroller-specific instructions have been added
which are unique in this family. The GC variant of the PPC403
incorporates an additional MMU and has therefore some additional
instructions for its control. The MPC505 (a microcontroller variant
without a FPU) only differ in its peripheral registers from the 601 as
long as I do not know it better - \cite{Mot505} is a bit reluctant in this
respect... The RS6000 line knows a few instructions more (that are
emulated on many 601-based systems), IBM additionally uses different
mnemonics for their pure workstation processors, as a reminiscence of 370
mainframes...
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
d) MCORE
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
e) 6800 $\rightarrow$ 6301 $\rightarrow$ 6811
\end{quote}
While the 6301 only offers a few additional instructions, the 6811
delivers a second index register and much more instructions.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
f) 6809/6309 and 6805/68HC08
\end{quote}
These processors are partially source-code compatible to the other
68xx processors, but they have a different binary code format and a
significantly reduced (6805) resp. enhanced (6809) instruction set.
The 6309 is a CMOS version of the 6809 which is officially only
compatible to the 6809, but inofficially offers more registers and a
lot of new instructions (see \cite{Kaku}).
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
g) 68HC12
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
h) 68HC16
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
i) HD6413308 $\rightarrow$ HD6413309
\end{quote}
These both names represent the 300 and 300H variants of the H8
family; the H version owns a larger address space (16Mbytes instead
of 64Kbytes), double-width registers (32 bits), and knows a few more
instructions and addressing modes. It is still binary upward
compatible.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
j) HD6475328 $\rightarrow$ HD6475348 $\rightarrow$ HD6475368 $\rightarrow$ HD6475388
\end{quote}
These processors all share the same CPU core; the different types are
only needed to include the correct subset of registers in the file
\tty{REG53X.INC}.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
k) SH7000 $\rightarrow$ SH7600 $\longrightarrow$ SH7700
\end{quote}
The processor core of the 7600 offers a few more instructions that
close gaps in the 7000's instruction set (delayed conditional and
relative and indirect jumps, multiplications with 32-bit operands and
multiply/add instructions). The 7700 series (also known as SH3)
furthermore offers a second register bank, better shift instructions, and
instructions to control the cache.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
l) 6502 $\rightarrow$ 65(S)C02 / MELPS740 / 6502UNDOC
\end{quote}
The CMOS version defines some additional instructions, as well as a number of
some instruction/addressing mode combinations were added which were not
possible on the 6502. The Mitsubishi micro controllers in opposite expand
the 6502 instruction set primarily to bit operations and multiplication /
division instructions. Except for the unconditional jump and instructions
to increment/decrement the accumulator, the instruction extensions are
orthogonal. The 65SC02 lacks the bit manipulation instructions of the
65C02. The 6502UNDOC processor type enables access to the "undocumented"
6502 instructions, i.e. the operations that result from the usage of bit
combinations in the opcode that are not defined as instructions. The
variants supported by AS are listed in the appendix containing processor-specific
hints.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
m) MELPS7700, 65816
\end{quote}
Apart from a '16-bit-version' of the 6502's instruction set, these
processors both offer some instruction set extensions. These are
however orthogonal as they are oriented along their 8-bit
predecessors (65C02 resp. MELPS-740). Partially, different
mnemonics are used for the same operations.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
n) MELPS4500
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
o) M16
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
p) M16C
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
q) 4004
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
r) 8021, 8022, 8039, 80C39, 8048, 80C48, 8041, 8042
\end{quote}
For the ROM-less versions 8039 and 80C39, the commands which are
using the BUS (port 0) are forbidden. The 8021 and 8022 are special
versions with a strongly shrinked instruction set, for which the 8022
has two A/D- converters and the necessary control-commands. It is
possible to transfer the CMOS-versions with the \tty{IDL}-command into a
stop mode with lower current consumption. The 8041 and 8042 have
some additional instructions for controlling the bus interface, but
in turn a few other commands were omitted. Moreover, the code
address space of these processors is not externally extendable,
and so AS limits the code segment of these processors to 1 resp. 2
Kbytes.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
\begin{tabbing}
\hspace{0.7cm} \= \kill
s) \> 87C750 $\rightarrow$ 8051, 8052, 80C320, 80C501, 80C502, \\
\> 80C504, 80515, and 80517 $\rightarrow$ 80C251
\end{tabbing}
\end{quote}
The 87C750 can only access a maximum of 2 Kbytes program memory which is
why it lacks the \tty{LCALL} and \tty{LJMP} instructions. AS does not
make any distinction among the processors in the middle, instead it only
stores the different names in the \tty{MOMCPU} variable (see below), which
allows to query the setting with \tty{IF} instructions. An exception is
the 80C504 that has a mask flaw in its current versions. This flaw shows
up when an \tty{AJMP} or \tty{ACALL} instruction starts at the second last
address of a 2K page. AS will automatically use long instructions or
issues an error message in such situations. The 80C251 in contrast
represents a drastic progress in the the direction 16/32 bits, larger
address spaces, and a more orthogonal instruction set.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
t) 8096 $\rightarrow$ 80196 $\rightarrow$ 80196N $\rightarrow$ 80296
\end{quote}
Apart from a different set of SFRs (which however strongly vary from
version to version), the 80196 knows several new instructions and
supports a 'windowing' mechanism to access the larger internal RAM.
The 80196N family extends the address space to 16 Mbytes and
introduces a set of instructions to access addresses beyond 64Kbytes.
The 80296 extends the CPU core by instructions for signal processing
and a second windowing register, however removes the Peripheral
Transaction Server (PTS) and therefore looses again two machine
instructions.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
u) 8080 and 8085
\end{quote}
The 8085 knows the additional commands \tty{RIM} and \tty{SIM} for
controlling the interrupt mask and the two I/O-pins.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
v) 8086 $\rightarrow$ 80186 $\rightarrow$ V30 $\rightarrow$ V35
\end{quote}
Only new instructions are added in this family. The corresponding
8-bit versions are not mentioned due to their instruction
compatibility, so one e.g. has to choose 8086 for an 8088-based
system.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
w) 80960
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
x) 8X300 $\rightarrow$ 8X305
\end{quote}
The 8X305 features a couple of additional registers that miss on the
8X300. Additionally, it can do new operations with these registers
(like direct writing of 8 bit values to peripheral addresses).
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
y) XAG1, XAG2, XAG3
\end{quote}
These processors only differ in the size of their internal ROM which
is defined in \tty{STDDEFXA.INC}.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
z) AT90S1200 $\rightarrow$ AT90S2313 $\rightarrow$ AT90S4414 $\rightarrow$
AT90S8515
\end{quote}
The first member of the AVR series represents a minimum configuration
without RAM memory and therefore lacks load/store instructions. The
other two processors only differ in their memory equipment and
on-chip peripherals, what is differentiated in \tty{REGAVR.INC}.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
aa) AM29245 $\rightarrow$ AM29243 $\rightarrow$ AM29240 $\rightarrow$ AM29000
\end{quote}
The further one moves to the right in this list, the fewer the
instructions become that have to be emulated in software. While e.g.
the 29245 not even owns a hardware multiplier, the two representors in
the middle only lack the floating point instructions. The 29000
serves as a 'generic' type that understands all instructions in
hardware.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ab) 80C166 $\rightarrow$ 80C167,80C165,80C163
\end{quote}
80C167 and 80C165/163 have an address space of 16 Mbytes instead of 256
Kbytes, and furthermore they know some additional instructions for
extended addressing modes and atomic instruction sequences. They are
'second generation' processors and differ from each other only in the
amount of on-chip peripherals.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ac) Z80 $\rightarrow$ Z80UNDOC $\rightarrow$ Z180 $\rightarrow$ Z380
\end{quote}
While there are only a few additional instructions for the Z180, the
Z380 owns 32-bit registers, a linear address space of 4 Gbytes, a
couple of instruction set extensions that make the overall
instruction set considerably more orthogonal, and new addressing
modes (referring to index register halves, stack relative). These
extensions partially already exist on the Z80 as undocumented
extensions and may be switched on via the Z80UNDOC variant. A list
with the additional instructions can be found in the chapter
with processor specific hints.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ad) Z8601, Z8604, Z8608, Z8630, Z8631
\end{quote}
These processors again only differ in internal memory size and
on-chip peripherals, i.e. the choice does not have an effect on the
supported instruction set.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ae) 96C141, 93C141
\end{quote}
These two processors represent the two variations of the processor
family: TLCS-900 and TLCS-900L. The differences of these two variations
will be discussed in detail in section \ref{TLCS900Spec}.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
af) 90C141
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ag) 87C00, 87C20, 87C40, 87C70
\end{quote}
The processors of the TLCS-870 series have an identical CPU core, but
different peripherals depending on the type. In part registers with
the same name are located at different addresses. The file
\tty{STDDEF87.INC} uses, similar to the MCS-51-family, the distinction
possible by different types to provide the correct symbol set
automatically.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ah) 47C00 $\rightarrow$ 470C00 $\rightarrow$ 470AC00
\end{quote}
These three variations of the TLCS-47-family have on-chip RAM and ROM
of different size, which leads to several bank switching instructions
being added or suppressed.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ai) 97C241
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
aj) 16C54 $\rightarrow$ 16C55 $\rightarrow$ 16C56 $\rightarrow$ 16C57
\end{quote}
These processors differ by the available code area, i.e. by the address
limit after which AS reports overruns.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ak) 16C84, 16C64
\end{quote}
Analog to the MCS-51 family, no distinction is made in the code generator,
the different numbers only serve to include the correct SFRs in
\tty{STDDEF18.INC}.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
al) 17C42
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
am) ST6210/ST6215$\rightarrow$ST6220/ST6225
\end{quote}
The only distinction AS makes between the two pairs is the smaller
addressing space (2K instead 4K) of the first ones. The detailed
distinction serves to provide an automatic distinction in the source
file which hardware is available (analog to the 8051/52/515).
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
an) ST7
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ao) ST9020, ST9030, ST9040, ST9050
\end{quote}
These 4 names represent the four ''sub-families'' of the ST9 family,
which only differ in their on-chip peripherals. Their processor
cores are identical, which is why this distinction is again only used
in the include file containing the peripheral addresses.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ap) 6804
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
aq) 32010$\rightarrow$32015
\end{quote}
The TMS32010 owns just 144 bytes of internal RAM, and so AS limits
addresses in the data segment just up to this amount. This restriction
does not apply for the 32015, the full range from 0..255 can be used.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ar) 320C25 $\rightarrow$ 320C26 $\rightarrow$ 320C28
\end{quote}
These processors only differ slightly in their on-chip peripherals
and in their configuration instructions.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
as) 320C30, 320C31
\end{quote}
The 320C31 is a reduced version with the same instruction set,
however fewer peripherals. The distinction is exploited in
\tty{STDDEF3X.INC}.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
at) 320C203 $\rightarrow$ 320C50, 320C51, 320C53
\end{quote}
The first one represents the C20x family of signal processors which
implement a subset of the C5x instruction set. The distinction among the
C5x processors is currently not used by AS.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
au) TMS9900
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
\begin{tabbing}
\hspace{0.7cm} \= \kill
av) \> TMS70C00, TMS70C20, TMS70C40,\\
\> TMS70CT20, TMS70CT40,\\
\> TMS70C02, TMS70C42, TMS70C82,\\
\> TMS70C08, TMS70C48\\
\end{tabbing}
\end{quote}
All members of this family share the same CPU core, they therefore do not
differ in their instruction set. The differences manifest only in the
file \tty{REG7000.INC} where address ranges and peripheral addresses are
defined. Types listed in the same row have the same amount of internal
RAM and the same on-chip peripherals, they differ only in the amount of
integrated ROM.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
aw) 370C010, 370C020, 370C030, 370C040 and 370C050
\end{quote}
Similar to the MCS-51 family, the different types are only used to
differentiate the peripheral equipment in \tty{STDDEF37.INC}; the
instruction set is always the same.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ax) MSP430
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
ay) SC/MP
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
az) COP87L84
\end{quote}
This is the only member of National Semiconductor's COP8 family that
is currently supported. I know that the family is substantially
larger and that there are representors with differently large
instruction sets which will be added when a need occurs. It is a
beginning, and National's documentation is quite extensive...
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
\begin{tabbing}
\hspace{0.7cm} \= \kill
ba) \> SC14400, SC14401, SC14402, SC14404, SC14405, \\
\> SC14420, SC14421, SC14422, SC14424 \\
\end{tabbing}
\end{quote}
This series of DECT controllers differentiates itself by the amount of
instructions, since each of them supports different B field formats and
their architecture has been optimized over time.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
bb) 7810$\rightarrow$78C10
\end{quote}
The NMOS version has no stop-mode; the respective command and the ZCM
register are omitted. \bb{CAUTION!} NMOS and CMOS version partially
differ in the reset values of some registers!
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
\begin{tabbing}
\hspace{0.7cm} \= \kill
bc) \> 75402,\\
\> 75004, 75006, 75008,\\
\> 75268,\\
\> 75304, 75306, 75308, 75312, 75316,\\
\> 75328,\\
\> 75104, 75106, 75108, 75112, 75116,\\
\> 75206, 75208, 75212, 75216,\\
\> 75512, 75516\\
\end{tabbing}
\end{quote}
This 'cornucopia' of processors differs only by the RAM size in one
group; the groups themselves again differ by their on-chip
peripherals on the one hand and by their instruction set's power on
the other hand.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
bd) 78070
\end{quote}
This is currently the only member of NEC's 78K0 family I am familiar
with. Similar remarks like for the COP8 family apply!
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
be) 7720 $\rightarrow$ 7725
\end{quote}
The $\mu$PD7725 offers larger address spaces and som more instructions
compared to his predecessor. {\bf CAUTION!} The processors are not binary
compatible to each other!
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
bf) 77230
\end{quote}
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
\begin{tabbing}
bh) \= SYM53C810, SYM53C860, SYM53C815, SYM53C825, \\
\> SYM53C875, SYM53C895
\end{tabbing}
\end{quote}
The simpler members of this family of SCSI processors lack some
instruction variants, furthermore they are different in their set of
internal registers.
%%-----------
\begin{quote}
bh) MB89190
\end{quote}
This processor type represents Fujitsu's F$^{2}$MC8L series.
The \tty{CPU} instruction needs the processor type as a simple constant, a
calculation like:
\begin{verbatim}
CPU 68010+10
\end{verbatim}
is not allowed. Valid calls are e.g.
\begin{verbatim}
CPU 8051
\end{verbatim}
or
\begin{verbatim}
CPU 6800
\end{verbatim}
Regardless of the processor type currently set, the integer variable
\tty{MOMCPU} contains the current status as a hexadecimal number. For
example, \tty{MOMCPU}=\$68010 for the 68010 or \tty{MOMCPU}=80C48H for the
80C48. As one cannot express all letters as hexadecimal digits (only A..F
are possible), all other letters must must be omitted in the hex notation;
for example, \tty{MOMCPU}=80H for the Z80.
You can take advantage of this feature to generate different code
depending on the processor type. For example, the 68000 does not have a
machine instruction for a subroutine return with stack correction. With
the variable \tty{MOMCPU} you can define a macro that uses the machine
instruction or emulates it depending on the processor type:
\begin{verbatim}
myrtd macro disp
if MOMCPU<$68010 ; emulate for 68008 & 68000
move.l (sp),disp(sp)
lea disp(sp),sp
rts
elseif
rtd #disp ; direct use on >=68010
endif
endm
cpu 68010
myrtd 12 ; results in RTD #12
cpu 68000
myrtd 12 ; results in MOVE../LEA../RTS
\end{verbatim}
As not all processor names are built only out of numbers and letters
from A..F, the full name is additionally stored in the string
variable named \tty{MOMCPUNAME}.
The assembler implicitly switches back to the \tty{CODE} segment when a
\tty{CPU} instruction is executed. This is done because \tty{CODE} is the
only segment all processors support.
The default processor type is 68008, unless it has been changed via the
command line option with same name.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SUPMODE, FPU, PMMU}
\ttindex{SUPMODE}\ttindex{FPU}\ttindex{PMMU}
{\em\begin{tabbing}
valid for: \= 680x0, FPU also for 80x86, i960, SUPMODE also for \\
\> TLCS-900, SH7000, i960, 29K, XA, PowerPC, M*Core, \\
\> and TMS9900
\end{tabbing}}
These three switches allow to define which parts of the instruction set
shall be disabled because the necessary preconditions are not valid for
the following piece of code. The parameter for these instructions may be
either \tty{ON} or \tty{OFF}, the current status can be read out of a
variable which is either TRUE or FALSE.
The commands have the following meanings in detail:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{SUPMODE}: allows or prohibits commands, for whose execution the
processor has to be within the supervisor mode. The status
variable is called \tty{INSUPMODE}.}
\item{\tty{FPU}: allows or prohibits the commands of the numerical
coprocessors 8087 resp. 68881 or 68882. The status variable
is called \tty{FPUAVAIL}.}
\item{\tty{PMMU}: allows or prohibits the commands of the memory
management unit 68851 resp. of the built-in MMU of the 68030.
\bb{CAUTION!} The 68030-MMU supports only a relatively small subset
of the 68851 instructions. The assembler cannot test this!
The status variable is called \tty{PMMUAVAIL}.}
\end{itemize}
The usage of of instructions prohibited in this manner will generate a
warning at \tty{SUPMODE}, at \tty{PMMU} and \tty{FPU} a real error
message.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{FULLPMMU}
\ttindex{FULLPMMU}
{\em valid for: 680x0}
Motorola integrated the MMU into the processor starting with the 68030, but
the built-in FPU is equipped only with a relatively small subset of the
68851 instruction set. AS will therefore disable all extended MMU
instructions when the target processor is 68030 or higher. It is however
possible that the internal MMU has been disabled in a 68030-based system
and the processor operates with an external 68851. One can the use a
\tty{FULLPMMU ON} to tell AS that the complete MMU instruction set is
allowed. Vice versa, one may use a \tty{FULLPMMU OFF} to disable all
additional instruction in spite of a 68020 target platform to assure that
portable code is written. The switch between full and reduced instruction
set may be done as often as needed, and the current setting may be read
from a symbol with the same name. \bb{CAUTION!} The \tty{CPU} instruction
implicitly sets or resets this switch when its argument is a 68xxx
processor! \tty{FULLPMMU} therefore has to be written after the \tty{CPU}
instruction!
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{PADDING}
\ttindex{PADDING}
{\em valid for: 680x0, M*Core, XA, H8, SH7000, MSP430, TMS9900, ST7}
Processors of the 680x0 family are quite critical regarding odd addresses:
instructions must not start on an odd address, and data accesses to odd
addresses are only allowed bytewise up to the 68010. The H8/300 family
simply resets the lowest address bit to zero when accessing odd addresses,
the 500 in contrast 'thanks' with an exception... AS therefore tries to
round up data structures built with \tty{DC} or \tty{DS} to an even number
of bytes. This however means for \tty{DC.B} and \tty{DS.B} that a padding
byte may have to be added. This behaviour can be turned on and off via
the \tty{PADDING} instruction. Similar to the previous instructions, the
argument may be either \tty{ON} or \tty{OFF}, and the current setting may
be read from a symbol with the same name. \tty{PADDING} is by default only
enabled for the 680x0 family, it has to be turned on explicitly for all
other families!
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{MAXMODE}
\ttindex{MAXMODE}
{\em valid for: TLCS-900, H8}
The processors of the TLCS-900-family are able to work in 2 modes, the
minimum and maximum mode. Depending on the actual mode, the execution
environment and the assembler are a little bit different. Along with this
instruction and the parameter \tty{ON} or \tty{OFF}, AS is informed that the
following code will run in maximum resp. minimum mode. The actual setting
can be read from the variable \tty{INMAXMODE}. Presetting is \tty{OFF},
i.e. minimum mode.
Similarly, one uses this instruction to tell AS in H8 mode whether the
address space is 64K or 16 Mbytes. This setting is always \tty{OFF} for
the 'small' 300 version and cannot be changed.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{EXTMODE and LWORDMODE}
\ttindex{EXTMODE}\ttindex{LWORDMODE}
{\em valid for: Z380}
The Z380 may operate in altogether 4 modes, which are the result of
setting two flags: The XM flag rules whether the processor shall operate
wit an address space of 64 Kbytes or 4 Gbytes and it may only be set to 1
(after a reset, it is set to 0 for compatibility with the Z80). The LW
flag in turn rules whether word operations shall work with a word size of
16 or 32 bits. The setting of these two flags influences range checks of
constants and addresses, which is why one has to tell AS the setting of
these two flags via these instructions. The default assumption is that
both flags are 0, the current setting (\tty{ON} or \tty{OFF}) may be read
from the predefined symbols \tty{INEXTMODE} resp. \tty{INLWORDMODE.}
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SRCMODE}
\ttindex{SRCMDE}
{\em valid for: MCS-251}
Intel substantially extended the 8051 instruction set with the 80C251, but
unfortunately there was only a single free opcode for all these new
instructions. To avoid a processor that will be eternally crippled by a
prefix, Intel provided two operating modes: the binary and the source
mode. The new processor is fully binary compatible to the 8051 in binary
mode, all new instructions require the free opcode as prefix. In source
mode, the new instructions exchange their places in the code tables with
the corresponding 8051 instructions, which in turn then need a prefix.
One has to inform AS whether the processor operates in source mode
(\tty{ON}) or binary mode (\tty{OFF}) to enable AS to add prefixes when
required. The current setting may be read from the variable
\tty{INSRCMODE}. The default is \tty{OFF}.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{BIGENDIAN}
\ttindex{BIGENDIAN}
{\em valid for: MCS-51/251, PowerPC}
Intel broke with its own principles when the 8051 series was designed: in
contrast to all traditions, the processor uses big-endian ordering for all
multi-byte values! While this was not a big deal for MCS-51 processors
(the processor could access memory only in 8-bit portions, so everyone was
free to use whichever endianess one wanted), it may be a problem for the
251 as it can fetch whole (long-)words from memory and expects the MSB to
be first. As this is not the way of constant disposal earlier versions of
AS used, one can use this instruction to toggle between big and
little endian mode for the instructions \tty{DB, DW, DD, DQ,} and
\tty{DT}. \tty{BIGENDIAN OFF} (the default) puts the LSB first into
memory as it used to be on earlier versions of AS, \tty{BIGENDIAN ON}
engages the big-endian mode compatible to the MCS-251. One may of course
change this setting as often as one wants; the current setting can be read
from the symbol with the same name.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{WRAPMODE}
\ttindex{WRAPMODE}
{\em valid for: Atmel AVR}
After this switch has been set to {\tt ON}, AS will assume that the
processor's program counter does not have the full length of 16 bits given
by the architecture, but instead a length that is exactly sufficient to
address the internal ROM. For example, in case of the AT90S8515, this
means 12 bits, corresponding to 4 Kwords or 8 Kbytes. This assumption
allows relative branches from the ROM's beginning to the end and vice
versa which would result in an out-of-branch error when using strict
arithmetics. Here, they work because the carry bits resulting from the
target address computation are discarded. Assure that the target
processor you are using works in the outlined way before you enable this
option! In case of the abovementioned AT90S8515, this option is even
necessary because it is the only way to perform a direct jump through
the complete address space...
This switch is set to {\tt OFF} by default, and its current setting may be
read from a symbol with same name.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SEGMENT}
\ttindex{SEGMENT}
{\em valid for: all processors}
Some microcontrollers and signal processors know various address ranges,
which do not overlap with each other and require also different
instructions and addressing modes for access. To manage these ones also,
the assembler provides various program counters, you can switch among
them to and from by the use of the \tty{SEGMENT} instruction. For subroutines
included with \tty{INCLUDE}, this e.g. allows to define data used by the
main program or subroutines near to the place they are used. In detail,
the following segments with the following names are supported:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{CODE}: program code;}
\item{\tty{DATA}: directly addressable data (including SFRs);}
\item{\tty{XDATA}: data in externally connected RAM or
X-addressing space of the DSP56xxx or ROM data for the $\mu$PD772x;}
\item{\tty{YDATA}: Y-addressing space of the DSP56xxx;}
\item{\tty{IDATA}: indirectly addressable (internal) data; }
\item{\tty{BITDATA}: the part of the 8051-internal RAM that is bitwise
addressable;}
\item{\tty{IO}: I/O-address range;}
\item{\tty{REG}: register bank of the ST9;}
\item{\tty{ROMDATA}: constant ROM of the NEC signal processors.}
\end{itemize}
See also section \ref{SectORG} (\tty{ORG}) for detailed information about
address ranges and initial values of the segments. Depending on the
processor family, not all segment types will be permitted.
The bit segment is managed as if it would be a byte segment, i.e. the
addresses will be incremented by 1 per bit.
Labels get the same type as attribute as the segment that was active
when the label was defined. So the assembler has a limited ability
to check whether you access symbols of a certain segment with wrong
instructions. In such cases the assembler issues a warning.
Example:
\begin{verbatim}
CPU 8051 ; MCS-51-code
segment code ; test code
setb flag ; no warning
setb var ; warning : wrong segment
segment data
var db ?
segment bitdata
flag db ?
\end{verbatim}
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{PHASE and DEPHASE}
\ttindex{PHASE}\ttindex{DEPHASE}
{\em valid for: all processors}
For some applications (especially on Z80 systems), the code must be moved
to another address range before execution. If the assembler didn't know
about this, it would align all labels to the load address (not the start
address). The programmer is then forced to write jumps within this area
either independent of location or has to add the offset at each symbol
manually. The first one is not possible for some processors, the last one
is extremely error-prone. With the commands \tty{PHASE} and
\tty{DEPHASE}, it is possible to inform the assembler at which address the
code will really be executed on the target system:
\begin{verbatim}
phase <address>
\end{verbatim}
informs the assembler that the following code shall be executed at the
specified address. The assembler calculates thereupon the difference to
the real program counter and adds this difference for the following
operations:
\begin{itemize}
\item{address values in the listing}
\item{filing of label values}
\item{program counter references in relative jumps and address expressions}
\item{readout of the program counter via the symbols * or \$}
\end{itemize}
this ''shifting'' is switched off by the instruction
\begin{verbatim}
dephase
\end{verbatim}
The assembler manages phase values for all defined segments, although
this instruction pair only makes real sense in the code segment.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SAVE and RESTORE}
\ttindex{SAVE}\ttindex{RESTORE}
{\em valid for: all processors}
The command \tty{SAVE} forces the assembler to push the contents of
following variables onto an internal stack:
\begin{itemize}
\item{currently selected processor type (set by \tty{CPU});}
\item{currently active memory area (set by \tty{SEGMENT});}
\item{the flag whether listing is switched on or off (set by \tty{LISTING});}
\item{the flag whether expansions of following macros shall be issued in
the assembly listing (set by \tty{MACEXP}).}
\item{currently active character translation table (set by
\tty{CODEPAGE}).}
\end{itemize}
The counterpart \tty{RESTORE} pops the values saved last from this stack.
These two commands were primarily designed for include files, to change
the above mentioned variables in any way inside of these files, without
loosing their original content. This may be helpful e.g. in include files
with own, fully debugged subroutines, to switch the listing generation
off:
\begin{verbatim}
SAVE ; save old status
LISTING OFF ; save paper
. ; the actual code
.
RESTORE ; restore
\end{verbatim}
In opposite to a simple \tty{LISTING OFF .. ON}-pair, the correct status
will be restored, in case the listing generation was switched off already
before.
The assembler checks if the number of \tty{SAVE}-and
\tty{RESTORE}-commands corresponds and issues error messages in the
following cases:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{RESTORE}, but the internal stack is empty;}
\item{the stack not empty at the end of a pass.}
\end{itemize}
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{ASSUME}
\ttindex{ASSUME}
{\em valid for: various}
This instruction allows to tell AS the current setting of certain
registers whose contents cannot be described with a simple \tty{ON} or
\tty{OFF}. These are typically registers that influence addressing modes
and whose contents are important to know for AS in order to generate
correct addressing. It is important to note that \tty{ASSUME} only
informs AS about these, \bb{no} machine code is generated that actually
loads these values into the appropriate registers!
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{6809}
In contrast to its 'predecessors' like the 6800 and 6502, the position of
the direct page, i.e. the page of memory that can be reached with
single-byte addresses, can be set freely. This is done via the 'direct
page register' that sets the page number. One has to assign a
corresponding value to this register via \tty{ASSUME} is the contents are
different from the default of 0, otherwise wrong addresses will be
generated!
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{68HC16}
The 68HC16 employs a set of bank registers to address a space of 1
Mbyte with its registers that are only 16 bits wide. These registers
supply the upper 4 bits. Of these, the EK register is responsible
for absolute data accesses (not jumps!). AS checks for each absolute
address whether the upper 4 bits of the address are equal to the
value of EK specified via \tty{ASSUME}. AS issues a warning if they
differ. The default for EK is 0.
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{H8/500}
In maximum mode, the extended address space of these processors is
addressed via a couple of bank registers. They carry the names DP
(registers from 0..3, absolute addresses), EP (register 4 and 5), and TP
(stack). AS needs the current value of DP to check if absolute addresses
are within the currently addressable bank; the other two registers are
only used for indirect addressing and can therefore not be monitored; it
is a question of personal taste whether one specifies their values or not.
The BR register is in contrast important because it rules which 256-byte
page may be accessed with short addresses. It is common for all registers
that AS does not assume \bb{any} default value for them as they are
undefined after a CPU reset. Everyone who wants to use absolute addresses
must therefore assign values to at least DR and DP!
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{MELPS740}
Microcontrollers of this series know a ''special page'' addressing mode
for the \tty{JSR} instruction that allows a shorter coding for jumps into
the last page of on-chip ROM. The size of this ROM depends of course
on the exact processor type, and there are more derivatives than it
would be meaningful to offer via the CPU instruction...we therefore
have to rely on \tty{ASSUME} to define the address of this page, e.g.
\begin{verbatim}
ASSUME SP:$1f
\end{verbatim}
in case the internal ROM is 8K.
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{MELPS7700/65816}
These processors contain a lot of registers whose contents AS has to know
in order to generate correct machine code. These are the registers
in question:
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|l|}
\hline
name & function & value range & default \\
\hline
\hline
DT & data bank & 0-\$ff & 0 \\
PG & code Bank & 0-\$ff & 0 \\
DPR & directly addr. page & 0-\$ffff & 0 \\
X & index register width & 0 or 1 & 0 \\
M & accumulator width & 0 or 1 & 0 \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\par
To avoid endless repetitions, see section \ref{MELPS7700Spec} for
instructions how to use these registers. The handling is otherwise
similar to the 8086, i.e. multiple values may be set with one instruction
and no code is generated that actually loads the registers with the given
values. This is again up to the programmer!
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{MCS-196/296}
Starting with the 80196, all processors of the MCS-96 family have a
register 'WSR' that allows to map memory areas from the extended
internal RAM or the SFR range into areas of the register file which
may then be accessed with short addresses. If one informs AS about
the value of the WSR register, it can automatically find out whether
an absolute address can be addressed with a single-byte address via
windowing; consequently, long addresses will be automatically generated
for registers covered by windowing. The 80296 contains an additional
register WSR1 to allow simultaneous mapping of two memory areas into
the register file. In case it is possible to address a memory cell
via both areas, AS will always choose the way via WSR!
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{8086}
The 8086 is able to address data from all segments in all
instructions, but it however needs so-called ''segment prefixes'' if
another segment register than DS shall be used. In addition it is
possible that the DS register is adjusted to another segment, e.g. to
address data in the code segment for longer parts of the program. As
AS cannot analyze the code's meaning, it has to informed via this
instruction to what segments the segment registers point at the
moment, e.g.:
\begin{verbatim}
ASSUME CS:CODE, DS:DATA .
\end{verbatim}
It is possible to assign assumptions to all four segment registers in
this way. This instruction produces \bb{no} code, so the program itself
has to do the actual load of the registers with the values.
The usage of this instruction has on the one hand the result that AS is
able to automatically put ahead prefixes at sporadic accesses into the
code segment, or on the other hand, one can inform AS that the DS-register
was modified and you can save explicit \tty{CS:}-instructions.
Valid arguments behind the colon are \tty{CODE}, \tty{DATA} and
\tty{NOTHING}. The latter value informs AS that a segment register
contains no usable value (for AS). The following values are
preinitialized:
\begin{verbatim}
CS:CODE, DS:DATA, ES:NOTHING, SS:NOTHING
\end{verbatim}
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{XA}
The XA family has a data address space of 16 Mbytes, a process however
can always address within a 64K segment only that is given by the DS
register. One has to inform AS about the current value of this
register in order to enable it to check accesses to absolute
addresses.
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{29K}
The processors of the 29K family feature a register RBP that allows
to protect banks of 16 registers against access from user mode. The
corresponding bit has to be set to achieve the protection. \tty{ASSUME}
allows to tell AS which value RBP currently contains. AS can warn
this way in case a try to access protected registers from user mode
is made.
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{80C166/167}
Though none of the 80C166/167's registers is longer than sixteen bits,
this processor has 18/24 address lines and can therefore address up
to 256Kbytes/16Mbytes. To resolve this contradiction, it neither
uses the well-known (and ill-famed) Intel method of segmentation nor
does it have inflexible bank registers...no, it uses paging! To accomplish
this, the logical address space of 64 Kbytes is split into 4 pages of
16 Kbytes, and for each page there is a page register (named
DPP0..DPP3) that rules which of the 16/1024 physical pages shall be
mapped to this logical page. AS always tries to present the address
space with a size of 256Kbytes/16MBytes in the sight of the
programmer, i.e. the physical page is taken for absolute accesses and
the setting of bits 14/15 of the logical address is deduced. If no
page register fits, a warning is issued. AS assumes by default that
the four registers linearly map the first 64 Kbytes of memory, in the
following style:
\begin{verbatim}
ASSUME DPP0:0,DPP1:1,DPP2:2,DPP3:3
\end{verbatim}
The 80C167 knows some additional instructions that can override the
page registers' function. The chapter with processor-specific hints
describes how these instructions influence the address generation.
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{TLCS-47}
The direct data address space of these processors (it makes no
difference whether you address directly or via the HL register) has a
size of only 256 nibbles. Because the ''better'' family members have
up to 1024 nibbles of RAM on chip, Toshiba was forced to introduce a
banking mechanism via the DMB register. AS manages the data segment
as a continuous addressing space and checks at any direct addressing
if the address is in the currently active bank. The bank AS
currently expects can be set by means of
\begin{verbatim}
ASSUME DMB:<0..3>
\end{verbatim}
The default value is 0.
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{ST6}
\label{ST6Assume}
The microcontrollers of the ST62 family are able to map a part (64 bytes)
of the code area into the data area, e.g. to load constants from the ROM.
This means also that at one moment only one part of the ROM can be
addressed. A special register rules which part it is. AS cannot check
the contents of this register directly, but it can be informed by this
instruction that a new value has been assigned to the register. AS then
can test and warn if necessary, in case addresses of the code segment are
accessed, which are not located in the ''announced'' window. If, for
example, the variable \tty{VARI} has the value 456h, so
\begin{verbatim}
ASSUME ROMBASE:VARI>>6
\end{verbatim}
sets the AS-internal variable to 11h, and an access to \tty{VARI}
generates an access to address 56h in the data segment.
It is possible to assign a simple \tty{NOTHING} instead of a value, e.g.
if the bank register is used temporarily as a memory cell. This value is
also the default.
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{ST9}
The ST9 family uses exactly the same instructions to address code and
data area. It depends on the setting of the flag register's DP flag
which address space is referenced. To enable AS to check if one
works with symbols from the correct address space (this of course
\bb{only} works with absolute accesses!), one has to inform AS whether the
DP flag is currently 0 (code) or 1 (data). The initial value of this
assumption is 0.
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{320C3x}
As all instruction words of this processor family are only 32 bits
long (of which only 16 bits were reserved for absolute addresses),
the missing upper 8 bits have to be added from the DP register. It
is however still possible to specify a full 24-bit address when
addressing, AS will check then whether the upper 8 bits are equal to
the DP register's assumed values. \tty{ASSUME} is different to the
\tty{LDP} instruction in the sense that one cannot specify an arbitrary
address out of the bank in question, one has to extract the upper bits by
hand:
\begin{verbatim}
ldp @addr
assume dp:addr>>16
.
.
ldi @addr,r2
\end{verbatim}
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{$\mu$PD78(C)10}
These processors have a register (V) that allows to move the ''zero
page'', i.e. page of memory that is addressable by just one byte,
freely in the address space, within page limits. By reasons of
comforts you don't want to work with expressions such as
\begin{verbatim}
inrw Lo(counter)
\end{verbatim}
so AS takes over this job, but only under the premise that it is informed
via the \tty{ASSUME}-command about the contents of the V register. If an
instruction with short addressing is used, it will be checked if the upper
half of the address expression corresponds to the expected content. A
warning will be issued if both do not match.
%%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\subsubsection{75K0}
As the whole address space of 12 bits could not be addressed even by
the help of register pairs (8 bits), NEC had to introduce banking
(like many others too...): the upper 4 address bits are fetched from
the MBS register (which can be assigned values from 0 to 15 by the
\tty{ASSUME} instruction), which however will only be regarded if the MBE
flag has been set to 1. If it is 0 (default), the lowest and highest
128 nibbles of the address space can be reached without banking. The
\tty{ASSUME} instruction is undefined for the 75402 as it contains neither
a MBE flag nor an MBS register; the initial values cannot be changed
therefore.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{EMULATED}
{\em valid for: 29K}
AMD defined the 29000's series exception handling for undefined
instructions in a way that there is a separate exception vector for
each instruction. This allows to extend the instruction set of a
smaller member of this family by a software emulation. To avoid that
AS quarrels about these instructions as being undefined, the
\tty{EMULATED} instruction allows to tell AS that certain instructions are
allowed in this case. The check if the currently set processors knows the
instruction is then skipped. For example, if one has written a module
that supports 32-bit IEEE numbers and the processor does not have a FPU,
one writes
\begin{verbatim}
EMULATED FADD,FSUB,FMUL,FDIV
EMULATED FEQ,FGE,FGT,SQRT,CLASS
\end{verbatim}
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{BRANCHEXT}
\ttindex{BRANCHEXT}
{\em valid for: XA}
{\tt BRANCHEXT} with either \tty{ON} or \tty{OFF} as argument tells AS
whether short branches that are only available with an 8-bit displacement
shall automatically be 'extended', for example by replacing a single
instruction like
\begin{verbatim}
bne target
\end{verbatim}
with a longer sequence of same functionality, in case the branc target is
out of reach for the instruction's displacement. For example, the
replacement sequence for {\tt bne} would be
\begin{verbatim}
beq skip
jmp target
skip:
\end{verbatim}
In case there is no fitting 'opposite' for an instruction, the sequence
may become even longer, e.g. for {\tt jbc}:
\begin{verbatim}
jbc dobr
bra skip
dobr: jmp target
skip:
\end{verbatim}
This feature however has the side effect that there is no unambigious
assignment between machine and assembly code any more. Furthermore,
additional passes may be the result if there are forward branches. One
should therefore use this feature with caution!
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Data Definitions}
The instructions described in this section partially overlap in their
functionality, but each processor family defines other names for the
same function. To stay compatible with the standard assemblers, this
way of implementation was chosen.
If not explicitly mentioned otherwise, all instructions for data
deposition (not those for reservation of memory!) allow an arbitrary
number of parameters which are being processed from left to right.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DC[.Size]}
\ttindex{DC}
{\em valid for: 680x0, M*Core, 68xx, H8, SH7x00, DSP56xxx, XA, ST7}
This instruction places one or several constants of the type
specified by the attribute into memory. The attributes are the same ones as
defined in section \ref{AttrTypes}, and there is additionally the
possibility for byte constants to place string constants in memory, like
\begin{verbatim}
String dc.B "Hello world!\0"
\end{verbatim}
The parameter count may be between 1 and 20. A repeat count enclosed
in brackets may additionally be prefixed to each parameter; for
example, one can for example fill the area up to the next page
boundary with zeroes with a statement like
\begin{verbatim}
dc.b [(*+255)&$ffffff00-*]0
\end{verbatim}
\bb{CAUTION!} This function easily allows to reach the limit of 1 Kbyte
of generated code per line!
The assembler can automatically add another byte of data in case the byte sum
should become odd, to keep the word alignment. This behaviour may be
turned on and off via the \tty{PADDING} instruction.
Decimal floating point numbers stored with this instruction (\tty{DC.P...})
can cover the whole range of extended precision, one however has to
pay attention to the detail that the coprocessors currently available
from Motorola (68881/68882) ignore the thousands digit of the
exponent at the read of such constants!
The default attribute is \tty{W}, that means 16-bit-integer numbers.
For the DSP56xxx, the data type is fixed to integer numbers (an attribute is
therefore neither necessary nor allowed), which may be in the range
of -8M up to 16M-1. String constants are also allowed, whereby three characters
are packed into each word.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DS[.Size]}
\ttindex{DS}
{\em valid for: 680x0, M*Core, 68xx, H8, SH7x00, DSP56xxx, XA,, ST7}
On the one hand, this instruction enables to reserve memory space for
the specified count of numbers of the type given by the attribute.
Therefore,
\begin{verbatim}
DS.B 20
\end{verbatim}
for example reserves 20 bytes of memory, but
\begin{verbatim}
DS.X 20
\end{verbatim}
reserves 240 bytes!
The other purpose is the alignment of the program counter which is
achieved by a count specification of 0. In this way, with a
\begin{verbatim}
DS.W 0 ,
\end{verbatim}
the program counter will be rounded up to the next even address, with
a
\begin{verbatim}
DS.D 0
\end{verbatim}
in contrast to the next double word boundary. Memory cells possibly
staying unused thereby are neither zeroed nor filled with NOPs, they
simply stay undefined.
The default for the operand length is - as usual - \tty{W}, i.e. 16 bits.
For the 56xxx, the operand length is fixed to words (of 24 bit),
attributes therefore do not exist just as in the case of \tty{DC}.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DB,DW,DD,DQ, and DT}
\ttindex{DB}\ttindex{DW}\ttindex{DD}\ttindex{DQ}\ttindex{DT}
{\em\begin{tabbing}
valid for: \= Intel, Zilog, Toshiba, NEC, TMS370, Siemens, AMD, \\
\> MELPS7700/65816, M16(C), National, ST9, TMS70Cxx, \\
\> $\mu$PD77230, Fairchild
\end{tabbing}}
These commands are - one could say - the Intel counterpart to \tty{DS} and
\tty{DC}, and as expected, their logic is a little bit different: First,
the specification of the operand length is moved into the mnemonic:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{DB}: byte or ASCII string similar to \tty{DC.B}}
\item{\tty{DW}: 16-bit integer}
\item{\tty{DD}: 32-bit integer or single precision}
\item{\tty{DQ}: double precision (64 bits)}
\item{\tty{DT}: extended precision (80 bits)}
\end{itemize}
Second, the distinction between constant definition and memory
reservation is done by the operand. A reservation of memory is
marked by a \tty{?} :
\begin{verbatim}
db ? ; reserves a byte
dw ?,? ; reserves memory for 2 words (=4 byte)
dd -1 ; places the constant -1 (FFFFFFFFH) !
\end{verbatim}
Reserved memory and constant definition \bb{must not} be mixed within one
instruction:
\begin{verbatim}
db "hello",? ; --> error message
\end{verbatim}
Additionally, the \tty{DUP} Operator permits the repeated placing of
constant sequences or the reservation of whole memory blocks:
\begin{verbatim}
db 3 dup (1,2) ; --> 1 2 1 2 1 2
dw 20 dup (?) ; reserves 40 bytes of memory
\end{verbatim}
As you can see, the \tty{DUP}-argument must be enclosed in parentheses,
which is also why it may consist of several components, that may
themselves be \tty{DUP}s...the stuff therefore works recursively.
\tty{DUP} is however also a place where one can get in touch with another
limit of the assembler: a maximum of 1024 bytes of code or data may be
generated in one line. This is not valid for the reservation of memory,
only for the definition of constant arrays!
In order to be compatible to the M80, \tty{DEFB/DEFW} may be used instead of
\tty{DB/DW} in Z80-mode.
Similarly, \tty{BYTE/ADDR} resp. \tty{WORD/ADDRW} in COP8 mode are an
alias for \tty{DB} resp. \tty{DW}, with the pairs differing in byte order:
instructions defined by National for address storage use big endian,
\tty{BYTE} resp. \tty{WORD} in contrast use little endian.
The NEC 77230 is special with its \tty{DW} instruction: It more works like
the \tty{DATA} statement of its smaller brothers, but apart from string
and integer arguments, it also accepts floating point values (and stores
them in the processor's proprietary 32-bit format). There is {\em no}
\tty{DUP} operator!
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DS, DS8}
\ttindex{DS}
\ttindex{DS8}
{\em\begin{tabbing}
valid for: \= Intel, Zilog, Toshiba, NEC, TMS370, Siemens, AMD, \\
\> M16(C), National, ST9, TMS7000
\end{tabbing}}
With this instruction, you can reserve a memory area:
\begin{verbatim}
DS <count>
\end{verbatim}
It is an abbreviation of
\begin{verbatim}
DB <count> DUP (?)
\end{verbatim}
Although this could easily be made by a macro, some people grown up
with Motorola CPUs (Hi Michael!) suggest \tty{DS} to be a built-in
instruction...I hope they are satisfied now \tty{;-)}
{\tt DS8} is defined as an alias for {\tt DS} on the National SC14xxx.
Beware that the code memory of these processors is organized in words of
16 bits, it is therefore impossible to reserve individual bytes. In case
the argument of {\tt DS} is odd, it will be rounded up to the next even
number.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{BYT or FCB}
\ttindex{BYT}\ttindex{FCB}
{\em valid for: 6502, 68xx}
By this instruction, byte constants or ASCII strings are placed in
65xx/68xx-mode, it therefore corresponds to \tty{DC.B} on the 68000 or
\tty{DB} on Intel. Similarly to \tty{DC}, a repetition factor enclosed
in brackets ([..]) may be prepended to every single parameter.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{BYTE}
\ttindex{BYTE}
{\em valid for: ST6, 320C2(0)x, 320C5x, MSP, TMS9900}
Ditto. Note that when in 320C2(0)x/5x mode, the assembler assumes that
a label on the left side of this instruction has no type, i.e. it
belongs to no address space. This behaviour is explained in the
processor-specific hints.
The \tty{PADDING} instruction allows to set whether odd counts of bytes
shall be padded with a zero byte in MSP/TMS9900 mode.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DC8}
\ttindex{DC8}
{\em valid for: SC144xx}
This statement is an alias for {\tt DB}, i.e. it may be used to dump byte
constants or strings to memory.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{ADR or FDB}
\ttindex{ADR}\ttindex{FDB}
{\em valid for: 6502, 68xx}
\tty{ADR} resp. \tty{FDB} stores word constants when in 65xx/68xx mode.
It is therefore the equivalent to \tty{DC.W} on the 68000 or \tty{DW} on
Intel platforms. Similarly to \tty{DC}, a repetition factor enclosed
in brackets ([..]) may be prepended to every single parameter.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{WORD}
\ttindex{WORD}
{\em valid for: ST6, i960, 320C2(0)x, 320C3x, 320C5x, MSP}
If assembling for the 320C3x or i960, this command stores 32-bit words,
16-bit words for the other families. Note that when in 320C2(0)x/5x mode,
the assembler assumes that a label on the left side of this instruction
has no type, i.e. it belongs to no address space. This behaviour is
explained at the discussion on processor-specific hints.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DW16}
\ttindex{DW16}
{\em valid for: SC144xx}
This instruction is for SC144xx targets a way to dump word (16 bit)
constants to memory. {\tt CAUTION!!} It is therefore an alias for {\tt
DW}.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{LONG}
\ttindex{LONG}
{\em valid for: 320C2(0)x, 320C5x}
LONG stores a 32-bit integer to memory with the order LoWord-HiWord.
Note that when in 320C2(0)x/5x mode, the assembler assumes that a label
on the left side of this instruction has no type, i.e. it belongs to
no address space. This behaviour is explained in the
processor-specific hints.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SINGLE and EXTENDED}
\ttindex{SINGLE}\ttindex{EXTENDED}
{\em valid for: 320C3x}
Both commands store floating-point constants to memory. They are \bb{not}
in IEEE-format. Instead the processor-specific formats with 32 and 40 bit
are used. In case of \tty{EXTENDED} the resulting constant occupies two
memory words. The most significant 8 bits (the exponent) are written to
the first word while the other ones (the mantissa) are copied into the second
word.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{FLOAT and DOUBLE}
\ttindex{FLOAT}\ttindex{DOUBLE}
{\em valid for: 320C2(0)x, 320C5x}
These two commands store floating-point constants in memory using the
standard IEEE 32-bit and 64-bit IEEE formats. The least significant
byte is copied to the first allocated memory location. Note that
when in 320C2(0)x/5x mode the assembler assumes that all labels on the
left side of an instruction have no type, i.e. they belong to no
address space. This behaviour is explained in the processor-specific
hints.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{EFLOAT, BFLOAT, and TFLOAT}
\ttindex{EFLOAT}\ttindex{BFLOAT}\ttindex{TFLOAT}
{\em valid for: 320C2(0)x, 320C5x}
Another three floating point commands. All of them support non-IEEE
formats, which should be easily applicable on signal processors:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{EFLOAT}: mantissa with 16 bits, exponent with 16 bits}
\item{\tty{BFLOAT}: mantissa with 32 bits, exponent with 16 bits}
\item{\tty{DFLOAT}: mantissa with 64 bits, exponent with 32 bits}
\end{itemize}
The three commands share a common storage strategy. In all cases the
mantissa precedes the exponent in memory, both are stored as 2's
complement with the least significant byte first. Note that when in
320C2(0)x/5x mode the assembler assumes that all labels on the left side
of an instruction have no type, i.e. they belong to no address
space. This behaviour is explained in the processor-specific hints.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{Qxx and LQxx}
\ttindex{Qxx}\ttindex{LQxx}
{\em valid for: 320C2(0)x, 320C5x}
\tty{Qxx} and \tty{LQxx} can be used to generate constants in a fixed
point format. \tty{xx} denotes a 2-digit number. The operand is first
multiplied by $2^{xx}$ before converting it to binary notation. Thus
\tty{xx} can be viewed as the number of bits which should be reserved for
the fractional part of the constant in fixed point format. \tty{Qxx}
stores only one word (16 bit) while \tty{LQxx} stores two words (low word
first):
\begin{verbatim}
q05 2.5 ; --> 0050h
lq20 ConstPI ; --> 43F7h 0032h
\end{verbatim}
Please do not flame me in case I calculated something wrong on my
HP28...
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DATA}
\ttindex{DATA}
{\em valid for: PIC, 320xx, AVR, MELPS-4500, 4004, $\mu$PD772x}
This command stores data in the current segment. Both integer values as
well as character strings are supported. On 16C5x/16C8x, 17C4x in data
segment and on the 4500, characters occupy one word. On AVR, 17C4x in
code segment, $\mu$PD772x in the data segments, and on 3201x/3202x, in
general two characters fit into one word (LSB first). The $\mu$PD77C25
can hold three bytees per word in the code segment. When in 320C3x, mode
the assembler puts four characters into one word (MSB first). In contrast
to this characters occupy two memory locations in the data segment of the
4500, similar in the 4004. The range of integer values corresponds to the
word width of each processor in a specific segment. This means that
\tty{DATA} has the same result than \tty{WORD} on a 320C3x (and that of
\tty{SINGLE} if AS recognizes the operand as a floating-point constant).
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{ZERO}
\ttindex{ZERO}
{\em valid for: PIC}
Generates a continuous string of zero words in memory. The length is
given by the argument and must not exceed 512.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{FB and FW}
\ttindex{FB}\ttindex{FW}
{\em valid for: COP8}
These instruction allow to fill memory blocks with a byte or word
constant. The first operand specifies the size of the memory block
while the second one sets the filling constant itself. The maximum
supported block size is 1024 elements for \tty{FB} and 512 elements for
\tty{FW}.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{ASCII and ASCIZ}
\ttindex{ASCII}\ttindex{ASCIZ}
{\em valid for: ST6}
Both commands store string constants to memory. While \tty{ASCII} writes
the character information only, \tty{ASCIZ} additionally appends a zero to
the end of the string.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{STRING and RSTRING}
\ttindex{STRING}\ttindex{RSTRING}
{\em valid for: 320C2(0)x, 320C5x}
These commands are functionally equivalent to \tty{DATA}, but integer
values are limited to the range of byte values. This enables two
characters or numbers to be packed together into one word. Both commands
only differ in the order they use to write bytes: \tty{STRING} stores the
upper one first then the lower one, \tty{RSTRING} does this vice versa.
Note that when in 320C2(0)x/5x mode the assembler assumes that a label on the
left side of this instruction has no type, i.e. it belongs to no address
space. This behaviour is explained in the processor-specific hints.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{FCC}
\ttindex{FCC}
{\em valid for: 6502, 68xx}
When in 65xx/68xx mode, string constants are generated using this
instruction. In contrast to the original assembler AS11 from Motorola
(this is the main reason why AS understands this command, the
functionality is contained within the \tty{BYT} instruction) you must
enclose the string argument by double quotation marks instead of single
quotation marks or slashes. Similarly to \tty{DC}, a repetition factor
enclosed in brackets ([..]) may be prepended to every single parameter.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DFS or RMB}
\ttindex{DFS}\ttindex{RMB}
{\em valid for: 6502, 68xx}
Reserves a memory block when in 6502/68xx mode. It is therefore the
equivalent to \tty{DS.B} on the 68000 or \tty{DB ?} on Intel platforms.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{BLOCK}
\ttindex{BLOCK}
{\em valid for: ST6}
Ditto.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SPACE}
\ttindex{SPACE}
{\em valid for: i960}
Ditto.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{RES}
\ttindex{RES}
{\em valid for: PIC, MELPS-4500, 3201x, 320C2(0)x, 320C5x, AVR, $\mu$PD772x}
This command allocates memory. When used in code segments the
argument counts words (10/12/14/16 bit). In data segments it counts
bytes for PICs, nibbles for 4500's and words for the TI devices.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{BSS}
\ttindex{BSS}
{\em valid for: 320C2(0)x, 320C3x, 320C5x, MSP}
\tty{BSS} works like \tty{RES}, but when in 320C2(0)x/5x mode, the assembler
assumes that a label on the left side of this instruction has no type, i.e
it belongs to no address space. This behaviour is explained in the
processor-specific hints.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DSB and DSW}
\ttindex{DSB}\ttindex{DSW}
{\em valid for: COP8}
Both instructions allocate memory and ensure compatibility to ASMCOP from
National. While \tty{DSB} takes the argument as byte count, \tty{DSW}
uses it as word count (thus it allocates twice as much memory than
\tty{DSB}).
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{DS16}
\ttindex{DS16}
{\em valid for: SC144xx}
This instruction reserves memory in steps of full words, i.e. 16 bits. It
is an alias for {\tt DW}.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{ALIGN}
\ttindex{ALIGN}
{\em valid for: all processors}
Takes the argument to align the program counter to a certain address
boundary. AS increments the program counter to the next multiple of the
argument. So, \tty{ALIGN} corresponds to \tty{DS.x} on 68000, but is much
more flexible at the same time.
Example:
\begin{verbatim}
align 2
\end{verbatim}
aligns to an even address (PC mod 2 = 0). The contents of the
skipped addresses is left undefined.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{LTORG}
\ttindex{LTORG}
{\em valid for: SH7x00}
Although the SH7000 processor can do an immediate register load with
8 bit only, AS shows up with no such restriction. This behaviour is
instead simulated through constants in memory. Storing them in
the code segment (not far away from the register load instruction)
would require an additional jump. AS Therefore gathers the constants
an stores them at an address specified by \tty{LTORG}. Details are
explained in the processor-specific section somewhat later.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Macro Instructions}
{\em valid for: all processors}
Now we finally reach the things that make a macro assembler different
from an ordinary assembler: the ability to define macros (guessed
it !?).
When speaking about 'macros', I generally mean a sequence of (machine
or pseudo) instructions which are united to a block by special
statements and can then be treated in certain ways. The assembler
knows the following statements to work with such blocks:
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{MACRO}
\ttindex{MACRO}\ttindex{ENDM}
is probably the most important instruction for macro programming.
The instruction sequence
\begin{verbatim}
<name> MACRO [parameter list]
<instructions>
ENDM
\end{verbatim}
defines the macro \tty{$<$name$>$} to be the enclosed instruction sequence.
This definition by itself does not generate any code! In turn, from
now on the instruction sequence can simply be called by the name, the
whole construct therefore shortens and simplifies programs. A
parameter list may be added to the macro definition to make things
even more useful. The parameters' names have to be separated by
commas (as usual) and have to conform to the conventions for symbol
names (see section \ref{SectSymConv}) - like the macro name itself.
A switch to case-sensitive mode influences both macro names and
parameters.
Similar to symbols, macros are local, i.e. they are only known in a
section and its subsections when the definition is done from within
a section. This behaviour however can be controlled in wide limits
via the options \tty{PUBLIC} and \tty{GLOBAL} described below.
Apart from the macro parameters themselves, the parameter list may
contain control parameters which influence the processing of the
macro. These parameters are distinguished from normal parameters by
being enclosed in braces. The following control parameters are
defined:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{EXPAND/NOEXPAND}: rule whether the enclosed code shall
be written to the listing when the macro is expanded. The
default is the value set by the pseudo instruction \tty{MACEXP}.}
\item{\tty{PUBLIC[:section name]}: assigns the macro to a parent section
instead of the current section. A section can make macros
accessible for the outer code this way. If the section
specification is missing, the macro becomes completely global, i.e.
it may be referenced from everywhere.}
\item{\tty{GLOBAL[:section name]}: rules that in addition to the macro
itself, another macro shall be generated that has the same contents
but is assigned to the specified section. Its name is constructed by
concatenating the current section's name to the macro name. The
section specified must be a parent section of the current section;
if the specification is missing, the additional macro becomes
globally visible. For example, if a macro \tty{A} is defined in a
section \tty{B} that is a child section of section \tty{C}, an additional
global macro named \tty{C\_B\_A} would be generated. In contrast, if
\tty{C} had been specified as target section, the macro would be named \tty{B\_A}
and be assigned to section \tty{C}. This option is turned off by default
and it only has an effect when it is used from within a section.
The macro defined locally is not influenced by this option.}
\item{\tty{EXPORT/NOEXPORT}: rules whether the definition of this macro
shall be written to a separate file in case the \tty{-M} command line
option was given. This way, definitions of 'private' macros may
be mapped out selectively. The default is FALSE, i.e. the
definition will not be written to the file. The macro will be
written with the concatenated name if the \tty{GLOBAL} option was
additionally present.}
\end{itemize}
The control parameters described above are removed from the parameter
list by AS, i.e. they do not have a further influence on processing
and usage.
When a macro is called, the parameters given for the call are
textually inserted into the instruction block and the resulting
assembler code is assembled as usual. Zero length parameters are
inserted in case too few parameters are specified. It is important
to note that string constants are not protected from macro
expansions. The old IBM rule:
\begin{quote}{\it
It's not a bug, it's a feature!
}\end{quote}
applies for this detail. The gap was left to allow checking of
parameters via string comparisons. For example, one can analyze a
macro parameter in the following way:
\begin{verbatim}
mul MACRO para,parb
IF UpString("PARA")<>"A"
MOV a,para
ENDIF
IF UpString("PARB")<>"B"
MOV b,parb
ENDIF
mul ab
ENDM
\end{verbatim}
It is important for the example above that the assembler converts all
parameter names to upper case when operating in case-insensitive
mode, but this conversion never takes place inside of string constants.
Macro parameter names therefore have to be written in upper case when
they appear in string constants.
The same naming rules as for usual symbols also apply for macro
parameters, with the exception that only letters and numbers are
allowed, i.e. dots and underscores are forbidden. This constraint
has its reason in a hidden feature: the underscore allows to
concatenate macro parameter names to a symbol, like in the following
example:
\begin{verbatim}
concat macro part1,part2
call part1_part2
endm
\end{verbatim}
The call
\begin{verbatim}
concat module,function
\end{verbatim}
will therefore result in
\begin{verbatim}
call module_function
\end{verbatim}
A small example to remove all clarities ;-)
A programmer braindamaged by years of programming Intel processors
wants to have the instructions \tty{PUSH/POP} also for the 68000. He
solves the 'problem' in the following way:
\begin{verbatim}
push macro op
move op,-(sp)
endm
pop macro op
move (sp)+,op
endm
\end{verbatim}
If one writes
\begin{verbatim}
push d0
pop a2 ,
\end{verbatim}
this results in
\begin{verbatim}
move.w d0,-(sp)
move.w (sp)+,a2
\end{verbatim}
A macro definition must not cross include file boundaries.
Labels defined in macros always are regarded as being local, an explicit
\tty{LOCAL} instruction is therefore not necessary (it even does not
exist). In case there is a reason to make a label global, one may define
it with \tty{LABEL} which always creates global symbols (similar to \tty{BIT,
SFR...}):
\begin{verbatim}
<Name> label $
\end{verbatim}
When parsing a line, the assembler first checks the macro list
afterwards looks for processor instructions, which is why macros
allow to redefine processor instructions. However, the definition
should appear previously to the first invocation of the instruction
to avoid phase errors like in the following example:
\begin{verbatim}
bsr target
bsr macro targ
jsr targ
endm
bsr target
\end{verbatim}
In the first pass, the macro is not known when the first \tty{BSR}
instruction is assembled; an instruction with 4 bytes of length is
generated. In the second pass however, the macro definition is
immediately available (from the first pass), a \tty{JSR} of 6 bytes length
is therefore generated. As a result, all labels following are too low
by 2 and phase errors occur for them. An additional pass is
necessary to resolve this.
Because a machine or pseudo instruction becomes hidden when a macro
of same name is defined, there is a backdoor to reach the original
meaning: the search for macros is suppressed if the name is prefixed
with an exclamation mark (!). This may come in handy if one wants to
extend existing instructions in their functionality, e.g. the
TLCS-90's shift instructions:
\begin{verbatim}
srl macro op,n ; shift by n places
rept n ; n simple instructions
!srl op
endm
endm
\end{verbatim}
From now on, the \tty{SRL} instruction has an additional parameter...
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{IRP}
\ttindex{IRP}
is a simplified macro definition for the case that an instruction sequence
shall be applied to a couple of operands and the the code is not needed
any more afterwards. \tty{IRP} needs a symbol for the operand as its
first parameter, and an (almost) arbitrary number of parameters that are
sequentially inserted into the block of code. For example, one can write
\begin{verbatim}
irp op, acc,b,dpl,dph
push op
endm
\end{verbatim}
to push a couple of registers to the stack, what results in
\begin{verbatim}
push acc
push b
push dpl
push dph
\end{verbatim}
Again, labels used are automatically local for every pass.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{IRPC}
\ttindex{IRPC}
\tty{IRPC} is a variant of \tty{IRP} where the first argument's occurences
in the lines up to \tty{ENDM} are successively replaced by the characters
of a string instead of further parameters. For example, an especially
complicated way of placing a string into memory would be:
\begin{verbatim}
irpc char,"Hello World"
db 'CHAR'
endm
\end{verbatim}
\bb{CAUTION!} As the example already shows, \tty{IRPC} only inserts the
pure character; it is the programmer's task to assure that valid code
results (in this example by inserting quotes, including the detail that no
automatic conversion to uppercase characters is done).
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{REPT}
\ttindex{REPT}
is the simplest way to employ macro constructs. The code between
\tty{REPT} and \tty{ENDM} is assembled as often as the integer argument of
\tty{REPT} specifies. This statement is commonly used in small loops to
replace a programmed loop to save the loop overhead.
An example for the sake of completeness:
\begin{verbatim}
rept 3
rr a
endm
\end{verbatim}
rotates the accumulator to the right by three digits.
In case \tty{REPT}'s argument is equal to or smaller than 0, no expansion
at all is done. This is different to older versions of AS which used to
be a bit 'sloppy' in this respect and always made a single expansion.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{WHILE}
\ttindex{WHILE}
\tty{WHILE} operates similarly to \tty{REPT}, but the fixed number of
repetitions given as an argument is replaced by a boolean expression. The
code framed by \tty{WHILE} and \tty{ENDM} is assembled until the
expression becomes logically false. This may mean in the extreme case
that the enclosed code is not assembled at all in case the expression was
already false when the construct was found. On the other hand, it may
happen that the expression stays true forever and AS will run
infinitely...one should apply therefore a bit of accuracy when one uses
this construct, i.e. the code must contain a statement that influences the
condition, e.g. like this:
\begin{verbatim}
cnt set 1
sq set cnt*cnt
while sq<=1000
dc.l sq
cnt set cnt+1
sq set cnt*cnt
endm
\end{verbatim}
This example stores all square numbers up to 1000 to memory.
Currently there exists a little ugly detail for \tty{WHILE}: an additional
empty line that was not present in the code itself is added after the last
expansion. This is a 'side effect' based on a weakness of the macro
processor and it is unfortunately not that easy to fix. I hope noone
minds...
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{EXITM}
\ttindex{EXITM}
\tty{EXITM} offers a way to terminate a macro expansion or one of the
instructions \tty{REPT, IRP,} or \tty{WHILE} prematurely. Such an option
helps for example to replace encapsulations with \tty{IF-ENDIF}-ladders in
macros by something more readable. Of course, an \tty{EXITM} itself
always has to be conditional, what leads us to an important detail: When
an \tty{EXITM} is executed, the stack of open \tty{IF} and
\tty{SWITCH} constructs is reset to the state it had just before the macro
expansion started. This is imperative for conditional \tty{EXITM}'s as
the \tty{ENDIF} resp. \tty{ENDCASE} that frames the \tty{EXITM} statement
will not be reached any more; AS would print an error message without this
trick. Please keep also in mind that \tty{EXITM} always only terminates
the innermost construct if macro constructs are nested! If one want to
completely break out of a nested construct, one has to use additional
\tty{EXITM}'s on the higher levels!
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{FUNCTION}
\label{SectFUNCTION}
\ttindex{FUNCTION}
Though \tty{FUNCTION} is not a macro statement in the inner sense, I will
describe this instruction at this place because it uses similar principles
like macro replacements.
This instruction is used to define new functions that may then be
used in formula expressions like predefined functions. The
definition must have the following form:
\begin{verbatim}
<name> FUNCTION <arg>,..,<arg>,<expression>
\end{verbatim}
The arguments are the values that are 'fed into' the function. The
definition uses symbolic names for the arguments. The assembler
knows by this that where to insert the actual values when the
function is called. This can be seen from the following example:
\begin{verbatim}
isdigit FUNCTION ch,(ch>='0')&&(ch<='9')
\end{verbatim}
This function checks whether the argument (interpreted as a character) is
a number in the currently valid character set (the character set can be
modified via \tty{CHARSET}, therefore the careful wording).
The arguments' names (\tty{CH} in this case) must conform to the stricter
rules for macro parameter names, i.e. the special characters . and \_
are not allowed.
User-defined functions can be used in the same way as builtin
functions, i.e. with a list of parameters, separated by commas,
enclosed in parentheses:
\begin{verbatim}
IF isdigit(char)
message "\{char} is a number"
ELSEIF
message "\{char} is not a number"
ENDIF
\end{verbatim}
When the function is called, all parameters are calculated once and
are then inserted into the function's formula. This is done to
reduce calculation overhead and to avoid side effects. The
individual arguments have to be separated by commas when a function
has more than one parameter.
\bb{CAUTION!} Similar to macros, one can use user-defined functions to
override builtin functions. This is a possible source for phase
errors. Such definitions therefore should be done before the first
call!
The result's type may depend on the type of the input arguments as
the arguments are textually inserted into the function's formula.
For example, the function
\begin{verbatim}
double function x,x+x
\end{verbatim}
may have an integer, a float, or even a string as result, depending
on the argument's type!
When AS operates in case-sensitive mode, the case matters when
defining or referencing user-defined functions, in contrast to
builtin functions!
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Conditional Assembly}
{\em valid for: all processors}
The assembler supports conditional assembly with the help of statements
like \tty{IF...} resp. \tty{SWITCH...} . These statements work at
assembly time allowing or disallowing the assembly of program parts based
on conditions. They are therefore not to be compared with IF statements
of high-level languages (though it would be tempting to extend assembly
language with structurization statements of higher level languages...).
The following constructs may be nested arbitrarily (until a memory
overflow occurs).
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{IF / ELSEIF / ENDIF}
\ttindex{IF}
\ttindex{ENDIF}
\ttindex{ELSEIF}\ttindex{ELSE}
\tty{IF} is the most common and most versatile construct. The general
style of an \tty{IF} statement is as follows:
\begin{verbatim}
IF <expression 1>
.
.
<block 1>
.
.
ELSEIF <expression 2>
.
.
<block 2>
.
.
(possibly more ELSEIFs)
.
.
ELSEIF
.
.
<block n>
.
.
ENDIF
\end{verbatim}
\tty{IF} serves as an entry, evaluates the first expression, and assembles
block 1 if the expression is true (i.e. not 0). All further
\tty{ELSEIF}-blocks will then be skipped. However, if the expression is
false, block 1 will be skipped and expression 2 is evaluated. If this
expression turns out to be true, block 2 is assembled. The number of
\tty{ELSEIF} parts is variable and results in an \tty{IF-THEN-ELSE} ladder
of an arbitrary length. The block assigned to the last \tty{ELSEIF}
(without argument) only gets assembled if all previous expressions
evaluated to false; it therefore forms a 'default' branch. It is
important to note that only \bb{one} of the blocks will be assembled: the
first one whose \tty{IF/ELSEIF} had a true expression as argument.
The \tty{ELSEIF} parts are optional, i.e. \tty{IF} may directly be
followed by an \tty{ENDIF}. An \tty{ELSEIF} without parameters must be
the last branch.
\tty{ELSEIF} always refers to the innermost, unfinished \tty{IF} construct
in case \tty{IF}'s are nested.
\ttindex{IFDEF}\ttindex{IFNDEF}\ttindex{IFUSED}\ttindex{IFNUSED}
\ttindex{IFEXIST}\ttindex{IFNEXIST}\ttindex{IFB}\ttindex{IFNB}
In addition to \tty{IF}, the following further conditional statements are
defined:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{IFDEF $<$symbol$>$}: true if the given symbol has been defined.
The definition has to appear before \tty{IFDEF}.}
\item{\tty{IFNDEF $<$symbol$>$}: counterpart to \tty{IFDEF}.}
\item{\tty{IFUSED $<$symbol$>$}: true if if the given symbol has been
referenced at least once up to now.}
\item{\tty{IFNUSED $<$symbol$>$}: counterpart to \tty{IFUSED}.}
\item{\tty{IFEXIST $<$name$>$}: true if the given file exists. The same
rules for search paths and syntax apply as for the
\tty{INCLUDE} instruction (see section \ref{SectInclude}).}
\item{\tty{IFNEXIST $<$name$>$}: counterpart to \tty{IFEXIST}.}
\item{\tty{IFB $<$arg-list$>$}: true if all arguments of the parameter
list are empty strings.}
\item{\tty{IFNB $<$arg-list$>$}: counterpart to \tty{IFB}.}
\end{itemize}
It is valid to write {\tt ELSE} instead of {\tt ELSEIF} since everybody
seems to be used to it...
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SWITCH / CASE / ELSECASE / ENDCASE}
\ttindex{SWITCH}\ttindex{CASE}\ttindex{ELSECASE}\ttindex{ENDCASE}
\tty{CASE} is a special case of \tty{IF} and is designed for situations
when an expression has to be compared with a couple of values. This could
of course also be done with a series of \tty{ELSEIF}s, but the following
form
\begin{verbatim}
SWITCH <expression>
.
.
CASE <value 1>
.
<block 1>
.
CASE <value 2>
.
<block 2>
.
(further CASE blocks)
.
CASE <value n-1>
.
<block n-1>
.
ELSECASE
.
<block n>
.
ENDCASE
\end{verbatim}
has the advantage that the expression is only written once and also only
gets evaluated once. It is therefore less error-prone and slightly faster
than an \tty{IF} chain, but obviously not as flexible.
It is possible to specify multiple values separated by commas to a
\tty{CASE} statement in order to assemble the following block in multiple
cases. The \tty{ELSECASE} branch again serves as a 'trap' for the case
that none of the \tty{CASE} conditions was met. AS will issue a warning
in case it is missing and all comparisons fail.
Even when value lists of \tty{CASE} branches overlap, only \bb{one} branch
is executed, which is the first one in case of ambiguities.
\tty{SWITCH} only serves to open the whole construct; an arbitrary number
of statements may be between \tty{SWITCH} and the first \tty{CASE} (but
don't leave other \tty{IF}s open!), for the sake of better readability
this should however not be done.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Listing Control}
{\em valid for: all processors}
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{PAGE}
\ttindex{PAGE}
\tty{PAGE} is used to tell AS the dimensions of the paper that is used to
print the assembly listing. The first parameter is thereby the
number of lines after which AS shall automatically output a form
feed. One should however take into account that this value does \bb{not}
include heading lines including an eventual line specified with
\tty{TITLE}. The minimum number of lines is 5, and the maximum value is
255. A specification of 0 has the result that AS will not do any form
feeds except those triggered by a \tty{NEWPAGE} instruction or those
implicitly engaged at the end of the assembly listing (e.g. prior to the
symbol table).
The specification of the listing's length in characters is an
optional second parameter and serves two purposes: on the one hand,
the internal line counter of AS will continue to run correctly when a
source line has to be split into several listing lines, and on
the other hand there are printers (like some laser printers) that do
not automatically wrap into a new line at line end but instead simply
discard the rest. For this reason, AS does line breaks by itself,
i.e. lines that are too long are split into chunks whose lengths are
equal to or smaller than the specified width. This may lead to
double line feeds on printers that can do line wraps on their own if
one specifies the exact line width as listing width. The solution
for such a case is to reduce the assembly listing's width by 1. The
specified line width may lie between 5 and 255 characters; a line
width of 0 means similarly to the page length that AS shall not do
any splitting of listing lines; lines that are too long of course
cannot be taken into account of the form feed then any more.
The default setting for the page length is 60 lines, the default for the
line width is 0; the latter value is also assumed when \tty{PAGE} is
called with only one parameter.
\bb{CAUTION!} There is no way for AS to check whether the specified
listing length and width correspond to the reality!
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{NEWPAGE}
\ttindex{NEWPAGE}
\tty{NEWPAGE} can be used to force a line feed though the current line is
not full up to now. This might be useful to separate program parts
in the listing that are logically different. The internal line
counter is reset and the page counter is incremented by one. The
optional parameter is in conjunction with a hierarchical page
numbering AS supports up to a chapter depth of 4. 0 always refers to
the lowest depth, and the maximum value may vary during the assembly
run. This may look a bit puzzling, as the following example shows:
\begin{quote}\begin{tabbing}
\hspace{2.5cm} \= \hspace{4.5cm} \= \kill
page 1, \> instruction \tty{NEWPAGE 0} \> $\rightarrow$ page 2 \\
page 2, \> instruction \tty{NEWPAGE 1} \> $\rightarrow$ page 2.1 \\
page 2.1, \> instruction \tty{NEWPAGE 1} \> $\rightarrow$ page 3.1 \\
page 3.1, \> instruction \tty{NEWPAGE 0} \> $\rightarrow$ page 3.2 \\
page 3.2, \> instruction \tty{NEWPAGE 2} \> $\rightarrow$ page 4.1.1 \\
\end{tabbing}\end{quote}
\tty{NEWPAGE $<$number$>$} may therefore result in
changes in different digits, depending on the current chapter depth. An
automatic form feed due to a line counter overflow or a \tty{NEWPAGE}
without parameter is equal to \tty{NEWPAGE 0}. Previous to the output of
the symbol table, an implicit \tty{NEWPAGE $<$maximum up to now$>$} is
done to start a new 'main chapter'.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{MACEXP}
\ttindex{MACEXP}
One can achieve by the statement
\begin{verbatim}
macexp off
\end{verbatim}
that only the macro call and not the expanded text is listed for
macro expansions. This is sensible for macro intensive codes to
avoid that the listing grows beyond all bounds. The full listing can
be turned on again with a
\begin{verbatim}
macexp on .
\end{verbatim}
This is also the default.
There is a subtle difference between the meaning of \tty{MACEXP} for
macros and for all other macro-like constructs (e.g. \tty{REPT}): while a
macro contain an internal flag that rules whether expansions of this macro
shall be listed or not, \tty{MACEXP} directly influences all other
constructs that are resolved 'in place'. The reason for this
differentiation is that there may be macros that are tested and their
expansion is therefore unnecessary, but all other macros still shall be
expanded. \tty{MACEXP} serves as a default for the macro's internal flag
when it is defined, and it may be overridden by the \tty{NOEXPAND} resp.
\tty{EXPAND} directives.
The current setting may be read from the symbol \tty{MACEXP}.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{LISTING}
\ttindex{LISTING}
works like \tty{MACEXP} and accepts the same parameters, but is much more
radical: After a
\begin{verbatim}
listing off ,
\end{verbatim}
nothing at all will be written to the listing. This directive makes sense
for tested code parts or include files to avoid a paper consumption going
beyond all bounds. \bb{CAUTION!} If one forgets to issue the counterpart
somewhere later, even the symbol table will not be written any more! In
addition to \tty{ON} and \tty{OFF}, \tty{LISTING} also accepts
\tty{NOSKIPPED} and \tty{PURECODE} as arguments. Program parts that were
not assembled due to conditional assembly will not be written to the
listing when \tty{NOSKIPPED} is set, while \tty{PURECODE} - as the name
indicates - even suppresses the \tty{IF} directives themselves in the
listing. These options are useful if one uses macros that act differently
depending on parameters and one only wants to see the used parts in the
listing.
The current setting may be read from the symbol \tty{LISTING} (0=\tty{OFF},
1=\tty{ON}, 2=\tty{NOSKIPPED}, 3=\tty{PURECODE}).
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{PRTINIT and PRTEXIT}
\ttindex{PRTINIT}\ttindex{PRTEXIT}
Quite often it makes sense to switch to another printing mode (like
compressed printing) when the listing is sent to a printer and to
deactivate this mode again at the end of the listing. The output of
the needed control sequences can be automated with these instructions
if one specifies the sequence that shall be sent to the output device
prior to the listing with \tty{PRTINIT $<$string$>$} and similarly the
deinitialization string with \tty{PRTEXIT $<$string$>$}.
\tty{$<$string$>$} has to be a string expression in both cases. The syntax
rules for string constants allow to insert control characters into the
string without too much tweaking.
When writing the listing, the assembler does \bb{not} differentiate where
the listing actually goes, i.e. printer control characters are sent to the
screen without mercy!
Example:
For Epson printers, it makes sense to switch them to compressed
printing because listings are so wide. The lines
\begin{verbatim}
prtinit "\15"
prtexit "\18"
\end{verbatim}
assure that the compressed mode is turned on at the beginning of the
listing and turned off afterwards.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{TITLE}
\ttindex{TITLE}
The assembler normally adds a header line to each page of the listing
that contains the source file's name, date, and time. This
statement allows to extend the page header by an arbitrary additional
line. The string that has to be specified is an arbitrary string
expression.
Example:
For the Epson printer already mentioned above, a title line shall be
written in wide mode, which makes it necessary to turn off the
compressed mode before:
\begin{verbatim}
title "\18\14Wide Title\15"
\end{verbatim}
(Epson printers automatically turn off the wide mode at the end of a
line.)
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{RADIX}
\ttindex{RADIX}
\tty{RADIX} with a numerical argument between 2 and 36 sets the default
numbering system for integer constants, i.e. the numbering system used if
nothing else has been stated explicitly. The default is 10, and there are
some possible pitfalls to keep in mind which are described in section
\ref{SectIntConsts}.
Independent of the current setting, the argument of {\tt RADIX} is {\em
always decimal}; furthermore, no symbolic or formula expressions may be
used as argument. Only use simple constant numbers!
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{OUTRADIX}
\ttindex{OUTRADIX}
\tty{OUTRADIX} can in a certain way be regarded as the opposite to
\tty{RADIX}: This statement allows to configure which numbering system to
use for integer results when \verb!\{...}! constructs are used in string
constants (see section \ref{SectStringConsts}). Valid arguments range
again from 2 to 36, while the default is 16.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Local Symbols}
\label{ChapLocSyms}
{\em valid for: all processors}
local symbols and the section concept introduced with them are a
completely new function that was introduced with version 1.39. One
could say that this part is version ''1.0'' and therefore probably not
the optimum. Ideas and (constructive) criticism are therefore
especially wanted. I admittedly described the usage of sections how
I imagined it. It is therefore possible that the reality is not
entirely equal to the model in my head. I promise that in case of
discrepancies, changes will occur that the reality gets adapted to
the documentation and not vice versa (I was told that the latter
sometimes takes place in larger companies...).
AS does not generate linkable code (and this will probably not change
in the near future \tty{:-(}). This fact forces one to always assemble a
program in a whole. In contrast to this technique, a separation into
linkable modules would have several advantages:
\begin{itemize}
\item{shorter assembly times as only the modified modules have to be
reassembled;}
\item{the option to set up defined interfaces among modules by definition
of private and public symbols;}
\item{the smaller length of the individual modules reduces the number of
symbols per module and therefore allows to use shorter symbol names
that are still unique.}
\end{itemize}
Especially the last item was something that always nagged me: once
there was a label's name defined at the beginning of a 2000-lines
program, there was no way to reuse it somehow - even not at the
file's other end where routines with a completely different context
were placed. I was forced to use concatenated names in the style of
\begin{verbatim}
<subprogram name>_<symbol name>
\end{verbatim}
that had lengths ranging from 15 to 25 characters and made the
program difficult to overlook. The concept of section described in
detail in the following text was designed to cure at least the second
and third item of the list above. It is completely optional: if you
do not want to use sections, simply forget them and continue to work
like you did with previous versions of AS.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{Basic Definition (SECTION/ENDSECTION)}
\ttindex{SECTION}\ttindex{ENDSECTION}
A section represents a part of the assembler program enclosed by
special statements and has a unique name chosen by the programmer:
\begin{verbatim}
.
.
<other code>
.
.
SECTION <section's name>
.
.
<code inside of the section>
.
.
ENDSECTION [section's name]
.
.
<other code>
.
.
\end{verbatim}
The name of a section must conform to the conventions for s symbol
name; AS stores section and symbol names in separate tables which is
the reason why a name may be used for a symbol and a section at the
same time. Section names must be unique in a sense that there must
not be more than one section on the same level with the same name (I
will explain in the next part what ''levels'' mean). The argument of
\tty{ENDSECTION} is optional, it may also be omitted; if it is omitted, AS
will show the section's name that has been closed with this
\tty{ENDSECTION}. Code inside a section will be processed by AS exactly
as if it were outside, except for three decisive differences:
\begin{itemize}
\item{Symbols defined within a section additionally get an internally
generated number that corresponds to the section. These symbols
are not accessible by code outside the section (this can be
changed by pseudo instructions, later more about this).}
\item{The additional attribute allows to define symbols of the same
name inside and outside the section; the attribute makes it
possible to use a symbol name multiple times without getting error
messages from AS.}
\item{If a symbol of a certain name has been defined inside and outside
of a section, the ''local'' one will be preferred inside the
section, i.e. AS first searches the symbol table for a symbol of
the referenced name that also was assigned to the section. A
search for a global symbol of this name only takes place if the
first search fails.}
\end{itemize}
This mechanism e.g. allows to split the code into modules as one
might have done it with linkable code. A more fine-grained approach
would be to pack every routine into a separate section. Depending on
the individual routines' lengths, the symbols for internal use may
obtain very short names.
AS will by default not differentiate between upper and lower case in
section names; if one however switches to case-sensitive mode, the
case will be regarded just like for symbols.
The organization described up to now roughly corresponds to what is
possible in the C language that places all functions on the same
level. However, as my ''high-level'' ideal was Pascal and not C, I
went one step further:
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{Nesting and Scope Rules}
It is valid to define further sections within a section. This is
analog to the option given in Pascal to define procedures inside a
procedure or function. The following example shows this:
\begin{verbatim}
sym EQU 0
SECTION ModuleA
SECTION ProcA1
sym EQU 5
ENDSECTION ProcA1
SECTION ProcA2
sym EQU 10
ENDSECTION ProcA2
ENDSECTION ModuleA
SECTION ModuleB
sym EQU 15
SECTION ProcB
ENDSECTION ProcB
ENDSECTION ModuleB
\end{verbatim}
When looking up a symbol, AS first searches for a symbol assigned to
the current section, and afterwards traverses the list of parent
sections until the global symbols are reached. In our example, the
individual sections see the values given in table \ref{TabSymErg} for
the symbol \tty{sym}:
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
\hline
section & value & from section... \\
\hline
\hline
Global & 0 & Global \\
\hline
\tty{ModuleA} & 0 & Global \\
\hline
\tty{ProcA1} & 5 & \tty{ProcA1} \\
\hline
\tty{ProcA2} & 10 & \tty{ProcA2} \\
\hline
\tty{ModuleB} & 15 & \tty{ModuleB} \\
\hline
\tty{ProcB} & 15 & \tty{ModuleB} \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Valid values for the Individual Sections\label{TabSymErg}}
\end{table*}
This rule can be overridden by explicitly appending a section's name
to the symbol's name. The section's name has to be enclosed in
brackets:
\begin{verbatim}
move.l #sym[ModulB],d0
\end{verbatim}
Only sections that are in the parent section path of the current
section may be used. The special values \tty{PARENT0..PARENT9} are allowed
to reference the n-th ''parent'' of the current section; \tty{PARENT0} is
therefore equivalent to the current section itself, \tty{PARENT1} the
direct parent and so on. \tty{PARENT1} may be abbreviated as \tty{PARENT}. If
no name is given between the brackets, like in this example:
\begin{verbatim}
move.l #sym[],d0 ,
\end{verbatim}
one reaches the global symbol. \bb{CAUTION!} If one explicitly
references a symbol from a certain section, AS will only seek for
symbols from this section, i.e. the traversal of the parent sections
path is omitted!
Similar to Pascal, it is allowed that different sections have
subsections of the same name; the principle of locality avoids
irritations. One should IMHO still use this feature as seldom as
possible: Symbols listed in the symbol resp. cross reference list are
only marked with the section they are assigned to, not with the
''section hierarchy'' lying above them (this really would have busted
the available space); a differentiation is made very difficult this
way.
As a \tty{SECTION} instruction does not define a label by itself, the
section concept has an important difference to Pascal's concept of
nested procedures: a pascal procedure can automatically ''see'' its
subprocedures(functions), AS requires an explicit definition of an
entry point. This can be done e.g. with the following macro pair:
\begin{verbatim}
proc MACRO name
SECTION name
name LABEL $
ENDM
endp MACRO name
ENDSECTION name
ENDM
\end{verbatim}
This example also shows that the locality of labels inside macros
is not influenced by sections. It makes the trick with the \tty{LABEL}
instruction necessary.
This does of course not solve the problem completely. The label is
still local and not referencable from the outside. Those who think
that it would suffice to place the label in front of the \tty{SECTION}
statement should be quiet because they would spoil the bridge to the
next theme:
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{PUBLIC and GLOBAL}
\ttindex{PUBLIC}\ttindex{GLOBAL}
The \tty{PUBLIC} statement allows to change the assignment of a symbol to
a certain section. It is possible to treat multiple symbols with one
statement, but I will use an example with only one symbol in the following
(not hurting the generality of this discussion). In the simplest case,
one declares a symbol to be global, i.e. it can be referenced from
anywhere in the program:
\begin{verbatim}
PUBLIC <name>
\end{verbatim}
As a symbol cannot be moved in the symbol table once it has been sorted
in, this statement has to appear \bb{before} the symbol itself is
defined. AS stores all \tty{PUBLICs} in a list and removes an entry from
this list when the corresponding symbol is defined. AS prints errors at
the end of a section in case that not all \tty{PUBLICs} have been
resolved.
Regarding the hierarchical section concept, the method of defining a
symbol as purely global looks extremely brute. There is fortunately
a way to do this in a bit more differentiated way: by appending a
section name:
\begin{verbatim}
PUBLIC <name>:<section>
\end{verbatim}
The symbol will be assigned to the referenced section and therefore also
becomes accessible for all its subsections (except they define a symbol of
the same name that hides the ''more global'' symbol). AS will naturally
protest if several subsections try to export a symbol of same name to the
same level. The special \tty{PARENTn} values mentioned in the previous
section are also valid for \tty{$<$section$>$} to export a symbol exactly
\tty{n} levels up in the section hierarchy. Otherwise only sections that
are parent sections of the current section are valid for
\tty{$<$section$>$}. Sections that are in another part of the section
tree are not allowed. If several sections in the parent section path
should have the same name (this is possible), the lowest level will be
taken.
This tool lets the abovementioned macro become useful:
\begin{verbatim}
proc MACRO name
SECTION name
PUBLIC name:PARENT
name LABEL $
ENDM
\end{verbatim}
This setting is equal to the Pascal model that also only allows the
''father'' to see its children, but not the ''grandpa''.
AS will quarrel about double-defined symbols if more than one section
attempts to export a symbol of a certain name to the same upper section.
This is by itself a correct reaction, and one needs to ''qualify'' symbols
somehow to make them distinguishable if these exports were deliberate. A
\tty{GLOBAL} statement does just this. The syntax of \tty{GLOBAL} is
identical to \tty{PUBLIC}, but the symbol stays local instead of being
assigned to a higher section. Instead, an additional symbol of the same
value but with the subsection's name appended to the symbol's name is
created, and only this symbol is made public according to the section
specification. If for example two sections \tty{A} and \tty{B} both
define a symbol named \tty{SYM} and export it with a \tty{GLOBAL}
statement to their parent section, the symbols are sorted in under the
names \tty{A\_SYM} resp. \tty{B\_SYM} .
In case that source and target section are separated by more than one
level, the complete name path is prepended to the symbol name.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{FORWARD}
\ttindex{FORWARD}
The model described so far may look beautiful, but there is an
additional detail not present in Pascal that may spoil the happiness:
Assembler allows forward references. Forward references may lead to
situations where AS accesses a symbol from a higher section in the
first pass. This is not a disaster by itself as long as the correct
symbol is used in the second pass, but accidents of the following
type may happen:
\begin{verbatim}
loop: .
<code>
.
.
SECTION sub
. ; ***
.
bra.s loop
.
.
loop: .
.
ENDSECTION
.
.
jmp loop ; main loop
\end{verbatim}
AS will take the global label \tty{loop} in the first pass and will
quarrel about an out-of-branch situation if the program part at
\tty{$<$code$>$} is long enough. The second pass will not be
started at all. One way to avoid the ambiguity would be to
explicitly specify the symbol's section:
\begin{verbatim}
bra.s loop[sub]
\end{verbatim}
If a local symbol is referenced several times, the brackets can be saved
by using a \tty{FORWARD} statement. The symbol is thereby explicitly
announced to be local, and AS will only look in the local symbol table
part when this symbol is referenced. For our example, the statement
\begin{verbatim}
FORWARD loop
\end{verbatim}
should be placed at the position marked with \tty{***}.
\tty{FORWARD} must not only be stated prior to a symbol's definition, but
also prior to its first usage in a section to make sense. It does not
make sense to define a symbol private and public; this will be regarded as
an error by AS.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{Performance Aspects}
The multi-stage lookup in the symbol table and the decision to which
section a symbol shall be assigned of course cost a bit of time to
compute. An 8086 program of 1800 lines length for example took 34.5
instead of 33 seconds after a modification to use sections (80386 SX,
16MHz, 3 passes). The overhead is therefore limited. As it has
already been stated at the beginning, is is up to the programmer if
(s)he wants to accept it. One can still use AS without sections.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Miscellaneous}
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{SHARED}
\label{ChapShareOrder}
\ttindex{SHARED}
{\em valid for: all processors}
This statement instructs AS to write the symbols given in the
parameter list (regardless if they are integer, float or string
symbols) together with their values into the share file. It depends
upon the command line parameters described in section
\ref{SectCallConvention} whether such a file is generated at all and in
which format it is written. If AS detects this instruction and no share
file is generated, a warning is the result.
\bb{CAUTION!} A comment possibly appended to the statement itself will be
copied to the first line outputted to the share file (if \tty{SHARED}'s
argument list is empty, only the comment will be written). In case a
share file is written in C or Pascal format, one has to assure that
the comment itself does not contain character sequences that close
the comment (''*/'' resp. ''*)''). AS does not check for this!
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{INCLUDE}
\label{SectInclude}
\ttindex{INCLUDE}
{\em valid for: all processors}
This instruction inserts the file given as a parameter into the just as
if it would have been inserted with an editor (the file name may
optionally be enclosed with '' characters). This instruction is
useful to split source files that would otherwise not fit into the
editor or to create ''tool boxes''.
In case that the file name does not have an extension, it will
automatically be extended with \tty{INC}.
Via the \tty{-i $<$path list$>$} option, one can specify a list of
directories that will automatically be searched for the file. If the
file is not found, a \bb{fatal} error occurs, i.e. assembly terminates
immediately.
For compatibility reasons, it is valid to enclose the file name in ''
characters, i.e.
\begin{verbatim}
include stddef51
\end{verbatim}
and
\begin{verbatim}
include "stddef51.inc"
\end{verbatim}
are equivalent. \bb{CAUTION!} This freedom of choice is the reason why
only a string constant but no string expression is allowed!
The search list is ignored if the file name itself contains a path
specification.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{BINCLUDE}
\ttindex{BINCLUDE}
{\em valid for: all processors}
\tty{BINCLUDE} can be used to embed binary data generated by other programs
into the code generated by AS (this might theoretically even be code
created by AS itself...). \tty{BINCLUDE} has three forms:
\begin{verbatim}
BINCLUDE <file>
\end{verbatim}
This way, the file is completely included.
\begin{verbatim}
BINCLUDE <file>,<offset>
\end{verbatim}
This way, the file's contents are included starting at \tty{<offset>} up to
the file's end.
\begin{verbatim}
BINCLUDE <file>,<offset>,<length>
\end{verbatim}
This way, \tty{$<$length$>$} bytes are included starting at
\tty{$<$offset$>$}.
The same rules regarding search paths apply as for \tty{INCLUDE}.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{MESSAGE, WARNING, ERROR, and FATAL}
\ttindex{MESSAGE}\ttindex{WARNING}\ttindex{ERROR}\ttindex{FATAL}
{\em valid for: all processors}
Though the assembler checks source files as strict as possible and
delivers differentiated error messages, it might be necessary from
time to time to issue additional error messages that allow an
automatic check for logical error. The assembler distinguishes
among three different types of error messages that are accessible to
the programmer via the following three instructions:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{WARNING}: Errors that hint at possibly wrong or inefficient
code. Assembly continues and a code file is generated.}
\item{\tty{ERROR}: True errors in a program. Assembly continues to
allow detection of possible further errors in the same pass.
A code file is not generated.}
\item{\tty{FATAL}: Serious errors that force an immediate termination
of assembly. A code file may be generated but will be incomplete.}
\end{itemize}
All three instructions have the same format for the message that shall
be issued: an arbitrary (possibly computed?!) string expression which
may therefore be either a constant or variable.
These instructions generally only make sense in conjunction wit
conditional assembly. For example, if there is only a limited
address space for a program, one can test for overflow in the
following way:
\begin{verbatim}
ROMSize equ 8000h ; 27256 EPROM
ProgStart:
.
.
<the program itself>
.
.
ProgEnd:
if ProgEnd-ProgStart>ROMSize
error "\athe program is too long!"
endif
\end{verbatim}
Apart from the instructions generating errors, there is also an
instruction \tty{MESSAGE} that simply prints a message to the console
resp. to the assembly listing. Its usage is equal to the other three
instructions.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{READ}
\ttindex{READ}
{\em valid for: all processors}
One could say that \tty{READ} is the counterpart to the previous
instruction group: it allows to read values from the keyboard during
assembly. You might ask what this is good for. I will break with
the previous principles and put an example before the exact
description to outline the usefulness of this instruction:
A program needs for data transfers a buffer of a size that should be
set at assembly time. One could store this size in a symbol defined
with \tty{EQU}, but it can also be done interactively with \tty{READ}:
\begin{verbatim}
IF MomPass=1
READ "buffer size",BufferSize
ENDIF
\end{verbatim}
Programs can this way configure themselves dynamically during assembly
and one could hand over the source to someone who can assemble it
without having to dive into the source code. The \tty{IF} conditional
shown in the example should always be used to avoid bothering the
user multiple times with questions.
\tty{READ} is quite similar to \tty{SET} with the difference that the
value is read from the keyboard instead of the instruction's arguments.
This for example also implies that AS will automatically set the symbol's
type (integer, float or string) or that it is valid to enter formula
expressions instead of a simple constant.
\tty{READ} may either have one or two parameters because the prompting
message is optional. AS will print a message constructed from the
symbol's name if it is omitted.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{RELAXED}
\label{SectRELAXED}
\ttindex{RELAXED}
{\em valid for: all processors}
By default, AS assigns a distinct syntax for integer constants to a
processor family (which is in general equal to the manufacturer's
specifications, as long as the syntax is not too bizarre...).
Everyone however has his own preferences for another syntax and may
well live with the fact that his programs cannot be translated any
more with the standard assembler. If one places the instruction
\begin{verbatim}
RELAXED ON
\end{verbatim}
right at the program's beginning, one may furtherly use any syntax
for integer constants, even mixed in a program. AS tries to guess
automatically for every expression the syntax that was used. This
automatism does not always deliver the result one might have in mind,
and this is also the reason why this option has to be enable
explicitly: if there are no prefixes or postfixes that unambiguously
identify either Intel or Motorola syntax, the C mode will be used.
Leading zeroes that are superfluous in other modes have a meaning in
this mode:
\begin{verbatim}
move.b #08,d0
\end{verbatim}
This constant will be understood as an octal constant and will result
in an error message as octal numbers may only contain digits from 0
to 7. One might call this a lucky case; a number like 077 would
result in trouble without getting a message about this. Without the
relaxed mode, both expressions unambiguously would have been
identified as decimal constants.
The current setting may be read from a symbol with the same name.
%%- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\subsection{END}
\ttindex{END}
{\em valid for: all processors}
\tty{END} marks the end of an assembler program. Lines that eventually
follow in the source file will be ignored. \bb{IMPORTANT:} \tty{END} may
be called from within a macro, but the \tty{IF}-stack for conditional
assembly is not cleared automatically. The following construct therefore
results in an error:
\begin{verbatim}
IF DontWantAnymore
END
ELSEIF
\end{verbatim}
\tty{END} may optionally have an integer expression as argument that marks
the program's entry point. AS stores this in the code file with a special
record and it may be post-processed e.g. with P2HEX.
\tty{END} has always been a valid instruction for AS, but the only reason
for this in earlier releases of AS was compatibility; \tty{END} had no
effect.
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Processor-specific Hints}
When writing the individual code generators, I strived for a maximum
amount of compatibility to the original assemblers. However, I only did this
as long as it did not mean an unacceptable additional amount of work.
I listed important differences, details and pitfalls in the following
chapter.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{6811}
''Where can I buy such a beast, a HC11 in NMOS?'', some of you might
ask. Well, of course it does not exist, but an H cannot be
represented in a hexadecimal number (older versions of AS would not
have accepted such a name because of this), and so I decided to omit
all the letters...
\par
\begin{quote}{\it
''Someone stating that something is impossible should be at least as
cooperative as not to hinder the one who currently does it.''
}\end{quote}
From time to time, one is forced to revise one's opinions. Some versions
earlier, I stated at his place that I couldn't use AS's parser in a way
that it is also possible to to separate the arguments of \tty{BSET/BCLR}
resp. \tty{BRSET/BRCLR} with spaces. However, it seems that it can do
more than I wanted to believe...after the n+1th request, I sat down once
again to work on it and things seem to work now. You may use either
spaces or commas, but not in all variants, to avoid ambiguities: for
every variant of an instruction, it is possible to use only commas or a
mixture of spaces and commas as Motorola seems to have defined it (their
data books do not always have the quality of the corresponding
hardware...):
\begin{verbatim}
Bxxx abs8 #mask is equal to Bxxx abs8,#mask
Bxxx disp8,X #mask is equal to Bxxx disp8,X,#mask
BRxxx abs8 #mask addr is equal to BRxxx abs8,#mask,addr
BRxxx disp8,X #mask addr is equal to BRxxx disp8,X,#mask,addr
\end{verbatim}
In this list, \tty{xxx} is a synonym either for \tty{SET} or \tty{CLR};
\tty{\#mask} is the bit mask to be applied (the \# sign is optional). Of
course, the same statements are also valid for Y-indexed expression (not
listed here).
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{PowerPC}
Of course, it is a bit crazy idea to add support in AS for a
processor that was mostly designed for usage in work stations.
Remember that AS mainly is targeted at programmers of single board
computers. But things that today represent the absolute high end in
computing will be average tomorrow and maybe obsolete the next day,
and in the meantime, the Z80 as the 8088 have been retired as CPUs
for personal computers and been moved to the embedded market;
modified versions are marketed as microcontrollers. With the
appearance of the MPC505 and PPC403, my suspicion has proven to be
true that IBM and Motorola try to promote this architecture in as
many fields as possible.
However, the current support is a bit incomplete: Temporarily, the
Intel-style mnemonics are used to allow storage of data and the more
uncommon RS/6000 machine instructions mentioned in \cite{Mot601} are
missing (hopefully noone misses them!). I will finish this as soon
as information about them is available!
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{DSP56xxx}
Motorola, which devil rode you! Which person in your company had the
''brilliant'' idea to separate the parallel data transfers with spaces!
In result, everyone who wants to make his code a bit more readable,
e.g. like this:
\begin{verbatim}
move x:var9 ,r0
move y:var10,r3 ,
\end{verbatim}
is p****ed because the space gets recognized as a separator for
parallel data transfers!
Well...Motorola defined it that way, and I cannot change it. Using
tabs instead of spaces to separate the parallel operations is also
allowed, and the individual operations' parts are again separated
with commas, as one would expect it.
\cite{Mot56} states that instead of using \tty{MOVEC, MOVEM, ANDI} or
\tty{ORI}, it is also valid to use the more general Mnemonics \tty{MODE,
AND} or \tty{OR}.
AS (currently) does not support this.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{H8/300}
Regarding the assembler syntax of these processors, Hitachi generously
copied from Motorola (that wasn't by far the worst choice...),
unfortunately the company wanted to introduce its own format for
hexadecimal numbers. To make it even worse, it is a format that uses
unbalanced single quotes, just like Microchip does. This is something I
could not (I even did not want to) reproduce with AS, as AS uses single
quotes to surround ASCII character sequences. Instead, one has to write
hexadecimal numbers in the well-known Motorola syntax: with a leading
dollar sign.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{SH7000/7600/7700}
Unfortunately, Hitachi once again used their own format for
hexadecimal numbers, and once again I was not able to reproduce this
with AS...please use Motorola syntax!
When using literals and the \tty{LTORG} instruction, a few things have to
be kept in mind if you do not want to suddenly get confronted with strange
error messages:
Literals exist due to the fact that the processor is unable to load
constants out of a range of -128 to 127 with immediate addressing.
AS (and the Hitachi assembler) hide this inability by the automatic
placement of constants in memory which are then referenced via
PC-relative addressing. The question that now arises is where to
locate these constants in memory. AS does not automatically place a
constant in memory when it is needed; instead, they are collected
until an LTORG instruction occurs. The collected constants are then
dumped en bloc, and their addresses are stored in ordinary labels
which are also visible in the symbol table. Such a label's name is
of the form
\begin{verbatim}
LITERAL_s_xxxx_n .
\end{verbatim}
In this name, \tty{s} represents the literal's type. Possible values are
\tty{W} for 16-bit constants, \tty{L} for 32-bit constants and \tty{F} for
forward references where AS cannot decide in anticipation which size is
needed. In case of \tty{s=W} or \tty{L}, \tty{xxxx} denotes the
constant's value in a hexadecimal notation, whereas \tty{xxxx} is a simple
running number for forward references (in a forward reference, one does
not know the value of a constant when it is referenced, so one obviously
cannot incorporate its value into the name). \tty{n} is a counter that
signifies how often a literal of this value previously occurred in the
current section. Literals follow the standard rules for localization by
sections. It is therefore absolutely necessary to place literals that
were generated in a certain section before the section is terminated!
The numbering with \tty{n} is necessary because a literal may occur
multiple times in a section. One reason for this situation is that
PC-relative addressing only allows positive offsets; Literals that
have once been placed with an \tty{LTORG} can therefore not be referenced
in the code that follows. The other reason is that the displacement
is generally limited in length (512 resp. 1024 bytes).
An automatic \tty{LTORG} at the end of a program or previously to
switching to a different target CPU does not occur; if AS detects unplaced
literals in such a situation, an error message is printed.
As the PC-relative addressing mode uses the address of the current
instruction plus 4, it is not possible to access a literal that is
stored directly after the instruction, like in the following example:
\begin{verbatim}
mov #$1234,r6
ltorg
\end{verbatim}
This is a minor item since the CPU anyway would try to execute the
following data as code. Such a situation should not occur in a real
program...another pitfall is far more real: if PC-relative addressing
occurs just behind a delayed branch, the program counter is already
set to the destination address, and the displacement is computed
relative to the branch target plus 2. Following is an example where
this detail leads to a literal that cannot be addressed:
\begin{verbatim}
bra Target
mov #$12345678,r4 ; is executed
.
.
ltorg ; here is the literal
.
.
Target: mov r4,r7 ; execution continues here
\end{verbatim}
As \tty{Target}+2 is on an address behind the literal, a negative
displacement would result. Things become especially hairy when one
of the branch instructions \tty{JMP, JSR, BRAF, or BSRF} is used: as AS
cannot calculate the target address (it is generated at runtime from
a register's contents), a PC value is assumed that should never fit,
effectively disabling any PC-relative addressing at this point.
It is not possible to deduce the memory usage from the count and size
of literals. AS might need to insert a padding word to align a long
word to an address that is evenly divisible by 4; on the other hand,
AS might reuse parts of a 32-bit literal for other 16-bit literals.
Of course multiple use of a literal with a certain value will create
only one entry. However, such optimizations are completely
suppressed for forward references as AS does not know anything about
their value.
As literals use the PC-relative addressing which is only allowed for
the \tty{MOV} instruction, the usage of literals is also limited to
\tty{MOV} instructions. The way AS uses the operand size is a bit tricky:
A specification of a byte or word move means to generate the shortest
possible instruction that results in the desired value placed in the
register's lowest 8 resp. 16 bits. The upper 24 resp. 16 bits are treated
as ''don't care''. However, if one specifies a longword move or omits the
size specification completely, this means that the complete 32-bit
register should contain the desired value. For example, in the following
sequence
\begin{verbatim}
mov.b #$c0,r0
mov.w #$c0,r0
mov.l #$c0,r0 ,
\end{verbatim}
the first instruction will result in true immediate addressing, the
second and third instruction will use a word literal: As bit 7 in
the number is set, the byte instruction will effectively create the
value \$FFFFFFC0 in the register. According to the convention, this
wouldn't be the desired value in the second and third example.
However, a word literal is also sufficient for the third case because
the processor will copy a cleared bit 15 of the operand to bits
16..31.
As one can see, the whole literal stuff is rather complex; I'm sorry but
there was no chance of making things simpler. It is unfortunately a
part of its nature that one sometimes gets error messages about
literals that were not found, which logically should not occur because
AS does the literal processing completely on his own. However, if
other errors occur in the second pass, all following labels will move
because AS does not generate any code any more for statements that
have been identified as erroneous. As literal names are partially built
from other symbols' values, other errors might follow because literal
names searched in the second pass differ from the names stored in the
first pass and AS quarrels about undefined symbols...if such errors
should occur, please correct all other errors first before you start
cursing on me and literals...
People who come out of the Motorola scene and want to use PC-relative
addressing explicitly (e.g. to address variables in a position-independent
way) should know that if this addressing mode is written like in the
programmer's manual:
\begin{verbatim}
mov.l @(Var,PC),r8
\end{verbatim}
\bb{no} implicit conversion of the address to a displacement will occur,
i.e. the operand is inserted as-is into the machine code (this will
probably generate a value range error...). If you want to use
PC-relative addressing on the SH7x00, simply use ''absolute''
addressing (which does not exist on machine level):
\begin{verbatim}
mov.l Var,r8
\end{verbatim}
In this example, the displacement will be calculated correctly (of
course, the same limitations apply for the displacement as it was the
case for literals).
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{MELPS-4500}
The program memory of these microcontrollers is organized in pages of
128 words. Honestly said, this organization only exists because there
are on the one hand branch instructions with a target that must lie
within the same page, and on the other hand ''long'' branches that can
reach the whole address space. The standard syntax defined by
Mitsubishi demands that page number and offset have to be written as
two distinct arguments for the latter instructions. As this is
quite inconvenient (except for indirect jumps, a programmer has no
other reason to deal with pages), AS also allows to write the target
address in a ''linear'' style, for example
\begin{verbatim}
bl $1234
\end{verbatim}
instead of
\begin{verbatim}
bl $24,$34 .
\end{verbatim}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{6502UNDOC}
Since the 6502's undocumented instructions naturally aren't listed in
any data book, they shall be listed shortly at this place. Of
course, you are using them on your own risk. There is no guarantee
that all mask revisions will support all variants! They anyhow do
not work for the CMOS successors of the 6502, since they allocated
the corresponding bit combinations with "official" instructions...
The following symbols are used:
\begin{tabbing}
\hspace{2cm} \= \kill
\& \> binary AND \\
| \> binary OR \\
\verb!^! \> binary XOR \\
$<<$ \> logical shift left \\
$>>$ \> logical shift right \\
$<<<$ \> rotate left \\
$>>>$ \> rotate right \\
$\leftarrow$ \> assignment \\
(..) \> contents of .. \\
{..} \> bits .. \\
A \> accumulator \\
X,Y \> index registers X,Y \\
S \> stack pointer \\
An \> accumulator bit n \\
M \> operand \\
C \> carry \\
PCH \> upper half of program counter \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{JAM} or \tty{KIL} or \tty{CRS} \\
Function \> : \> none, prozessor is halted \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> implicit \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{SLO} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow((M)<<1)|(A)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> absolute long/short, X-indexed long/short, \\
\> \> Y-indexed long, X/Y-indirect \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{ANC} \\
Function \> : \> $A\leftarrow(A)\&(M), C\leftarrow A7$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> immediate \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{RLA} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow((M)<<1)\&(A)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> absolute long/short, X-indexed long/short, \\
\> \> Y-indexed long, X/Y-indirect \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{SRE} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow((M)>>1)$\verb!^!$(A)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> absolute long/short, X-indexed long/short, \\
\> \> Y-indexed long, X/Y-indirect \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{ASR} \\
Function \> : \> $A\leftarrow((A)\&(M))>>1$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> immediate \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{RRA} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow((M)>>>1)+(A)+(C)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> absolute long/short, X-indexed long/short, \\
\> \> Y-indexed long, X/Y-indirect \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{ARR} \\
Function \> : \> $A\leftarrow((A)\&(M))>>>1$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> immediate \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{SAX} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow(A)\&(X)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> absolute long/short, Y-indexed short, \\
\> \> Y-indirect \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{ANE} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow((A)\&\$ee)|((X)\&(M))$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> immediate \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{SHA} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow(A)\&(X)\&(PCH+1)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> X/Y-indexed long \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{SHS} \\
Function \> : \> $X\leftarrow(A)\&(X), S\leftarrow(X), M\leftarrow(X)\&(PCH+1)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> Y-indexed long \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{SHY} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow(Y)\&(PCH+1)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> Y-indexed long \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{SHX} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow(X)\&(PCH+1)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> X-indexed long \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{LAX} \\
Function \> : \> $A,X\leftarrow(M)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> absolute long/short, Y-indexed long/short, \\
\> \> X/Y-indirect \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{LXA} \\
Function \> : \> $X{04}\leftarrow(X){04}\&(M){04}$, \\
\> \> $A{04}\leftarrow(A){04}\&(M){04}$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> immediate \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{LAE} \\
Function \> : \> $X,S,A\leftarrow((S)\&(M))$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> Y-indexed long \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{DCP} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow(M)-1, Flags\leftarrow((A)-(M))$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> absolute long/short, X-indexed long/short, \\
\> \> Y-indexed long, X/Y-indirect \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{SBX} \\
Function \> : \> $X\leftarrow((X)\&(A))-(M)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> immediate \\
\end{tabbing}
\begin{tabbing}
Addressing Modes \= : \= \kill
Instruction \> : \> \tty{ISB} \\
Function \> : \> $M\leftarrow(M)+1, A\leftarrow(A)-(M)-(C)$ \\
Addressing Modes \> : \> absolute long/short, X-indexed long/short, \\
\> \> Y-indexed long, X/Y-indirect \\
\end{tabbing}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{MELPS-740}
Microcontrollers of this family have a quite nice, however well-hidden
feature: If one sets bit 5 of the status register with the \tty{SET}
instruction, the accumulator will be replaced with the memory cell
addressed by the X register for all load/store and arithmetic
instructions. An attempt to integrate this feature cleanly into the
assembly syntax has not been made so far, so the only way to use it
is currently the ''hard'' way (\tty{SET}...instructions with accumulator
addressing...\tty{CLT}).
Not all MELPS-740 processors implement all instructions. This is a
place where the programmer has to watch out for himself that no
instructions are used that are unavailable for the targeted
processor; AS does not differentiate among the individual processors
of this family. For a description of the details regarding special
page addressing, see the discussion of the \tty{ASSUME} instruction.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{MELPS-7700/65816}
\label{MELPS7700Spec}
As it seems, these two processor families took disjunct development
paths, starting from the 6502 via their 8 bit predecessors. Shortly
listed, the following differences are present:
\begin{itemize}
\item{The 65816 does not have a B accumulator.}
\item{The 65816 does not have instructions to multiply or divide.}
\item{The 65816 misses the instructions \tty{SEB, CLB, BBC, BBS, CLM, SEM,
PSH, PUL} and \tty{LDM}. Instead, the instructions \tty{TSB, TRB, BIT, CLD,
SED, XBA, XCE} and \tty{STZ} take their places in the opcode table.}
\end{itemize}
The following instructions have identical function, yet different
names:
\par
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|c|c||c|c|}
\hline
65816 & MELPS-7700 & 65816 & MELPS-7700 \\
\hline
\hline
\tty{REP} & \tty{CLP} & \tty{PHK} & \tty{PHG} \\
\tty{TCS} & \tty{TAS} & \tty{TSC} & \tty{TSA} \\
\tty{TCD} & \tty{TAD} & \tty{TDC} & \tty{TDA} \\
\tty{PHB} & \tty{PHT} & \tty{PLB} & \tty{PLT} \\
\tty{WAI} & \tty{WIT} & & \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\par
Especially tricky are the instructions \tty{PHB, PLB} and \tty{TSB}: these
instructions have a totally different encoding and meaning on both
processors!
Unfortunately, these processors address their memory in a way that is
IMHO even one level higher on the open-ended chart of perversity than
the Intel-like segmentation: They do banking! Well, this seems to
be the price for the 6502 upward-compatibility; before one can use AS
to write code for these processors, one has to inform AS about the
contents of several registers (using the \tty{ASSUME} instruction):
The M flag rules whether the accumulators A and B should be used with
8 bits (1) or 16 bits (0) width. Analogously, the X flag decides the
width of the X and Y index registers. AS needs this information for
the decision about the argument's width when immediate addressing
(\verb!#<constant>!) occurs.
The memory is organized in 256 banks of 64 KBytes. As all registers
in the CPU core have a maximum width of 16 bits, the upper 8 bits
have to be fetched from 2 special bank registers: DT delivers the
upper 8 bits for data accesses, and PG extends the 16-bit program
counter to 24 bits. A 16 bits wide register DPR allows to move the
zero page known from the 6502 to an arbitrary location in the first
bank. If AS encounters an address (it is irrelevant if this address
is part of an absolute, indexed, or indirect expression), the
following addressing modes will be tested:
\begin{enumerate}
\item{Is the address in the range of DPR..DPR+\$ff? If yes, use direct
addressing with an 8-bit address.}
\item{Is the address contained in the page addressable via DT (resp.
PG for branch instructions)? If yes, use absolute addressing
with a 16-bit address.}
\item{If nothing else helps, use long addressing with a 24-bit
address.}
\end{enumerate}
As one can see from this enumeration, the knowledge about the current
values of DT, PG and DPR is essential for a correct operation of AS;
if the specifications are incorrect, the program will probably do
wrong addressing at runtime. This enumeration also implied that all
three address lengths are available; if this is not the case, the
decision chain will become shorter.
The automatic determination of the address length described above may
be overridden by the usage of prefixes. If one prefixes the address
by a $<$, $>$, or $>>$ without a separating space, an address with 1, 2, or
3 bytes of length will be used, regardless if this is the optimal
length. If one uses an address length that is either not allowed for
the current instruction or too short for the address, an error
message is the result.
To simplify porting of 6502 programs, AS uses the Motorola syntax for
hexadecimal constants instead of the Intel/IEEE syntax that is
the format preferred by Mitsubishi for their 740xxx series. I still
think that this is the better format, and it looks as if the
designers of the 65816 were of the same opinion (as the \tty{RELAXED}
instruction allows the alternative use of Intel notation, this
decision should not hurt anything). Another important detail for the
porting of programs is that it is valid to omit the accumulator A as
target for operations. For example, it is possible to simply write
\verb!LDA #0! instead of \verb!LDA A,#0!.
A real goodie in the instruction set are the instructions \tty{MVN} resp.
\tty{MVP} to do block transfers. However, their address specification
rules are a bit strange: bits 0--15 are stored in index registers,
bits 16--23 are part of the instruction. When one uses AS, one
simply specifies the full destination and source addresses. AS will
then automatically grab the correct bits. This is a fine yet
important difference Mitsubishi's assembler where you have to
extract the upper 8 bits on your own. Things become really
convenient when a macro like the following is used:
\begin{verbatim}
mvpos macro src,dest,len
if MomCPU=$7700
lda #len
elseif
lda #(len-1)
endif
ldx #(src&$ffff)
ldy #(dest&$ffff)
mvp dest,src
endm
\end{verbatim}
Caution, possible pitfall: if the accumulator contains the value n,
the Mitsubishi chip will transfer n bytes, but the 65816 will
transfer n+1 bytes!
The \tty{PSH} and \tty{PUL} instructions are also very handy because they
allow to save a user-defined set to be saved to the stack resp. to be
restored from the stack. According to the Mitsubishi data book
\cite{Mit16}, the bit mask has to be specified as an immediate operand, so
the programmer either has to keep all bit$\leftrightarrow$register
assignments in mind or he has to define some appropriate symbols. To make
things simpler, I decided to extend the syntax at this point: It is valid
to use a list as argument which may contain an arbitrary sequence of
register names or immediate expressions. Therefore, the following
instructions
\begin{verbatim}
psh #$0f
psh a,b,#$0c
psh a,b,x,y
\end{verbatim}
are equivalent. As immediate expressions are still valid, AS stays
upward compatible to the Mitsubishi assemblers.
One thing I did not fully understand while studying the Mitsubishi
assembler is the treatment of the \tty{PER} instruction: this instruction
allows to push a 16-bit variable onto the stack whose address is
specified relative to the program counter. Therefore, it is an
absolute addressing mode from the programmer's point of view.
Nevertheless, the Mitsubishi assembler requests immediate addressing,
and the instructions argument is placed into the code just as-is.
One has to calculate the address in his own, which is something
symbolic assemblers were designed for to avoid...as I wanted to stay
compatible, AS contains a compromise: If one chooses immediate
addressing (with a leading \# sign), AS will behave like the original
from Mitsubishi. But if the \# sign is omitted, as will calculate the
difference between the argument's value and the current program
counter and insert this difference instead.
A similar situation exists for the \tty{PEI} instruction that pushes the
contents of a 16-bit variable located in the zero page: Though the operand
represents an address, once again immediate addressing is required. In
this case, AS will simply allow both variants (i.e. with or without a \#
sign).
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{M16}
The M16 family is a family of highly complex CISC processors with an
equally complicated instruction set. One of the instruction set's
properties is the detail that in an instruction with two operands,
both operands may be of different sizes. The method of appending the
operand size as an attribute of the instruction (known from Motorola
and adopted from Mitsubishi) therefore had to be extended: it is
valid to append attributes to the operands themselves. For example,
the following instruction
\begin{verbatim}
mov r0.b,r6.w
\end{verbatim}
reads the lowest 8 bits of register 0, sign-extends them to 32 bits
and stores the result into register 6. However, as one does not need
this feature in 9 out of 10 cases, it is still valid to append the
operand size to the instruction itself, e.g.
\begin{verbatim}
mov.w r0,r6
\end{verbatim}
Both variants may be mixed; in such a case, an operand size appended
to an operand overrules the ''default''. An exception are instructions
with two operands. For these instructions, the default for the
source operand is the destination operand's size. For example, in
the following example
\begin{verbatim}
mov.h r0,r6.w
\end{verbatim}
register 0 is accessed with 32 bits, the size specification appended
to the instruction is not used at all. If an instruction does not
contain any size specifications, word size (\tty{w}) will be used.
Remember: in contrast to the 68000 family, this means 32 bits instead
of 16 bits!
The chained addressing modes are also rather complex; the ability of
AS to automatically assign address components to parts of the chain
keeps things at least halfway manageable. The only way of influencing
AS allows (the original assembler from Mitsubishi/Green Hills allows
a bit more in this respect) is the explicit setting of displacement
lengths by appending \tty{:4, :16} and \tty{:32}.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{4004}
Another part of history...unfortunately, I wasn't able up to now to get my
hands on official documentation for world's first microprocessor, and
there are some details lacking: I'm not absolutely sure about the syntax
for register pairs (for 8-bit operations). The current syntax is
\tty{RnRm} with \tty{n} resp. \tty{m} being even integers in the range from
0 to E resp. 1 to F. The equation {\tt m = n + 1} has to be true always.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{MCS-48}
The maximum address space of these processors is 4 Kbytes large. This
address space is not organized in a linear way (how could this be on an
Intel CPU...). Instead, it is split into 2 banks of 2 Kbytes. The only
way to change the program counter from one bank to the other are the
instructions \tty{CALL} and \tty{JMP}, by setting the most significant bit
of the address with the instructions \tty{SEL MB0} resp. \tty{SEL MB1}.
To simplify jumps between these two banks, the instructions \tty{JMP} and
\tty{CALL} contain an automatism that inserts one of these two instructions
if the current program counter and the target address are in
different banks. Explicit usage of these \tty{SEL MBx} instructions should
therefore not be necessary (though it is possible), and it can puzzle
the automatism, like in the following example:
\begin{verbatim}
000: SEL MB1
JMP 200h
\end{verbatim}
AS assumes that the MB flag is 0 and therefore does not insert a \tty{SEL
MBO} instruction, with the result that the CPU jumps to address
A00h.
Furthermore, one should keep in mind that a jump instruction might
become longer (3 instead of 2 bytes).
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{MCS-51}
The assembler is accompanied by the files \tty{STDDEF51.INC} resp.
\tty{80C50X.INC} that define all bits and SFRs of the processors 8051,
8052, and 80515 resp. 80C501, 502, and 504. Depending on the target
processor setting (made with the \tty{CPU} statement), the correct subset
will be included. Therefore, the correct order for the instructions
at the beginning of a program is
\begin{verbatim}
CPU <processor type>
INCLUDE stddef51.inc .
\end{verbatim}
Otherwise, the MCS-51 pseudo instructions will lead to error
messages.
As the 8051 does not have instructions to to push the registers 0..7
onto the stack, one has to work with absolute addresses. However,
these addresses depend on which register bank is currently active.
To make this situation a little bit better, the include files define
the macro \tty{USING} that accepts the symbols \tty{Bank0...Bank3} as arguments.
In response, the macro will assign the registers' correct absolute
addresses to the symbols \tty{AR0..AR7}. This macro should be used after
every change of the register banks. The macro itself does \bb{not}
generate any code to switch to the bank!
The macro also makes bookkeeping about which banks have been used.
The result is stored in the integer variable \tty{RegUsage}: bit 0
corresponds to bank 0, bit 1 corresponds to bank 1. and so on. To
output its contents after the source has been assembled, use
something like the following piece of code:
\begin{verbatim}
irp BANK,Bank0,Bank1,Bank2,Bank3
if (RegUsage&(2^BANK))<>0
message "bank \{BANK} has been used"
endif
endm
\end{verbatim}
The multipass feature introduced with version 1.38 allowed to introduce
the additional instructions \tty{JMP} and \tty{CALL}. If branches are
coded using these instructions, AS will automatically use the variant that
is optimal for the given target address. The options are \tty{SJMP,
AJMP}, or \tty{LJMP} for \tty{JMP} resp. \tty{ACALL} or \tty{LCALL} for
\tty{CALL}. Of course it is still possible to use these variants
directly, in case one wants to force a certain coding.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{MCS-251}
When designing the 80C251, Intel really tried to make the move to
the new family as smooth as possible for programmers. This
culminated in the fact that old applications can run on the new
processor without having to recompile them. However, as soon as one
wants to use the new features, some details have to be regarded which
may turn into hidden pitfalls.
The most important thing is the absence of a distinct address space
for bits on the 80C251. All SFRs can now be addressed bitwise,
regardless of their address. Furthermore, the first 128 bytes of the
internal RAM are also bit addressable. This has become possible
because bits are not any more handled by a separate address space
that overlaps other address spaces. Instead, similar to other
processors, bits are addressed with a two-dimensional address that
consists of the memory location containing the bit and the bit's
location in the byte. One result is that in an expression like
\tty{PSW.7}, AS will do the separation of address and bit position itself.
Unlike to the 8051, it is not any more necessary to explicitly
generate 8 bit symbols. This has the other result that the \tty{SFRB}
instruction does not exist any more. If it is used in a program that
shall be ported, it may be replaced with a simple \tty{SFR} instruction.
Furthermore, Intel cleaned up the cornucopia of different address
spaces on the 8051: the internal RAM (\tty{DATA} resp. \tty{IDATA}), the
\tty{XDATA} space and the former \tty{CODE} space were unified to a single
\tty{CODE} space that is now 16 Mbytes large. The internal RAM starts at
address 0, the internal ROM starts at address ff0000h, which is the
address code has to be relocated to. In contrast, the SFRs were moved to
a separate address space (which AS refers to as the \tty{IO} segment).
However, they have the same addresses in this new address space as they
used to have on the 8051. The \tty{SFR} instructions knows of this
difference and automatically assigns symbols to either the \tty{DATA} or
\tty{IO} segment, depending on the target processor. As there is no
\tty{BIT} segment any more, the \tty{BIT} instruction operates completely
different: Instead of a linear address ranging from 0..255, a bit symbol
now contains the byte's address in bit 0..7, and the bit position in bits
24..26. Unfortunately, creating arrays of flags with a symbolic address
is not that simple any more: On an 8051, one simply wrote:
\begin{verbatim}
segment bitdata
bit1 db ?
bit2 db ?
or
defbit macro name
name bit cnt
cnt set cnt+1
endm
\end{verbatim}
On a 251, only the second way still works, like this:
\begin{verbatim}
adr set 20h ; start address of flags
bpos set 0 ; in the internal RAM
defbit macro name
name bit adr.bpos
bpos set bpos+1
if bpos=8
bpos set 0
adr set adr+1
endif
endm
\end{verbatim}
Another small detail: Intel now prefers \tty{CY} instead of \tty{C} as a
symbolic name for the carry, so you might have to rename an already
existing variable of the same name in your program. However, AS will
continue to understand also the old variant when using the instructions
\tty{CLR, CPL, SETB, MOV, ANL,} or \tty{ORL}. The same is conceptually
true for the additional registers \tty{R8..R15, WR0..WR30, DR0..DR28, DR56,
DR60, DPX,} and \tty{SPX}.
Intel would like everyone to write absolute addresses in a syntax of
\tty{XX:YYYY}, where \tty{XX} is a 64K bank in the address space resp.
signifies addresses in the I/O space with an \tty{S}. As one might guess,
I am not amused about this, which is why it is legal to alternitavely use
linear addresses in all places. Only the \tty{S} for I/O addresses is
incircumventable, like in this case:
\begin{verbatim}
Carry bit s:0d0h.7
\end{verbatim}
Without the prefix, AS would assume an address in the \tty{CODE} segment,
and only the first 128 bits in this space are bit-addressable...
Like for the 8051, the generic branch instructions \tty{CALL} and
\tty{JMP} exist that automatically choose the shortest machine code
depending on the address layout. However, while \tty{JMP} also may use
the variant with a 24-bit address, \tty{CALL} will not do this for a good
reason: In contrast to \tty{ACALL} and \tty{LCALL}, \tty{ECALL} places an
additional byte onto the stack. A \tty{CALL} instruction would result where
you would not know what it will do. This problem does not exist for the
\tty{JMP} instructions.
There is one thing I did not understand: The 80251 is also able to
push immediate operands onto the stack, and it may push either single
bytes or complete words. However, the same mnemonic (\tty{PUSH}) is
assigned to both variants - how on earth should an assembler know if
an instruction like
\begin{verbatim}
push #10
\end{verbatim}
shall push a byte or a word containing the value 10? So the current
rule is that \tty{PUSH} always pushes a byte; if one wants to push a word,
simply use \tty{PUSHW} instead of \tty{PUSH}.
Another well-meant advise: If you use the extended instruction set,
be sure to operate the processor in source mode; otherwise, all
instructions will become one byte longer! The old 8051 instructions
that will in turn become one byte longer are not a big matter: AS
will either replace them automatically with new, more general
instructions or they deal with obsolete addressing modes (indirect
addressing via 8 bit registers).
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{8086..V35}
Actually, I had sworn myself to keep the segment disease of Intel's
8086 out of the assembler. However, as there was a request and as
students are more flexible than the developers of this processor
obviously were, there is now a rudimentary support of these
processors in AS. When saying, 'rudimentary', it does not mean that
the instruction set is not fully covered. It means that the whole
pseudo instruction stuff that is available when using MASM, TASM, or
something equivalent does not exist. To put it in clear words, AS
was not primarily designed to write assembler programs for PC's
(heaven forbid, this really would have meant reinventing the wheel!);
instead, the development of programs for single-board computers was
the main goal (which may also be equipped with an 8086 CPU).
For die-hards who still want to write DOS programs with AS, here is a
small list of things to keep in mind:
\begin{itemize}
\item{Only \tty{COM} files may be created.}
\item{Only use the \tty{CODE} segment, and place also all variables in
this segment.}
\item{DOS initializes all segment registers to the code segment.
An \tty{ASSUME DS:DATA, SS:DATA} right at the program's beginning
is therefore necessary.}
\item{DOS loads the code to a start address of 100h. An \tty{ORG} to this
address is absolutely necessary.}
\item{The conversion to a binary file is done with P2BIN (see later in
this document), with an address filter of \tty{\$-\$}.}
\end{itemize}
For these processors, AS only supports a small programming model, i.e.
there is \bb{one} code segment with a maximum of 64 Kbytes and a data
segment of equal size for data (which cannot be set to initial values for
\tty{COM} files). The \tty{SEGMENT} instruction allows to switch between
these two segments. From this facts results that branches are always
intrasegment branches if they refer to targets in this single code
segment. In case that far jumps should be necessary, they are possible
via \tty{CALLF} or \tty{JMPF} with a memory address or a
\tty{Segment:Offset} value as argument.
Another big problem of these processors is their assembler syntax,
which is sometimes ambiguous and whose exact meaning can then only be
deduced by looking at the current context. In the following example,
either absolute or immediate addressing may be meant, depending on
the symbol's type:
\begin{verbatim}
mov ax,value
\end{verbatim}
When using AS, an expression without brackets always is interpreted
as immediate addressing. For example, when either a variable's
address or its contents shall be loaded, the differences listed in table
\ref{TabMASM} are present between MASM and AS:
\begin{table*}
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
\hline
assembler & address & contents \\
\hline
\hline
MASM & \tty{mov ax,offset vari} & \tty{mov ax,vari} \\
& \tty{lea ax,vari} & \tty{mov ax,[vari]} \\
& \tty{lea ax,[vari]} & \\
& & \\
AS & \tty{mov ax,vari} & \tty{mov ax,[vari]} \\
& \tty{lea ax,[vari]} & \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Differences AS$\leftrightarrow$MASM Concerning Addressing
Syntax\label{TabMASM}}
\end{table*}
\par
When addressing via a symbol, the assembler checks whether they are
assigned to the data segment and tries to automatically insert an
appropriate segment prefix. This happens for example when symbols
from the code segment are accessed without specifying a \tty{CS} segment
prefix. However, this mechanism can only work if the \tty{ASSUME}
instruction (see there) has previously been applied correctly.
The Intel syntax also requires to store whether bytes or words were
stored at a symbol's address. AS will do this only when the \tty{DB} resp.
\tty{DW} instruction is in the same source line as the label. For any
other case, the operand size has to be specified explicitly with the
\tty{BYTE PTR, WORD PTR,...} operators. As long as a register is the other
operator, this may be omitted, as the operand size is then clearly
given by the register's name.
In an 8086-based system, the coprocessor is usually synchronized via
via the processor's TEST input line which is connected to toe
coprocessor's BUSY output line. AS supports this type of handshaking
by automatically inserting a \tty{WAIT} instruction prior to every 8087
instruction. If this is undesired for any reason, an \tty{N} has to be
inserted after the \tty{F} in the mnemonic; for example,
\begin{verbatim}
FINIT
FSTSW [vari]
\end{verbatim}
becomes
\begin{verbatim}
FNINIT
FNSTSW [vari]
\end{verbatim}
This variant is valid for \bb{all} coprocessor instructions.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{8X30x}
\label{8X30xSpec}
The processors of this family have been optimized for an easy manipulation
of bit groups at peripheral addresses. The instructions \tty{LIV} and
\tty{RIV} were introduced to deal with such objects in a symbolic fashion.
They work similar to \tty{EQU}, however they need three parameters:
\begin{enumerate}
\item{the address of the peripheral memory cell that contains the bit
group (0..255);}
\item{the number of the group's first bit (0..7);}
\item{the length of the group, expressed in bits (1..8).}
\end{enumerate}
\bb{CAUTION!} The 8X30x does not support bit groups that span over more
than one memory address. Therefore, the valid value range for the
length can be stricter limited, depending on the start position. AS
does \bb{not} perform any checks at this point, you simply get strange
results at runtime!
Regarding the machine code, length and position are expressed vis a 3
bit field in the instruction word and a proper register number (\tty{LIVx}
resp. \tty{RIVx}). If one uses a symbolic object, AS will automatically
assign correct values to this field, but it is also allowed to
specify the length explicitly as a third operand if one does not work
with symbolic objects. If AS finds such a length specification in
spite of a symbolic operand, it will compare both lengths and issue
an error if they do not match (the same will happen for the MOVE
instruction if two symbolic operands with different lengths are used
- the instruction simply only has a single length field...).
Apart from the real machine instructions, AS defines similarly to its
''idol'' MCCAP some pseudo instructions that are implemented as builtin
macros:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{NOP} is a shortform for \tty{MOVE AUX,AUX}}
\item{\tty{HALT} is a shortform for \tty{JMP \verb!*!}}
\item{\tty{XML ii} is a shortform for \tty{XMIT ii,R12} (only 8X305)}
\item{\tty{XMR ii} is a shortform for \tty{XMIT ii,R13} (only 8X305)}
\item{\tty{SEL $<$busobj$>$} is a shortform for \tty{XMIT $<$adr$>$,IVL/IVR},
i.e. it performs the necessary preselection to access $<$busobj$>$.}
\end{itemize}
The \tty{CALL} and \tty{RTN} instructions MCCAP also implements are
currently missing due to sufficient documentation. The same is true for a
set of pseudo instructions to store constants to memory. Time may change
this...
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{XA}
Similar to its predecessor MCS/51, but in contrast to its
'competitor' MCS/251, the Philips XA has a separate address space for
bits, i.e. all bits that are accessible via bit instructions have a
certain, one-dimensional address which is stored as-is in the machine
code. However, I could not take the obvious opportunity to offer
this third address space (code and data are the other two) as a
separate segment. The reason is that - in contrast to the MCS/51 -
some bit addresses are ambiguous: bits with an address from 256 to 511
refer to the bits of memory cells 20h..3fh in the current data
segment. This means that these addresses may correspond to different
physical bits, depending on the current state. Defining bits with
the help of \tty{DC} instructions - something that would be possible with a
separate segment - would not make too much sense. However, the \tty{BIT}
instruction still exists to define individual bits (regardless if
they are located in a register, the RAM or SFR space) that can then
be referenced symbolically. If the bit is located in RAM, the
address of the 64K-bank is also stored. This way, AS can check
whether the DS register has previously be assigned a correct value
with an \tty{ASSUME} instruction.
In contrast, nothing can stop AS's efforts to align potential branch
targets to even addresses. Like other XA assemblers, AS does this by
inserting \tty{NOP}s right before the instruction in question.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{AVR}
In contrast to the AVR assembler, AS by default uses the Intel format
to write hexadecimal contants instead of the C syntax. All right, I
did not look into the (free) AVR assembler before, but when I started
with the AVR part, there was hardly mor einformation about the AVR
than a preliminary manual describing processor types that were never
sold...this problem can be solved with a simple RELAXED ON.
Optionally, AS can generate so-called "object files" for the AVRs (it
also works for other CPUs, but it does not make any sense for them...).
These are files containing code and source line info what e.g. allows
a step-by-step execution on source level with the WAVRSIM simulator
delivered by Atmel. Unfortunately, the simulator seems to have
trouble with source file names longer than approx. 20 characters:
Names are truncated and/or extended by strange special characters
when the maximum length is exceeded. AS therefore stores file name
specifications in object files without a path specification.
Therefore, problems may arise when files like includes are not in the
current directory.
A small specialty are machine instructions that have already been defined
by Atmel as part of the architecture, but up to now haven't been
implemented in any of the family's members. The instructions in question
are {\tt MUL, JMP,} and {\tt CALL}. Considering the latter ones, one may
ask himself how to reach the 4 Kwords large address space of the AT90S8515
when the 'next best' instructions {\tt RJMP} and {\tt RCALL} can only
branch up to 2 Kwords forward or backward. The trick is named 'discarding
the upper address bits' and described in detail with the {\tt WRAPMODE}
statement.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Z80UNDOC}
As one might guess, Zilog did not make any syntax definitions for the
undocumented instructions; furthermore, not everyone might know the
full set. It might therefore make sense to list all instructions at
this place:
Similar to a Z380, it is possible to access the byte halves of IX and
IY separately. In detail, these are the instructions that allow
this:
\begin{verbatim}
INC Rx LD R,Rx LD Rx,n
DEC Rx LD Rx,R LD Rx,Ry
ADD/ADC/SUB/SBC/AND/XOR/OR/CP A,Rx
\end{verbatim}
\tty{Rx} and \tty{Ry} are synonyms for \tty{IXL, IXU, IYL} or \tty{IYU}.
Keep however in mind that in the case of \tty{LD Rx,Ry}, both registers
must be part of the same index register.
The coding of shift instructions leaves an undefined bit combination which
is now accessible as the \tty{SLIA} instruction. \tty{SLIA} works like
\tty{SLA} with the difference of entering a 1 into bit position 0. Like
all other shift instructions, \tty{SLIA} also allows another undocumented
variant:
\begin{verbatim}
SLIA R,(XY+d)
\end{verbatim}
In this case, \tty{R} is an arbitrary 8-bit register (excluding index
register halves...), and \tty{(XY+d)} is a normal indexed address. This
operation has the additional effect of copying the result into the
register. This also works for the \tty{RES} and \tty{SET} instructions:
\begin{verbatim}
SET/RES R,n,(XY+d)
\end{verbatim}
Furthermore, two hidden I/O instructions exist:
\begin{verbatim}
IN (C) resp. TSTI
OUT (C),0
\end{verbatim}
Their operation should be clear. \bb{CAUTION!} Noone can
guarantee that all mask revisions of the Z80 execute these
instructions, and the Z80's successors will react with traps if they
find one of these instructions. Use them on your own risk...
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Z380}
As this processor was designed as a grandchild of the still most popular
8-bit microprocessor, it was a sine-qua-non design target to execute
existing Z80 programs without modification (of course, they execute a bit
faster, roughly by a factor of 10...). Therefore, all extended features
can be enabled after a reset by setting two bits which are named XM
(eXtended Mode, i.e. a 32-bit instead of a 16-bit address space)
respectively LW (long word mode, i.e. 32-bit instead of 16-bit operands).
One has to inform AS about their current setting with the instructions
\tty{EXTMODE} resp. \tty{LWORDMODE}, to enable AS to check addresses and
constants against the correct upper limits. The toggle between 32- and
16-bit instruction of course only influences instructions that are
available in a 32-bit variant. Unfortunately, the Z380 currently offers
such variants only for load and store instructions; arithmetic can only be
done in 16 bits. Zilog really should do something about this, otherwise
the most positive description for the Z380 would be ''16-bit processor
with 32-bit extensions''...
The whole thing becomes complicated by the ability to override the operand
size set by LW with the instruction prefixes \tty{DDIR W} resp.
\tty{DDIR LW}. AS will note the occurrence of such instructions and will
toggle setting for the instruction following directly. By the way, one
should never explicitly use other \tty{DDIR} variants than \tty{W} resp.
\tty{LW}, as AS will introduce them automatically when an operand is
discovered that is too long. Explicit usage might puzzle AS. The
automatism is so powerful that in a case like this:
\begin{verbatim}
DDIR LW
LD BC,12345678h ,
\end{verbatim}
the necessary \tty{IW} prefix will automatically be merged into the previous
instruction, resulting in
\begin{verbatim}
DDIR LW,IW
LD BC,12345668h .
\end{verbatim}
The machine code that was first created for \tty{DDIR LW} is retracted and
replaced, which is signified with an \tty{R} in the listing.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TLCS-900(L)}
\label{TLCS900Spec}
These processors may run in two operating modes: on the one hand, in
minimum mode, which offers almost complete source code compatibility
to the Z80 and TLCS-90, and on the other hand in maximum mode, which
is necessary to make full use of the processor's capabilities. The
main differences between these two modes are:
\begin{itemize}
\item{width of the registers WA, BC, DE, and HL: 16 or 32 bits;}
\item{number of register banks: 8 or 4;}
\item{code address space: 64 Kbytes or 16 Mbytes;}
\item{length of return addresses: 16 or 32 bits.}
\end{itemize}
To allow AS to check against the correct limits, one has to inform him
about the current execution mode via the \tty{MAXMODE} instruction (see
there). The default is the minimum mode.
From this follows that, depending on the operating mode, the 16-bit
resp. 32-bit versions of the bank registers have to be used for
addressing, i.e. WA, BC, DE and HL for the minimum mode resp. XWA,
XBC, XDE and XHL for the maximum mode. The registers XIX..XIZ and
XSP are \bb{always} 32 bits wide and therefore always have to to be used
in this form for addressing; in this detail, existing Z80 code
definitely has to be adapted (not including that there is no I/O
space and all I/O registers are memory-mapped...).
The syntax chosen by Toshiba is a bit unfortunate in the respect of
choosing an single quote (') to reference the previous register bank. The
processor independent parts of AS already use this character to mark
character constants. In an instruction like
\begin{verbatim}
ld wa',wa ,
\end{verbatim}
AS will not recognize the comma for parameter separation. This
problem can be circumvented by usage of an inverse single quote (`), for
example
\begin{verbatim}
ld wa`,wa
\end{verbatim}
Toshiba delivers an own assembler for the TLCS-900 series (TAS900),
which is different from AS in the following points:
\subsubsection{Symbol Conventions}
\begin{itemize}
\item{TAS900 differentiates symbol names only on the first 32
characters. In contrast, AS always stores symbol names with the
full length (up to 255 characters) and uses them all for
differentiation.}
\item{TAS900 allows to write integer constants either in Intel or C
notation (with a 0 prefix for octal or a 0x prefix for hexadecimal
constants). By default, AS only supports the Intel notation.
With the help of the \tty{RELAXED} instruction, one also gets the C
notation (among other).}
\item{AS does not distinguish between upper and lower case. In
contrast, TAS900 differentiates between upper- and lowercase
letters in symbol names. One needs to engage the \tty{-u} command
line option to force AS to do this.}
\end{itemize}
\subsubsection{Syntax}
For many instructions, the syntax checking of AS is less strict than
the checking of TAS900. In some (rare) cases, the syntax is slightly
different. These extensions and changes are on the one hand for the
sake of a better portability of existing Z80 codes, on the other hand
they provide a simplification and better orthogonality of the
assembly syntax:
\begin{itemize}
\item{In the case of \tty{LDA, JP}, and \tty{CALL}, TAS requires that address
expressions like \tty{XIX+5} must not be placed in parentheses, as it
is usually the case. For the sake of better orthogonality, AS
requires parentheses for \tty{LDA}. They are optional if \tty{JP} resp.
\tty{CALL} are used with a simple, absolute address.}
\item{In the case of \tty{JP, CALL, JR}, and \tty{SCC}, AS leaves the choice to the
programmer whether to explicitly write out the default condition
\tty{T} (= true) as first parameter or not. TAS900 in contrast only
allows to use the default condition implicitly (e.g. \tty{jp (xix+5)}
instead of \tty{jp t,(xix+5))}.}
\item{For the \tty{EX} instruction, AS allows operand combinations which are
not listed in \cite{Tosh900} but can be reduced to a standard
combination by swapping the operands. Combinations like \tty{EX f`,f}
or \tty{EX wa,(xhl)} become possible. In contrast, TAS900 limits to
the 'pure' combinations.}
\item{AS allows to omit an increment resp. decrement of 1 when using the
instructions \tty{INC} and \tty{DEC}. TAS900 instead forces the programmer to
explicit usage of '1'.}
\item{The similar is true for the shift instructions: If the operand is
a register, TAS900 requires that even a shift count of 1 has to
be written explicitly; however, when the operand is in memory,
the hardware limits the shift count to 1 which must not be written
in this case. With AS, a shift count of 1 is always optional and
valid for all types of operands.}
\end{itemize}
\subsubsection{Macro Processor}
The macro processor of TAS900 is an external program that operates
like a preprocessor. It consists of two components: The first one is
a C-like preprocessor, and the second one is a special macro language
(MPL) that reminds of high level languages. The macro processor of
AS instead is oriented towards ''classic'' macro assemblers like MASM
or M80 (both programs from Microsoft). It is a fixed component of
AS.
\subsubsection{Output Format}
TAS900 generates relocatable code that allows to link separately
compiled programs to a single application. AS instead generates
absolute machine code that is not linkable. There are currently no
plans to extend AS in this respect.
\subsubsection{Pseudo Instructions}
Due to the missing linker, AS lacks a couple of pseudo instructions
needed for relocatable code TAS900 implements. The following
instructions are available with equal meaning:
\begin{quote}\tt
EQU, DB, DW, ORG, ALIGN, END, TITLE, SAVE, RESTORE
\rm\end{quote}
The latter two have an extended functionality for AS. Some TAS900
pseudo instructions can be replaced with equivalent AS instructions (see
table \ref{TabTAS900}).
\par
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
\hline
TAS900 & AS & meaning/function \\
\hline
\hline
\tty{DL} $<$Data$>$ & \tty{DD} $<$Data$>$ & define longword constants \\
\hline
\tty{DSB} $<$number$>$ & \tty{DB} $<$number$>$ \tty{DUP} (?) & reserve bytes of memory \\
\hline
\tty{DSW} $<$number$>$ & \tty{DW} $<$number$>$ \tty{DUP} (?) & reserve words of memory \\
\hline
\tty{DSD} $<$number$>$ & \tty{DD} $<$number$>$ \tty{DUP} (?) & reserve longwords of memory \\
\hline
\tty{\$MIN[IMUM]} & \tty{MAXMODE OFF} & following code runs \\
& & in minimum mode \\
\hline
\tty{\$MAX[IMUM]} & \tty{MAXMODE ON} & following code runs \\
& & in maximum mode \\
\hline
\tty{\$SYS[TEM]} & \tty{SUPMODE ON} & following code runs \\
& & in system mode \\
\hline
\tty{\$NOR[MAL]} & \tty{SUPMODE OFF} & following code runs \\
& & in user mode \\
\hline
\tty{\$NOLIST} & \tty{LISTING OFF} & turn off assembly listing \\
\hline
\tty{\$LIST} & \tty{LISTING ON} & turn on assembly listing \\
\hline
\tty{\$EJECT} & \tty{NEWPAGE} & start new page in listing \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{equivalent instructions TAS900$\leftrightarrow$AS\label{TabTAS900}}
\end{table*}
Toshiba manufactures two versions of the processor core, with the L
version being an ''economy version''. AS will make the following
differences between TLCS-900 and TLCS-900L:
\begin{itemize}
\item{The instructions \tty{MAX} and \tty{NORMAL} are not allowed for the L version;
the \tty{MIN} instruction is disabled for the full version.}
\item{The L version does not know the normal stack pointer XNSP/NSP, but
instead has the interrupt nesting register INTNEST.}
\end{itemize}
The instructions \tty{SUPMODE} and \tty{MAXMODE} are not influenced, just as
their initial setting \tty{OFF}. The programmer has to take care of the
fact that the L version starts in maximum mode and does not have a
normal mode. However, AS shows a bit of mercy against the L variant
by suppressing warnings for privileged instructions.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TLCS-90}
Maybe some people might ask themselves if I mixed up the order a
little bit, as Toshiba first released the TLCS-90 as an extended Z80
and afterwards the 16-bit version TLCS-900. Well, I discovered the
'90 via the '900 (thank you Oliver!). The two families are quite
similar, not only regarding their syntax but also in their
architecture. The hints for the '90 are therefore a subset of of the
chapter for the '900: As the '90 only allows shifts, increments, and
decrements by one, the count need not and must not be written as the
first argument. Once again, Toshiba wants to omit parentheses for
memory operands of \tty{LDA, JP, and CALL}, and once again AS requires them
for the sake of orthogonality (the exact reason is of course that
this way, I saved an extra in the address parser, but one does not
say such a thing aloud).
Principally, the TLCS-90 series already has an address space of 1
Mbyte which is however only accessible as data space via the index
registers. AS therefore does not regard the bank registers and
limits the address space to 64 Kbytes. This should not limit too
much as this area above is anyway only reachable via indirect
addressing.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TLCS-870}
Once again Toshiba...a company quite productive at the moment!
Especially this branch of the family (all Toshiba microcontrollers
are quite similar in their binary coding and programming model) seems
to be targeted towards the 8051 market: the method of separating the
bit position from the address expression with a dot had its root in
the 8051. However, it creates now exactly the sort of problems I
anticipated when working on the 8051 part: On the one hand, the dot
is a legal part of symbol names, but on the other hand, it is part of
the address syntax. This means that AS has to separate address and
bit position and must process them independently. Currently, I
solved this conflict by seeking the dot starting at the \bb{end} of the
expression. This way, the last dot is regarded as the separator, and
further dots stay parts of the address. I continue to urge everyone
to omit dots in symbol names, they will lead to ambiguities:
\begin{verbatim}
LD CF,A.7 ; accumulator bit 7 to carry
LD C,A.7 ; constant 'A.7' to accumulator
\end{verbatim}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TLCS-47}
This family of 4-bit microcontrollers should mark the low end of what
is supportable by AS. Apart from the \tty{ASSUME} instruction for the data
bank register (see there), there is only one thing that is worth
mentioning: In the data and I/O segment, nibbles are reserved instead
of byte (it's a 4-bitter...). The situation is similar to the bit
data segment of the 8051, where a \tty{DB} reserves a single bit, with the
difference that we are dealing with nibbles.
Toshiba defined an ''extended instruction set'' for this processor
family to facilitate the work with their limited instruction set. In
the case of AS, it is defined in the include file \tty{STDDEF47.INC}.
However, some instructions that could not be realized as macros are
''builtins'' and are therefore also available without the include file:
\begin{itemize}
\item{the \tty{B} instruction that automatically chooses the optimal version
of the jump instruction (\tty{BSS; BS}, or \tty{BSL});}
\item{\tty{LD} in the variant of \tty{HL} with an immediate operand;}
\item{\tty{ROLC} and \tty{RORC} with a shift amplitude higher than one.}
\end{itemize}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TLCS-9000}
This is the first time that I implemented a processor for AS which
was not available at that point of time. Unfortunately, Toshiba
decided to put this processor ''on ice'', so we won't see any silicon
in the near future. This has of course the result that this part
\begin{enumerate}
\item{is a ''paper design'', i.e. there was so far no chance to test
it in the reality and}
\item{the documentation for the '9000 I could get hold of \cite{Tosh9000}
were preliminary, so they could not deliver clarity on every
detail.}
\end{enumerate}
Therefore, errors in this code generator are quite possible (and will
of course be fixed if it should ever become possible!). At least the
few examples listed in \cite{Tosh9000} are assembled correctly.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{29xxx}
As it was already described in the discussion of the \tty{ASSUME}
instruction, AS can use the information about the current setting of
the RBP register to detect accesses to privileged registers in user
mode. This ability is of course limited to direct accesses (i.e.
without using the registers IPA...IPC), and there is one more
pitfall: as local registers (registers with a number $>$127) are
addressed relative to the stack pointer, but the bits in RBP always
refer to absolute numbers, the check is NOT done for local registers.
An extension would require AS to know always the absolute value of
SP, which would at least fail for recursive subroutines...
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{80C16x}
As it was already explained in the discussion of the \tty{ASSUME}
instruction, AS tries to hide the fact that the processor has more
physical than logical RAM as far as possible. Please keep in mind
that the DPP registers are valid only for data accesses and only
have an influence on absolute addressing, neither on indirect nor on indexed
addresses. AS cannot know which value the computed address may take
at runtime...
The paging unit unfortunately does not operate for code accesses so
one has to work with explicit long or short \tty{CALL}s, \tty{JMP}s, or
\tty{RET}s. At least for the ''universal'' instructions \tty{CALL} and
\tty{JMP}, AS will automatically use the shortest variant, but at least for the RET one
should know where the call came from. \tty{JMPS} and \tty{CALLS} principally
require to write segment and address separately, but AS is written in
a way that it can split an address on its own, e.g. one can write
\begin{verbatim}
jmps 12345h
\end{verbatim}
instead of
\begin{verbatim}
jmps 1,2345h
\end{verbatim}
Unfortunately, not all details of the chip's internal instruction
pipeline are hidden: if CP (register bank address), SP (stack), or
one of the paging registers are modified, their value is not
available for the instruction immediately following. AS tries to
detect such situations and will issue a warning in such cases. Once
again, this mechanism only works for direct accesses.
Bits defined with the \tty{BIT} instruction are internally stored as a
12-bit word, containing the address in bits 4..11 and the bit
position in the four LSBs. This order allows to refer the next resp.
previous bit by incrementing or decrementing the address. This will
however not work for explicit bit specifications when a word boundary
is crossed. For example, the following expression will result in a
range check error:
\begin{verbatim}
bclr r5.15+1
\end{verbatim}
We need a \tty{BIT} in this situation:
\begin{verbatim}
msb bit r5.15
.
.
bclr msb+1
\end{verbatim}
The SFR area was doubled for the 80C167/165/163: bit 12 flags that a bit
lies in the second part. Siemens unfortunately did not foresee that
256 SFRs (128 of them bit addressable) would not suffice for
successors of the 80C166. As a result, it would be impossible to
reach the second SFR area from F000H..F1DFH with short addresses or
bit instructions if the developers had not included a toggle
instruction:
\begin{verbatim}
EXTR #n
\end{verbatim}
This instruction has the effect that for the next \tty{n} instructions
($0<n<5$), it is possible to address the alternate SFR space instead of
the normal one. AS does not only generate the appropriate machine
code when it encounters this instruction. It also sets an internal
flag that will only allow accesses to the alternate SFR space for
the next \tty{n} instructions. Of course, they may not contain jumps...
Of course, it is always possible to define bits from either area at
any place, and it is always possible to reach all registers with
absolute addresses. In contrast, short and bit addressing only works
for one area at a time, attempts contradicting to this will result in
an error message.
The situation is similar for prefix instructions and absolute resp.
indirect addressing: as the prefix argument and the address
expression cannot always be evaluated at assembly time, chances for
checking are limited and AS will limit itself to warnings...in
detail, the situation is as follows:
\begin{itemize}
\item{fixed specification of a 64K bank with \tty{EXTS} or \tty{EXTSR}: the address
expression directly contains the lower 16 bits of the target
address. If the prefix and the following instruction have a
constant operand, AS will check if the the prefix argument and bits
16..23 of the target address are equal.}
\item{fixed specification of a 16K page with \tty{EXTP} or \tty{EXTPR}: the address
expression directly contains the lower 14 bits of the target
address. Bits 14 and 15 are fixed to 0, as the processor ignores
them in this mode. If the prefix and the following instruction
have a constant operand, AS will check if the the prefix argument
and bits 14..23 of the target address are equal.}
\end{itemize}
An example to clarify things a bit (the DPP registers have their
reset values):
\begin{verbatim}
extp #7,#1 ; range from 112K..128K
mov r0,1cdefh ; results in address 0defh in code
mov r0,1cdefh ; -->warning
exts #1,#1 ; range from 64K..128K
mov r0,1cdefh ; results in address 0cdefh in code
mov r0,1cdefh ; -->warning
\end{verbatim}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{PIC16C5x/16C8x}
Similar to the MCS-48 family, the PICs split their program memory
into several banks because the opcode does not offer enough space for
a complete address. AS uses the same automatism for the instructions
\tty{CALL} and \tty{GOTO}, i.e. the PA bits in the status word are set according
to the start and target address. However, this procedure is far more
problematic compared to the 48's:
\begin{enumerate}
\item{The instructions are not any more one word long (up to three
words). Therefore, it is not guaranteed that they can be
skipped with a conditional branch.}
\item{It is possible that the program counter crosses a page boundary
while the program sequence is executed. The setting of PA bits
AS assumes may be different from reality.}
\end{enumerate}
The instructions that operate on register W and another register
normally require a second parameter that specifies whether the result
shall be stored in W or the register. Under AS, it is valid to omit
the second parameter. The assumed target then depends upon the
operation's type: For unary operations, the result is by default
stored back into the register. These instructions are:
\begin{quote}{\tt
COMF, DECF, DECFSZ, INCF, INCFSZ, RLF, RRF, and SWAPF
}\end{quote}
The other operations by default regard W as an accumulator:
\begin{quote}{\tt
ADDWF, ANDWF, IORWF, MOVF, SUBWF, and XORWF
}\end{quote}
The syntax defined by Microchip to write literals is quite obscure
and reminds of the syntax used on IBM 360/370 systems (greetings from
the stone-age...). To avoid introducing another branch into the
parser, with AS one has to write constants in the Motorola syntax
(optionally Intel or C in \tty{RELAXED} mode).
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{PIC 17C4x}
With two exceptions, the same hints are valid as for its two smaller
brothers: the corresponding include file only contains register
definitions, and the problems concerning jump instructions are much
smaller. The only exception is the \tty{LCALL} instruction, which allows a
jump with a 16-bit address. It is translated with the following
''macro'':
\begin{verbatim}
MOVLW <addr15..8>
MOWF 3
LCALL <addr0..7>
\end{verbatim}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{ST6}
These processors have the ability to map their code ROM pagewise into the
data area. I am not keen on repeating the whole discussion of the
\tty{ASSUME} instruction at this place, so I refer to the corresponding
section (\ref{ST6Assume}) for an explanation how to read constants out of
the code ROM without too much headache.
Some builtin ''macros'' show up when one analyzes the instruction set a
bit more in detail. The instructions I found are listed in table
\ref{TabHid62} (there are probably even more...):
\par
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
instruction & in reality \\
\hline
\hline
\tty{CLR A} & \tty{SUB A,A} \\
\tty{SLA A} & \tty{ADD A,A} \\
\tty{CLR addr} & \tty{LDI addr,0} \\
\tty{NOP} & \tty{JRZ PC+1} \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Hidden Macros in the ST62's Instruction Set\label{TabHid62}}
\end{table*}
Especially the last case is a bit astonishing...unfortunately, some
instructions are really missing. For example, there is an \tty{AND}
instruction but no \tty{OR}...not to speak of an \tty{XOR}. For this reason, the
include file \tty{STDDEF62.INC} contains also some helping macros
(additionally to register definitions).
The original assembler AST6 delivered by SGS-Thomson partially uses
different pseudo instructions than AS. Apart from the fact that AS
does not mark pseudo instructions with a leading dot, the following
instructions are identical:
\begin{verbatim}
ASCII, ASCIZ, BLOCK, BYTE, END, ENDM, EQU, ERROR, MACRO,
ORG, TITLE, WARNING
\end{verbatim}
Table \ref{TabAST6} shows the instructions which have AS counterparts
with similar function.
\par
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
\hline
AST6 & AS & meaning/function \\
\hline
\hline
\tty{.DISPLAY} & \tty{MESSAGE} & output message \\
\hline
\tty{.EJECT} & \tty{NEWPAGE} & new page in assembly listing \\
\hline
\tty{.ELSE} & \tty{ELSEIF} & conditional assembly \\
\hline
\tty{.ENDC} & \tty{ENDIF} & conditional assembly \\
\hline
\tty{.IFC} & \tty{IF...} & conditional assembly \\
\hline
\tty{.INPUT} & \tty{INCLUDE} & insert include file \\
\hline
\tty{.LIST} & \tty{LISTING, MACEXP} & settings for listing \\
\hline
\tty{.PL} & \tty{PAGE} & page length of listing \\
\hline
\tty{.ROMSIZE} & \tty{CPU} & set target processor \\
\hline
\tty{.VERS} & \tty{VERSION} (symbol) & query version \\
\hline
\tty{.SET} & \tty{EVAL} & redefine variables \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Equivalent Instructions AST6$\leftrightarrow$AS\label{TabAST6}}
\end{table*}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{ST7}
In \cite{ST7Man}, the \tty{.w} postfix to signify 16-bit addresses is only
defined for memory indirect operands. It is used to mark that a
16-bit address is stored at a zero page address. AS additionally
allows this postfix for absolute addresses or displacements of
indirect address expressions to force 16-bit displacements in spite
of an 8-bit value (0..255).
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{ST9}
The ST9's bit addressing capabilities are quite limited: except for
the \tty{BTSET} instruction, only bits within the current set of working
registers are accessible. A bit address is therefore of the
following style:
\begin{verbatim}
rn.[!]b ,
\end{verbatim}
whereby \tty{!} means an optional complement of a source operand. If a bit
is defined symbolically, the bit's register number is stored in bits
7..4, the bit's position is stored in bits 3..1 and the optional
complement is kept in bit 0. AS distinguishes explicit and symbolic
bit addresses by the missing dot. A bit's symbolic name therefore
must not contain a dot, thought it would be legal in respect to the
general symbol name conventions. It is also valid to invert a
symbolically referred bit:
\begin{verbatim}
bit2 bit r5.3
.
.
bld r0.0,!bit2
\end{verbatim}
This opportunity also allows to undo an inversion that was done at
definition of the symbol.
The include file \tty{REGST9.INC} defines the symbolic names of all on-chip
registers and their associated bits. Keep however in mind that the
bit definitions only work after previously setting the working
register bank to the address of these peripheral registers!
In contrast to the definition file delivered with the AST9 assembler
from SGS-Thomson, the names of peripheral register names are only
defined as general registers (\tty{R...}), not also as working registers
(\tty{r...}). The reason for this is that AS does not support register
aliases; a tribute to assembly speed.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{6804}
To be honest: I only implemented this processor in AS to quarrel
about SGS-Thomson's peculiar behaviour. When I first read the 6804's
data book, the ''incomplete'' instruction set and the built-in macros
immediately reminded me of the ST62 series manufactured by the same
company. A more thorough comparison of the opcodes gave surprising
insights: A 6804 opcode can be generated by taking the equivalent
ST62 opcode and mirroring all the bits! So Thomson obviously did a
bit of processor core recycling...which would be all right if they
would not try to hide this: different peripherals, motorola instead
of Zilog-style syntax, and the awful detail of \bb{not} mirroring operand
fields in the opcode (e.g. bit fields containing displacements). The
last item is also the reason that finally convinced me to support the
6804 in AS. I personally can only guess which department at Thomson
did the copy...
In contrast to its ST62 counterpart, the include file for the 6804
does not contain instruction macros that help a bit to deal with the
limited machine instruction set. This is left as an exercise to the
reader!
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TMS3201x}
It seems that every semiconductor's ambition is to invent an own
notation for hexadecimal numbers. Texas Instrument took an
especially eccentric approach for these processors: a $>$ sign as
prefix! The support of such a format in AS would have lead to
extreme conflicts with AS's compare and shift operators. I therefore
decided to use the Intel notation, which is what TI also uses for the
340x0 series and the 3201x's successors...
The instruction word of these processors unfortunately does not have
enough bits to store all 8 bits for direct addressing. This is why
the data address space is split into two banks of 128 words. AS
principally regards the data address space as a linear segment of 256
words and automatically clears bit 7 on direct accesses (an exception
is the \tty{SST} instruction that can only write to the upper bank). The
programmer has to take care that the bank flag always has the correct
value!
Another hint that is well hidden in the data book: The \tty{SUBC}
instruction internally needs more than one clock for completion, but
the control unit already continues to execute the next instruction.
An instruction following \tty{SUBC} therefore may not access the
accumulator. AS does not check for such conditions!
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TMS320C2x}
As I did not write this code generator myself (that does not lower
its quality by any standard), I can only roughly line out why there
are some instructions that force a prefixed label to be untyped, i.e.
not assigned to any specific address space: The 2x series of TMS
signal processors has a code and a data segment which are both 64
Kbytes large. Depending on external circuitry, code and data space may
overlap, e.g. to allow storage of constants in the code area and
access them as data. Data storage in the code segment may be
necessary because older versions of AS assume that the data segment
only consists of RAM that cannot have a defined power-on state in a
single board system. They therefore reject storage of contents in
other segments than \tty{CODE}. Without the feature of making symbols
untyped, AS would punish every access to a constant in code space
with a warning (''symbol out of wrong segment''). To say it in detail,
the following instructions make labels untyped:
\begin{quote}\tt
BSS, STRING, RSTRING, BYTE, WORD , LONG\\
FLOAT, DOUBLE, EFLOAT, BFLOAT and TFLOAT
\rm\end{quote}
If one needs a typed label in front of one of these instructions, one
can work around this by placing the label in a separate line just
before the pseudo instruction itself. On the other hand, it is
possible to place an untyped label in front of another pseudo
instruction by defining the label with \tty{EQU}, e.g.
\begin{verbatim}
<name> EQU $ .
\end{verbatim}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TMS320C3x}
The syntax detail that created the biggest amount of headache for me
while implementing this processor family is the splitting of parallel
instructions into two separate source code lines. Fortunately, both
instructions of such a construct are also valid single instructions.
AS therefore first generates the code for the first instruction and
replaces it by the parallel machine code when a parallel construct is
encountered in the second line. This operation can be noticed in the
assembly listing by the machine code address that does not advance
and the double dot replaced with a \tty{R}.
Compared to the TI assembler, AS is not as flexible regarding the
position of the double lines that signify a parallel operation
(\tty{||}): One either has to place them like a label (starting in the
first column) or to prepend them to the second mnemonic. The line
parser of AS will run into trouble if you do something else...
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TMS9900}
Similar to most older TI microprocessor families, TI used an own
format for hexadecimal and binary constants. AS instead favours the
Intel syntax which is also common for newer processor designs from
TI.
The TI syntax for registers allows to use a simple integer number
between 0 and 15 instead of a real name (\tty{Rx} or \tty{WRx}).
This has two consequences:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{R0...R15} resp. \tty{WR0..WR15} are simple predefined integer
symbols with values from 0 to 15, and the definition of register
aliases is a simple matter of \tty{EQU}.}
\item{In contrast to several other processors, I cannot offer the
additional AS feature that allows to omit the character sigifying
absolute addressing (a \@ sign in this case). As a missing
character would mean register numbers (from 0 to 15) in this case,
it was not possible to offer the optional omission.}
\end{itemize}
Furthermore, TI sometimes uses \tty{Rx} to name registers and \tty{WRx}
at other places...currently both variants are recognized by AS.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TMS70Cxx}
This processor family belongs to the older families developed by TI
and therefore TI's assemblers use their proprietary syntax for
hexadecimal resp. binary constants (a prefixed $<$ resp. \tty{?} character).
As this format could not be realized for AS, the Intel syntax is used
by default. This is the format TI to which also switched over when
introducing the successors, of this family, the 370 series of
microcontrollers. Upon a closer inspection of both's machine
instruction set, one discovers that about 80\% of all instruction are
binary upward compatible, and that also the assembly syntax is almost
identical - but unfortunately only almost. TI also took the chance to
make the syntax more orthogonal and simple. I tried to introduce
the majority of these changes also into the 7000's instruction set:
\begin{itemize}
\item{It is valid to use the more common \tty{\#} sign for immediate addressing
instead of the percent sign.}
\item{If a port address (\tty{P...}) is used as source or destination in a
\tty{AND, BTJO, BTJZ, MOV, OR}, or \tty{XOR} instruction, it is not necessary
to use the mnemonic variant with an appended \tty{P} - the general
form is sufficient.}
\item{The prefixed \tty{@} sign for absolute or B-relative addressing may be
omitted.}
\item{Instead of \tty{CMPA, CMP} with \tty{A} as target may be written.}
\item{Instead of \tty{LDA} resp. \tty{STA}, one can simply use the
\tty{MOV} instruction with \tty{A} as source resp. destination.}
\item{One can write \tty{MOVW} instead of \tty{MOVD}.}
\item{It is valid to abbreviate \tty{RETS} resp. \tty{RETI} as \tty{RTS}
resp. \tty{RTI}.}
\item{\tty{TSTA} resp. \tty{TSTB} may be written as \tty{TST A} resp.
\tty{TST B}.}
\item{\tty{XCHB B} is an alias for \tty{TSTB}.}
\end{itemize}
An important note: these variants are only allowed for the TMS70Cxx -
the corresponding 7000 variants are not allowed for the 370 series!
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{TMS370xxx}
Though these processors do not have specialized instructions for bit
manipulation, the assembler creates (with the help of the \tty{DBIT}
instruction - see there) the illusion as if single bits were
addressable. To achieve this, the \tty{DBIT} instructions stores an
address along with a bit position into an integer symbol which may
then be used as an argument to the pseudo instructions \tty{SBIT0, SBIT1,
CMPBIT, JBIT0}, and \tty{JBIT1}. These are translated into the instructions
\tty{OR, AND, XOR, BTJZ}, and \tty{BTJO} with an appropriate bit mask.
There is nothing magic about these bit symbols, they are simple
integer values that contain the address in their lower and the bit
position in their upper half. One could construct bit symbols
without the \tty{DBIT} instruction, like this:
\begin{verbatim}
defbit macro name,bit,addr
name equ addr+(bit<<16)
endm
\end{verbatim}
but this technique would not lead to the \tty{EQU}-style syntax defined by
TI (the symbol to be defined replaces the label field in a line).
\bb{CAUTION!} Though \tty{DBIT} allows an arbitrary address, the pseudo
instructions can only operate with addresses either in the range from
0..255 or 1000h..10ffh. The processor does not have an absolute
addressing mode for other memory ranges...
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{MSP430}
\label{MSPSpec}
The MSP was designed to be a RISC processor with a minimal power
consumption. The set of machine instructions was therefore reduced
to the absolute minimum (RISC processors do not have a microcode ROM
so every additional instruction has to be implemented with additional
silicon that increases power consumption). A number of instructions
that are hardwired for other processors are therefore emulated with
other instructions. For AS, these instructions are defined in the
include file \tty{REGMSP.INC}. You will get error messages for more than
half of the instructions defined by TI if you forget to include this
file!
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{COP8 \& SC/MP}
\label{COP8Spec}
National unfortunately also decided to use the syntax well known from
IBM mainframes (and much hated by me..) to write non-decimal integer
constants. Just like with other processors, this does not work with
AS's parser. ASMCOP however fortunately also seems to allow the C
syntax, which is why this became the default for the COP series and
the SC/MP...
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{SC144xxx}
\label{SC144xxspec}
Originally, National offered a relatively simple assembler for this series
of DECT controllers. An much more powerful assembler has been announced
by IAR, but it is not available up to now. However, since the development
tools made by IAR are as much target-independent as possible, one can
roughly estimate the pseudo instructions it will support by looking at
other available target platforms. With this in mind, the (few)
SC144xx-specific instructions {\tt DC, DC8, DW16, DS, DS8, DS16, DW} were
designed. Of course, I didn't want to reinvent the wheel for pseudo
instructions whose functionality is already part of the AS core.
Therefore, here is a little table with equivalences. The statements
\tty{ALIGN, END, ENDM, EXITM, MACRO, ORG, RADIX, SET,} and \tty{REPT} both
exist for the IAR assembler and AS and have same functionality. Changes
are needed for the following instructions:
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
\hline
IAR & AS & Funktion\\
\hline
\hline
\tty{\#include} & \tty{include} & include file \\
\tty{\#define} & \tty{SET, EQU} & define symbol \\
\tty{\#elif, ELIF, ELSEIF} & \tty{ELSEIF} & start another \\
& & IF branch \\
\tty{\#else, ELSE} & \tty{ELSE} & last branch of an IF \\
& & construct \\
\tty{\#endif, ENDIF} & \tty{ENDIF} & ends an IF construct \\
\tty{\#error} & \tty{ERROR, FATAL} & create error message \\
\tty{\#if, IF} & \tty{IF} & start an IF construct \\
\tty{\#ifdef} & \tty{IFDEF} & symbol defined ? \\
\tty{\#ifndef} & \tty{IFNDEF} & symbol not defined ? \\
\tty{\#message} & \tty{MESSAGE} & output message \\
\tty{=, DEFINE, EQU} & \tty{=, EQU} & fixed value assignment \\
\tty{EVEN} & \tty{ALIGN 2} & force PC to be equal \\
\tty{COL, PAGSIZ} & \tty{PAGE} & set page size for listing \\
\tty{ENDR} & \tty{ENDM} & end REPT construct \\
\tty{LSTCND, LSTOUT} & \tty{LISTING} & control amount of listing \\
\tty{LSTEXP, LSTREP} & \tty{MACEXP} & list expanded macros? \\
\tty{LSTXRF} & \verb!<command line>! & generate cross reference \\
\tty{PAGE} & \tty{NEWPAGE} & new page in listing \\
\tty{REPTC} & \tty{IRPC} & repetition with character \\
& & replacement \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\end{table*}
There is no direct equivalent for {\tt CASEON}, {\tt CASEOFF,}
\tty{LOCAL}, \tty{LSTPAG}, \tty{\#undef,} and {\tt REPTI}.
A 100\% equivalent is of course impossible as long as there is no C-like
preprocessor in AS. C-like comments unfortunately are also impossible
at the moment. Caution: When modifying IAR codes for AS, do not forget to
move converted preprocessor statements out of column 1 as AS reserves this
column exclusively for labels!
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{75K0}
\label{75K0Spec}
Similar to other processors, the assembly language of the 75 series
also knows pseudo bit operands, i.e. it is possible to assign a
combination of address and bit number to a symbol that can then be
used as an argument for bit oriented instructions just like explicit
expressions. The following three instructions for example generate
the same code:
\begin{verbatim}
ADM sfr 0fd8h
SOC bit ADM.3
skt 0fd8h.3
skt ADM.3
skt SOC
\end{verbatim}
AS distinguishes direct and symbolic bit accesses by the missing dot
in symbolic names; it is therefore forbidden to use dots in symbol
names to avoid misunderstandings in the parser.
The storage format of bit symbols mostly accepts the binary coding in
the machine instructions themselves: 16 bits are used, and there is
a ''long'' and a ''short'' format. The short format can store the
following variants:
\begin{itemize}
\item{direct accesses to the address range from 0FBxH to 0FFxH}
\item{indirect accesses in the style of \tty{Addr.@L} (0FC0H $\leq$ \tty{Addr} $\leq$0FFFH)}
\item{indirect accesses in the style of \tty{@H+d4.bit}}
\end{itemize}
The upper byte is set to 0, the lower byte contains the bit
expression coded according to \cite{NEC75}. The long format in contrast
only knows direct addressing, but it can cover the whole address space
(given a correct setting of MBS and MBE). A long expression stores
bits 0..7 of the address in the lower byte, the bit position in bits
8 and 9, and a constant value of 01 in bits 10 and 11. The highest
bits allow to distinguish easily between long and short addresses via
a check if the upper byte is 0. Bits 12..15 contain bits 8..11 of
the address; they are not needed to generate the code, but they have
to be stored somewhere as the check for correct banking can only
take place when the symbol is actually used.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{78K0}
\label{78K0Spec}
NEC uses different ways to mark absolute addressing in its data
books:
\begin{itemize}
\item{absolute short: no prefix}
\item{absolute long: prefix of \tty{!}}
\item{PC relative: prefix of \tty{\$}}
\end{itemize}
Under AS, these prefixes are only necessary if one wants to force a
certain addressing mode and the instruction allows different
variants. Without a prefix, AS will automatically select the shortest
variant. It should therefore rarely be necessary to use a prefix in
practice.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{$\mu$PD772x}
Both the 7720 and 7725 are provided by the same code generator and are
extremely similar in their instruction set. One should however not
beleive that they are binary compatible: To get space for the longer
address fields and additional instructions, the bit positions of some
fields in the instruction word have changed, and the instruction length
has changed from 23 to 24 bits. The code format therefore uses different
header ids for both CPUs.
They both have in common that in addition to the code and data segment,
there is also a ROM for storage of constants. In the case of AS, it is
mapped onto the \tty{ROMDATA} segment!
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{File Formats}
In this chapter, the formats of files AS generates shall be explained
whose formats are not self-explanatory.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Code Files}
\label{SectCodeFormat}
The format for code files generated by the assembler must be able to
separate code parts that were generated for different target
processors; therefore, it is a bit different from most other formats.
Though the assembler package contains tools to deal with code files,
I think is a question of good style to describe the format in short:
If a code file contains multibyte values, they are stored in little
endian order. This rule is already valid for the 16-bit magic word
\$1489, i.e. every code file starts with the byte sequence \$89/\$14.
This magic word is followed by an arbitrary number of ''records''. A
record may either contain a continuous piece of the code or certain
additional information. Even without switching to different
processor types, a file may contain several code-containing records,
in case that code or constant data areas are interrupted by reserved
memory areas that should not be initialized. This way, the assembler
tries to keep the file as short as possible.
Common to all records is a header byte which defines the record's type
and its contents. Written in a PASCALish way, the record structure
can be described in the following way:
\begin{verbatim}
FileRecord = RECORD CASE Header:Byte OF
$00:(Creator:ARRAY[] OF Char);
$01..
$7f:(StartAdr : LongInt;
Length : Word;
Data : ARRAY[0..Length-1] OF Byte);
$80:(EntryPoint:LongInt);
$81:(Header : Byte;
Segment : Byte;
Gran : Byte;
StartAdr : LongInt;
Length : Word;
Data : ARRAY[0..Length-1] OF Byte);
END
\end{verbatim}
This description does not express fully that the length of data
fields is variable and depends on the value of the \tty{Length} entries.
A record with a header byte of \$81 is a record that may contain code
or data from arbitrary segments. The first byte (\tty{Header}) describes
the processor family the following code resp. data was generated for (see
table \ref{TabHeader}).
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|c|l||c|l|}
\hline
header & family & header & family \\
Header & Familie & Header & Familie \\
\hline
\hline
\input{../doc_DE/tabids.tex}
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Header Bytes for the Different Processor
Families\label{TabHeader}}
\end{table*}
The \tty{Segment} field signifies the address space the following code
belongs to. The assignment defined in table \ref{TabSegments} applies.
\begin{table*}[htbp]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|c|l||c|l|}
\hline
number & segment & number & segment \\
\hline
\hline
\$00 & $<$undefined$>$ & \$01 & \tty{CODE} \\
\$02 & \tty{DATA} & \$03 & \tty{IDATA} \\
\$04 & \tty{XDATA} & \$05 & \tty{YDATA} \\
\$06 & \tty{BDATA} & \$07 & \tty{IO} \\
\$08 & \tty{REG} & \$09 & \tty{ROMDATA} \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Codings of the {\tt Segment} Field\label{TabSegments}}
\end{table*}
The \tty{Gran} field describes the code's ''granularity'', i.e. the size of
the smallest addressable unit in the following set of data. This
value is a function of processor type and segment and is an important
parameter for the interpretation of the following two fields that
describe the block's start address and its length: While the start
address refers to the granularity, the \tty{Length} value is always
expressed in bytes! For example, if the start address is \$300 and
the length is 12, the resulting end address would be \$30b for a
granularity of 1, however \$303 for a granularity of 4! Granularities
that differ from 1 are rare and mostly appear in DSP CPU's that are
not designed for byte processing. For example, a DSP56K's address
space is organized in 64 Kwords of 16 bits. The resulting storage
capacity is 128 Kbytes, however it is organized as $2^{16}$ words that
are addressed with addresses 0,1,2,...65535!
The start address is always 32 bits in size, independent of the
processor family. In contrast, the length specification has only 16
bits, i.e. a record may have a maximum length of 4+4+2+(64K-1) =
65545 bytes.
Data records with a Header ranging from \$01 to \$7f present a shortcut
and preserve backward compatibility to earlier definitions of the
file format: in their case, the Header directly defines the processor
type, the target segment is fixed to \tty{CODE} and the granularity is
implicitly given by the processor type, rounded up to the next power
of two. AS prefers to use these records whenever data or code should
go into the \tty{CODE} segment.
A record with a Header of \$80 defines an entry point, i.e. the
address where execution of the program should start. Such a record
is the result of an \tty{END} statement with a corresponding address as
argument.
The last record in a file bears the Header \$00 and has only a string
as data field. This string does not have an explicit length
specification; its end is equal to the file's end. The string
contains only the name of the program that created the file and has
no further meaning.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Debug Files}
\label{SectDebugFormat}
Debug files may optionally be generated by AS. They deliver important
information for tools used after assembly, like disassemblers or
debuggers. AS can generate debug files in one of three formats: On the
one hand, the object format used by the AVR tools from Atmel respectively
a NoICE-compatible command file, and on the other hand an own format. The
first two are described in detail in \cite{AVRObj} resp. the NoICE
documentations, which is why the following description limits itself to
the AS-specific MAP format:
The information in a MAP file is split into three groups:
\begin{itemize}
\item{symbol table}
\item{memory usage per section}
\item{machine addresses of source lines}
\end{itemize}
The second item is listed first in the file. A single entry in this
list consists of two numbers that are separated by a \tty{:} character:
\begin{verbatim}
<line number>:<address>
\end{verbatim}
Such an entry states that the machine code generated for the source
statement in a certain line is stored at the mentioned address
(written in hexadecimal notation). With such an information, a
debugger can display the corresponding source lines while stepping
through a program. As a program may consist of several include
files, and due to the fact that a lot of processors have more than
one address space (though admittedly only one of them is used to
store executable code), the entries described above have to be
sorted. AS does this sorting in two levels: The primary sorting
criteria is the target segment, and the entries in one of these
sections are sorted according to files. The sections resp.
subsections are separated by special lines in the style of
\begin{verbatim}
Segment <segment name>
\end{verbatim}
resp.
\begin{verbatim}
File <file name> .
\end{verbatim}
The source line info is followed by the symbol table. Similar to the
source line info, the symbol table is primarily sorted by the
segments individual symbols are assigned to. In contrast to the
source line info, an additional section \tty{NOTHING} exists which contains
the symbols that are not assigned to any specific segment (e.g.
symbols that have been defined with a simple \tty{EQU} statement). A
section in the symbol table is started with a line of the following
type:
\begin{verbatim}
Symbols in Segment <segment name>
\end{verbatim}
The symbols in a section are sorted according to the alphabetical
order of their names, and one symbol entry consists of exactly one
line. Such a line consists of 5 fields witch are separated by at
least a single space:
The first field is the symbol's name, possibly extended by a section
number enclosed in brackets. Such a section number limits the
range of validity for a symbol. The second field designates the
symbol's type: \tty{Int} stands for integer values, \tty{Float} for floating
point numbers, and \tty{String} for character arrays. The third field
finally contains the symbol's value. If the symbol contains a
string, it is necessary to use a special encoding for control
characters and spaces. Without such a coding, spaces in a string
could be misinterpreted as delimiters to the next field. AS uses the
same syntax that is also valid for assembly source files: Instead of
the character, its ASCII value with a leading backslash (\verb!\!) is
inserted. For example, the string
\begin{verbatim}
This is a test
\end{verbatim}
becomes
\begin{verbatim}
This\032is\032\a\032test .
\end{verbatim}
The numerical value always has three digits and has to be interpreted
as a decimal value. Naturally, the backslash itself also has to be
coded this way.
The fourth field specifies - if available - the size of the data
structure placed at the address given by the symbol. A debugger may
use this information to automatically display variables in their
correct length when they are referred symbolically. In case AS does
not have any information about the symbol size, this field simply
contains the value -1.
Finally,the fifth field states via the values 0 or 1 if the symbol
has been used during assembly. A program that reads the symbol table
can use this field to skip unused symbols as they are probably unused
during the following debugging/disassembly session.
The third section in a debug file describes the program's sections in
detail. The need for such a detailed description arises from the
sections' ability to limit the validity range of symbols. A symbolic
debugger for example cannot use certain symbols for a reverse
translation, depending on the current PC value. It may also have to
regard priorities for symbol usage when a value is represented by
more than one symbol. The definition of a section starts with a line
of the following form:
\begin{verbatim}
Info for Section nn ssss pp
\end{verbatim}
\tty{nn} specifies the section's number (the number that is also used in
the symbol table as a postfix for symbol names), \tty{ssss} gives its name
and \tty{pp} the number of its parent section. The last information is
needed by a retranslator to step upward through a tree of sections
until a fitting symbol is found. This first line is followed by a
number of further lines that describe the code areas used by this
section. Every single entry (exactly one entry per line) either
describes a single address or an address range given by a lower and
an upper bound (separation of lower and upper bound by a minus sign).
These bounds are ''inclusive'', i.e. the bounds themselves also belong
to the area. Is is important to note that an area belonging to a
section is not additionally listed for the section's parent sections
(an exception is of course a deliberate multiple allocation of address
areas, but you would not do this, would you?). On the one hand, this
allows an optimized storage of memory areas during assembly. On the
other hand, this should not be an obstacle for symbol backtranslation
as the single entry already gives an unambiguous entry point for the
symbol search path. The description of a section is ended by an
empty line or the end of the debug file.
Program parts that lie out of any section are not listed separately.
This implicit ''root section'' carries the number -1 and is also used
as parent section for sections that do not have a real parent
section.
It is possible that the file contains empty lines or comments (semi
colon at line start). A program reading the file has to ignore such
lines.
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Utility Programs}
\label{ChapTools}
To simplify the work with the assembler's code format a bit, I added
some tools to aid processing of code files. These programs are
released under the same license terms as stated in section
\ref{SectLicense}!
Common to all programs are the possible return codes they may deliver
upon completion (see table \ref{TabToolReturns}).
\par
\begin{table*}[h]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|c|l|}
\hline
return code & error condition \\
\hline
\hline
0 & no errors \\
1 & error in command line parameters \\
2 & I/O error \\
3 & file format error \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Return Codes of the Utility Programs\label{TabToolReturns}}
\end{table*}
Just like AS, all programs take their input from STDIN and write
messages to STDOUT (resp. error messages to STDERR). Therefore,
input and output redirections should not be a problem.
In case that numeric or address specifications have to be given in
the command line, they may also be written in hexadecimal notation
when they are prefixed with a dollar character or a \tty{0x} like in C.
(e.g. \verb!$10! or \verb!0x10! instead of 16).
Unix shells however \marginpar{{\em UNIX}} assign a special meaning to the
dollar sign, which makes it necessary to escape a dollar sign with a
backslash. The \tty{0x} variant is definitely more comfortable in this case.
Otherwise, calling conventions and variations are equivalent to those
of AS (except for PLIST and AS2MSG); i.e. it is possible to store
frequently used parameters in an environment variable (whose name is
constructed by appending CMD to the program's name, i.e. \tty{BINDCMD} for
BIND), to negate options, and to use all upper- resp. lower-case
writing (for details on this, see section \ref{SectCallConvention}).
Address specifications always relate to the granularity of the
processor currently in question; for example, on a PIC, an address
difference of 1 means a word and not a byte.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{PLIST}
PLIST is the simplest one of the five programs supplied: its purpose
is simply to list all records that are stored in a code file. As the
program does not do very much, calling is quite simple:
\begin{verbatim}
PLIST <file name>
\end{verbatim}
The file name will automatically be extended with the extension \tty{P} if
it doesn't already have one.
\bb{CAUTION!} At this place, no wildcards are allowed! If there is a
necessity to list several files with one command, use the following
''mini batch'':
\begin{verbatim}
for %n in (*.p) do plist %n
\end{verbatim}
PLIST prints the code file's contents in a table style, whereby
exactly one line will be printed per record. The individual rows
have the following meanings:
\begin{itemize}
\item{code type: the processor family the code has been generated for.}
\item{start address: absolute memory address that expresses the load
destination for the code.}
\item{length: length of this code chunk in bytes.}
\item{end address: last address of this code chunk. This address
is calculated as start address+length-1.}
\end{itemize}
All outputs are in hexadecimal notation.
Finally, PLIST will print a copyright remark (if there is one in the
file), together with a summaric code length.
Simply said, PLIST is a sort of DIR for code files. One can use it
to examine a file's contents before one continues to process it.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{BIND}
BIND is a program that allows to concatenate the records of several
code files into a single file. A filter function is available that
can be used to copy only records of certain types. Used in this way,
BIND can also be used to split a code file into several files.
The general syntax of BIND is
\begin{verbatim}
BIND <source file(s)> <target file> [options]
\end{verbatim}
Just like AS, BIND regards all command line arguments that do not
start with a \tty{+, -} or \tty{/} as file specifications, of which the last one
must designate the destination file. All other file specifications
name sources, which may again contain wildcards.
Currently, BIND defines only one command line option:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{f $<$Header[,Header]$>$}: sets a list of record headers that should
be copied. Records with other header IDs will
not be copied. Without such an option, all
records will be copied. The headers given in
the list correspond to the \tty{HeaderID} field of the
record structure described in section \ref{SectCodeFormat}.
Individual headers in this list are separated
with commas.}
\end{itemize}
For example, to filter all MCS-51 code out of a code file, use BIND
in the following way:
\begin{verbatim}
BIND <source name> <target name> -f $31
\end{verbatim}
If a file name misses an extension, the extension \tty{P} will be added
automatically.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{P2HEX}
P2HEX is an extension of BIND. It has all command line options of BIND and
uses the same conventions for file names. In contrary to BIND, the
target file is written as a Hex file, i.e. as a sequence of lines
which represent the code as ASCII hex numbers.
P2HEX knows 8 different target formats, which can be selected via the
command line parameter \tty{F}:
\begin{itemize}
\item{Motorola S-Records \tty{(-F Moto)}}
\item{MOS Hex \tty{(-F MOS)}}
\item{Intel Hex (Intellec-8, \tty{-F Intel)}}
\item{16-Bit Intel Hex (MCS-86, \tty{-F Intel16)}}
\item{32-Bit Intel Hex \tty{(-F Intel32)}}
\item{Tektronix Hex \tty{(-F Tek)}}
\item{Texas Instruments DSK \tty{(-F DSK)}}
\item{Atmel AVR Generic (-F Atmel, see \cite{AVRObj})}
\end{itemize}
If no target format is explicitly specified, P2HEX will automatically
choose one depending in the processor type: S-Records for Motorola
CPUs, Hitachi, and TLCS-900, MOS for 65xx/MELPS, DSK for the 16 bit
signal processors from Texas, Atmel Generic for the AVRs, and Intel Hex
for the rest. Depending on the start addresses width, the S-Record
format will use Records of type 1, 2, or 3, however, records in one
group will always be of the same type. This automatism can be partially
suppressed via the command line option
\begin{verbatim}
-M <1|2|3>
\end{verbatim}
A value of 2 resp. 3 assures that that S records with a minimum type of 2
resp. 3 will be used, while a value of 1 corresponds to the full
automatism.
The Intel, MOS and Tektronix formats are limited to 16 bit addresses, the
16-bit Intel format reaches 4 bits further. Addresses that are to long
for a given format will be reported by P2HEX with a warning; afterwards,
they will be truncated (!).
For the PIC microcontrollers, the switch
\begin{verbatim}
-m <0..3>
\end{verbatim}
allows to generate the three different variants of the Intel Hex
format. Format 0 is INHX8M which contains all bytes in a
Lo-Hi-Order. Addresses become double as large because the PICs have
a word-oriented address space that increments addresses only by one
per word. This format is also the default. With Format 1 (INHX16M),
bytes are stored in their natural order. This is the format
Microchip uses for its own programming devices. Format 2 (INHX8L)
resp. 3 (INHX8H) split words into their lower resp. upper bytes.
With these formats, P2HEX has to be called twice to get the complete
information, like in the following example:
\begin{verbatim}
p2hex test -m 2
rename test.hex test.obl
p2hex test -m 3
rename test.hex test.obh
\end{verbatim}
For the Motorola format, P2HEX additionally uses the S5 record type
mentioned in \cite{CPM68K}. This record contains the number of data
records (S1/S2/S3) to follow. As some programs might not know how to
deal with this record, one can suppress it with the option
\begin{verbatim}
+5 .
\end{verbatim}
In case a source file contains code record for different processors,
the different hex formats will also show up in the target file - it
is therefore strongly advisable to use the filter function.
Apart form this filter function, P2HEX also supports an address
filter, which is useful to split the code into several parts (e.g.
for a set of EPROMs):
\begin{verbatim}
-r <start address>-<end address>
\end{verbatim}
The start address is the first address in the window, and the end
address is the last address in the window, \bb{not} the first address
that is out of the window. For example, to split an 8051 program
into 4 2764 EPROMs, use the following commands:
\begin{verbatim}
p2hex <source file> eprom1 -f $31 -r $0000-$1fff
p2hex <source file> eprom2 -f $31 -r $2000-$3fff
p2hex <source file> eprom3 -f $31 -r $4000-$5fff
p2hex <source file> eprom4 -f $31 -r $6000-$7fff
\end{verbatim}
By default, the address window is 32 Kbytes large and starts at
address 0.
\bb{CAUTION!} This type of splitting does not change the absolute
addresses that will be written into the files! If the addresses in
the individual hex files should rather start at 0, one can force this
with the additional switch
\begin{verbatim}
-a .
\end{verbatim}
On the other hand, to move the addresses to a different location, one may
use the switch
\begin{verbatim}
-R <value> .
\end{verbatim}
The value given is an {\em offset}, i.e. it is added to the addresses
given in the code file.
\par
A special value for start and stop address arguments is a single
dollar sign (\tty{\$}). This stands for the very first resp. last address
that has been used in the code file. So, if you want to be sure
that always the whole program is stored in the hex file, set the
address filter
\begin{verbatim}
-r $-$
\end{verbatim}
and you do not have to worry about address filters any more. Dollar
signs and fixed addresses may of course me mixed. For example, the
setting
\begin{verbatim}
-r $-$7fff
\end{verbatim}
limits the upper end to 32 Kbytes.
By using an offset, it is possible to move a file's contents to an
arbitrary position. This offset is simply appended to a file's name,
surrounded with parentheses. For example, if the code in a file
starts at address 0 and you want to move it to address 1000 hex in the
hex file, append \tty{(\$1000)} to the file's name (without spaces!).
As the TI DSK format has the ability to distinguish between data and
code, there is a switch
\begin{verbatim}
-d <start>-<end>
\end{verbatim}
to designate the address range that should be written as data instead
of code. For this option, single dollar signs are \bb{not} allowed! While
this switch is only relevant for the DSK format, the option
\begin{verbatim}
-e <address>
\end{verbatim}
is also valid for the Intel and Motorola formats. Its purpose is to
set the entry address that will be inserted into the hex file. If
such a command line parameter is missing, P2HEX will search a
corresponding entry in the code file. If even this fails, no entry
address will be written to the hex file (DSK/Intel) or the field
reserved for the entry address will be set to 0 (Motorola).
Unfortunately, one finds different statements about the last line of
an Intel-Hex file in literature. Therefore, P2HEX knows three
different variants that may be selected via the command-line
parameter \tty{i} and an additional number:
\begin{verbatim}
0 :00000001FF
1 :00000001
2 :0000000000
\end{verbatim}
By default, variant 0 is used which seems to be the most common one.
If the target file name does not have an extension, an extension of
\tty{HEX} is supposed.
By default, P2HEX will print a maximum of 16 data bytes per line,
just as most other tools that output Hex files. If you want to
change this, you may use the switch
\begin{verbatim}
-l <count> .
\end{verbatim}
The allowed range of values goes from 2 to 254 data bytes; odd values
will implicitly be rounded down to an even count.
In most cases, the temporary code files generated by AS are not of
any further need after P2HEX has been run. The command line option
\begin{verbatim}
-k
\end{verbatim}
allows to instruct P2HEX to erase them automatically after
conversion.
In contrast to BIND, P2HEX will not produce an empty target file if
only one file name (i.e. the target name) has been given. Instead,
P2HEX will use the corresponding code file. Therefore, a minimal
call in the style of
\begin{verbatim}
P2HEX <name>
\end{verbatim}
is possible, to generate \tty{$<$name$>$.hex} out of \tty{$<$name$>$.p}.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{P2BIN}
P2BIN works similar to P2HEX and offers the same options (except for
the a and i options that do not make sense for binary files),
however, the result is stored as a simple binary file instead of a
hex file. Such a file is for example suitable for programming an
EPROM.
P2BIN knows three additional options to influence the resulting binary
file:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{l $<$8 bit number$>$}: sets the value that should be used to fill
unused memory areas. By default, the value
\$ff is used. This value assures that every
half-way intelligent EPROM burner will skip
these areas. This option allows to set different values,
for example if you want to
generate an image for the EPROM versions of
MCS-48 microcontrollers (empty cells of their
EPROM array contain zeroes, so \$00 would be
the correct value in this case).}
\item{\tty{s}: commands the program to calculate a checksum
of the binary file. This sum is printed as
a 32-bit value, and the two's complement of
the least significant bit will be stored in
the file's last byte. This way, the modulus-
256-sum of the file will become zero.}
\item{\tty{m}: is designed for the case that a CPU with a
16- or 32-bit data bus is used and the file
has to be split for several EPROMs. The
argument may have the following values:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{ALL}: copy everything}
\item{\tty{ODD}: copy all bytes with an odd address}
\item{\tty{EVEN}: copy all bytes with an even address}
\item{\tty{BYTE0..BYTE3}: copy only bytes with an address of
4n+0 .. 4n+3}
\item{\tty{WORD0, WORD1}: copy only the lower resp. upper 16-
bit word of a 32-bit word}
\end{itemize}}
\end{itemize}
To avoid confusions: If you use this option, the resulting binary file
will become smaller because only a part of the source will be copied.
Therefore, the resulting file will be smaller by a factor of 2 or 4
compared to \tty{ALL}. This is just natural...
In case the code file does not contain an entry address, one may set
it via the \tty{-e} command line option just like with P2HEX. Upon
request, P2BIN prepends the resulting image with this address. The
command line option
\begin{verbatim}
-S
\end{verbatim}
activates this function. It expects a numeric specification ranging
from 1 to 4 as parameter which specifies the length of the address
field in bytes. This number may optionally be prepended wit a \tty{L} or
\tty{B} letter to set the endian order of the address. For example, the
specification \tty{B4} generates a 4 byte address in big endian order,
while a specification of \tty{L2} or simply \tty{2} creates a 2 byte address
in little endian order.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{AS2MSG}
AS2MSG is not a tool in the real sense, it is a filter that was
designed to simplify the work with the assembler for (fortunate)
users of Borland Pascal 7.0. The DOS IDEs feature a 'tools' menu
that can be extended with own programs like AS. The filter allows to
directly display the error messages paired with a line
specification delivered by AS in the editor window. A new entry has
to be added to the tools menu to achieve this (Options/Tools/New).
Enter the following values:
\begin{verbatim}
- Title: ~m~acro assembler
- Program path: AS
- Command line:
-E !1 $EDNAME $CAP MSG(AS2MSG) $NOSWAP $SAVE ALL
- assign a hotkey if wanted (e.g. Shift-F7)
\end{verbatim}
The -E option assures that Turbo Pascal will not become puzzled by
STDIN and STDERR.
I assume that AS and AS2MSG are located in a directory listed in the
\tty{PATH} variable. After pressing the appropriate hotkey (or selecting
AS from the tools menu), as will be called with the name of the file
loaded in the active editor window as parameter. The error messages
generated during assembly are redirected to a special window that
allows to browse through the errors. \tty{Ctrl-Enter} jumps to an
erroneous line. The window additionally contains the statistics AS
prints at the end of an assembly. These lines obtain the dummy line
number 1.
\tty{TURBO.EXE} (Real Mode) and \tty{BP.EXE} (Protected Mode) may be used for
this way of working with AS. I recommend however BP, as this version
does not have to 'swap' half of the DOS memory before before AS is
called.
%%===========================================================================
\appendix
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Error Messages of AS}
\label{ChapErrMess}
Here is a list of all error messages emitted by AS. Each error message is
described by:
\begin{itemize}
\item{the internal error number (it is displayed only if AS is started with the
\tty{-n} option)}
\item{the text of the error message}
\item{error type:
\begin{itemize}
\item{Warning: informs the user that a possible error was
found, or that some inefficient binary code
could be generated. The assembly process is not
stopped.}
\item{Error: an error was detected. The assembly process
continues, but no binary code is emitted.}
\item{Fatal: unrecoverable error. The assembly process is
terminated.}
\end{itemize}}
\item{reason of the error: the situation originating the error.}
\item{argument: a further explanation of the error message.}
\end{itemize}
\par
\newcommand{\errentry}[5]
{\item[#1]{#2
\begin{description}
\item[Type:]{\ \\#3}
\item[Reason:]{\ \\#4}
\item[Argument:]{\ \\#5}
\end{description}}
}
\begin{description}
\errentry{ 0}{useless displacement}
{warning}
{680x0, 6809 and COP8 CPUs: an address displacement of 0 was
given. An address expression without displacement is
generated, and a convenient number of NOPs are emitted
to avoid phasing errors.}
{none}
\errentry{ 10}{short addressing possible}
{warning}
{680x0-, 6502 and 68xx CPUs: a given memory location can be
reached using short addressing. A short addressing
instruction is emitted, together with the required
number of NOPs to avoid phasing errors.}
{none}
\errentry{ 20}{short jump possible}
{warning}
{680x0- and 8086 CPUs can execute jumps using a short or long
displacement. If a shorter jump was not explicitly
requested, in the
first pass room for the long jump is reserved. Then the code
for the shorter jump is emitted, and the remaining space is
filled with NOPs to avoid phasing errors.}
{none}
\errentry{ 30}{no sharefile created, SHARED ignored}
{warning}
{A \tty{SHARED} directive was found, but on the command line no
options were specified, to generate a shared file.}
{none}
\errentry{ 40}{FPU possibly cannot read this value ($>$=1E1000)}
{warning}
{The BCD-floating point format used by the 680x0-FPU
allows such a large exponent, but according to the latest
databooks, this cannot be fully interpreted. The
corresponding word is assembled, but the associated
function is not expected to produce the correct result.}
{none}
\errentry{ 50}{privileged instruction}
{warning}
{A Supervisor-mode directive was used, that was not preceded
by an explicit \tty{SUPMODE ON} directive}
{none}
\errentry{ 60}{distance of 0 not allowed for short jump (NOP created instead)}
{warning}
{A short jump with a jump distance equal to 0 is not allowed
by 680x0 resp. COP8 processors, since the associated code word is
used to identify long jump instruction. Instead of a
jump instruction, AS emits a NOP}
{none}
\errentry{ 70}{symbol out of wrong segment}
{warning}
{The symbol used as an operand comes from an address space
that cannot be addressed together with the given instruction}
{none}
\errentry{ 75}{segment not accessible}
{warning}
{The symbol used as an operand belongs to an address space
that cannot be accessed with any of the segment registers of
the 8086}
{The name of the inaccessible segment}
\errentry{ 80}{change of symbol values forces additional pass}
{warning}
{A symbol changed value, with respect to previous pass. This
warning is emitted only if the \tty{-r} option is used.}
{name of the symbol that changed value.}
\errentry{ 90}{overlapping memory usage}
{warning}
{The analysis of the usage list shows that part of the
program memory was used more than once. The reason can be an
excessive usage of \tty{ORG} directives.}
{none}
\errentry{ 100}{none of the CASE conditions was true}
{warning}
{A \tty{SWITCH...CASE} directive without \tty{ELSECASE} clause was
executed, and none of the \tty{CASE} conditions was found
to be true.}
{none}
\errentry{ 110}{page might not be addressable}
{warning}
{The symbol used as an operand was not found in the memory
page defined by an \tty{ASSUME} directive (ST6, 78(C)10).}
{none}
\errentry{ 120}{register number must be even}
{warning}
{The CPU allows to concatenate only register pairs, whose
start address is even (RR0, RR2, ..., only for Z8).}
{none}
\errentry{ 130}{obsolete instruction, usage discouraged}
{warning}
{The instruction used, although supported, was superseded by
a new instruction. Future versions of the CPU could no more
implement the old instruction.}
{none}
\errentry{ 140}{unpredictable execution of this instruction}
{warning}
{The addressing mode used for this instruction is allowed,
however a register is used in such a way that its contents
cannot be predicted after the execution of the
instruction.}
{none}
\errentry{ 150}{localization operator senseless out of a section}
{warning}
{An aheaded \@ must be used, so that it is
explicitly referred to the local symbols used in the
section. When the operator is used out of a section, there
are no local symbols, because this operator is useless in
this context.}
{none}
\errentry{ 160}{senseless instruction}
{warning}
{The instruction used has no meaning, or it can be
substituted by an other instruction, shorter and more
rapidly executed.}
{none}
\errentry{ 170}{unknown symbol value forces additional pass}
{warning}
{AS expects a forward definition of a symbol, i.e. a symbol
was used before it was defined. A further pass must be
executed. This warning is emitted only if the \tty{-r} option was
used.}
{none}
\errentry{ 180}{address is not properly aligned}
{warning}
{An address was used that is not an exact multiple of the
operand size. Although the CPU databook forbids this, the
address could be stored in the instruction word, so AS
simply emits a warning.}
{none.}
\errentry{ 190}{I/O-address must not be used here}
{warning}
{The addressing mode or the address used are correct, but the
address refers to the peripheral registers, and it
cannot be used in this circumstance.}
{none.}
\errentry{ 200}{possible pipelining effects}
{warning}
{A register is used in a series of instructions, so that a
sequence of instructions probably does not generate the
desired result. This usually happens when a register is
used before its new content was effectively loaded in it.}
{the register probably causing the problem.}
\errentry{ 210}{multiple use of address register in one instruction}
{warning}
{A register used for the addressing is used once more in the
same instruction, in a way that results in a modification
of the register value. The resulting address does not have a
well defined value.}
{the register used more than once.}
\errentry{ 220}{memory location is not bit addressable}
{warning}
{Via a \tty{SFRB} statement, it was tried to declare a memory cell
as bit addressable which is not bit addressable due to the
8051's architectural limits.}
{none}
\errentry{ 230}{stack is not empty}
{warning}
{At the end of a pass, a stack defined by the program is
not empty.}
{the name of the stack and its remaining depth}
\errentry{ 240}{NUL character in string, result is undefined}
{warning}
{A string constant contains a NUL character. Though this
works with the Pascal version, it is a problem for the
C version of AS since C itself terminates strings with
a NUL character. i.e. the string would have its end for
C just at this point...}
{none}
\errentry{ 250}{instruction crosses page boundary}
{warning}
{The parts of a machine statement partiallly lie on
different pages. As the CPU's instruction counter does
not get incremented across page boundaries, the processor
would fetch at runtime the first byte of the old page
instead of the instruction's following byte; the program
would execute incorrectly.}
{none}
\errentry{ 260}{range overflow}
{warning}
{A numeric value was out of the allowed range. AS brought
the value back into the allowed range by truncating upper
bits, but it is not guaranteed that meaningful and correct
code is generated by this.}
{none}
\errentry{ 270}{negative argument for DUP}
{warning}
{The repetition argument of a DUP directive was smaller
than 0. Analogous to a count of exactly 0, no data is
stored.}
{none}
\errentry{1000}{symbol double defined}
{error}
{A new value is assigned to a symbol, using a label or a
\tty{EQU, PORT, SFR, LABEL, SFRB} or \tty{BIT} instruction: however this
can be done only using \tty{SET/EVAL}.}
{the name of the offending symbol, and the line number where
it was defined for the first time, according to the symbol
table.}
\errentry{1010}{symbol undefined}
{error}
{A symbol is still not defined in the symbol table, also
after a second pass.}
{the name of the undefined symbol.}
\errentry{1020}{invalid symbol name}
{error}
{A symbol does not fulfill the requirements that symbols
must have to be considered valid by AS. Please pay
attention that more stringent syntax rules exist for
macros and function parameters.}
{the wrong symbol}
\errentry{1090}{invalid format}
{error}
{The instruction format used does not exist for this
instruction.}
{the known formats for this command}
\errentry{1100}{useless attribute}
{error}
{The instruction (processor or pseudo) cannot be used with a
point-suffixed attribute.}
{none}
\errentry{1105}{attribute may only be one character long}
{error}
{The attribute following a point after an instruction must
not be longer or shorter than one character.}
{none}
\errentry{1110}{wrong number of operands}
{error}
{The number of arguments issued for the instruction (processor or
pseudo) does not conform with the accepted number of
operands.}
{none}
\errentry{1115}{wrong number of operations}
{error}
{The number of options given with this command is not
correct.}
{none}
\errentry{1120}{addressing mode must be immediate}
{error}
{The instruction can be used only with immediate operands
(preceded by \tty{\#}).}
{none}
\errentry{1130}{invalid operand size}
{error}
{Although the operand is of the right type, it does not have
the correct length (in bits).}
{none}
\errentry{1131}{conflicting operand sizes}
{error}
{The operands used have different length (in bits)}
{none}
\errentry{1132}{undefined operand size}
{error}
{It is not possible to estimate, from the opcode and from
the operands, the size of the operand (a trouble with
8086 assembly). You must define it with a \tty{BYTE or WORD}
\tty{PTR} prefix.}
{none}
\errentry{1135}{invalid operand type}
{error}
{an expression does not have a correct operand type
(integer/\-decimal/\-string)}
{the operand type}
\errentry{1140}{too many arguments}
{error}
{No more than 20 arguments can be given to any instruction}
{none}
\errentry{1200}{unknown opcode}
{error}
{An was used that is neither an AS instruction, nor a
known mnemonic for the current processor type.}
{none}
\errentry{1300}{number of opening/closing brackets does not match}
{error}
{The expression parser found an expression enclosed by
parentheses, where the number of opening and closing
parentheses does not match.}
{the wrong expression}
\errentry{1310}{division by 0}
{error}
{An expression on the right side of a division or modulus
operation was found to be equal to 0.}
{none}
\errentry{1315}{range underflow}
{error}
{An integer word underflowed the allowed range.}
{the value of the word and the allowed minimum (in most
cases, maybe I will complete this one day...)}
\errentry{1320}{range overflow}
{error}
{An integer word overflowed the allowed range.}
{the value of the world, and the allowed maximum (in most
cases, maybe I will complete this one day...)}
\errentry{1325}{address is not properly aligned}
{error}
{The given address does not correspond with the size needed
by the data transfer, i.e. it is not an integral multiple of
the operand size. Not all processor types can use unaligned
data.}
{none}
\errentry{1330}{distance too big}
{error}
{The displacement used for an address is too large.}
{none}
\errentry{1340}{short addressing not allowed}
{error}
{The address of the operand is outside of the address space
that can be accessed using short-addressing mode.}
{none}
\errentry{1350}{addressing mode not allowed here}
{error}
{the addressing mode used, although usually possible,
cannot be used here.}
{none}
\errentry{1351}{number must be even}
{error}
{At this point, only even addresses are allowed, since the
low order bit is used for other purposes or it is reserved.}
{none}
\errentry{1355}{addressing mode not allowed in parallel operation}
{error}
{The addressing mode(s) used are allowed in sequential,
but not in parallel instructions}
{none}
\errentry{1360}{undefined condition}
{error}
{The branch condition used for a conditional jump does not
exist.}
{none}
\errentry{1370}{jump distance too big}
{error}
{the jump instruction and destination are too apart to
execute the jump with a single step}
{none}
\errentry{1375}{jump distance is odd}
{error}
{Since instruction must only be located at even addresses,
the jump distance between two instructions must always be
even, and the LSB of the jump distance is used otherwise.
This issue was not verified here. The reason is usually the
presence of an odd number of data in bytes or a wrong
\tty{ORG}.}
{none}
\errentry{1380}{invalid argument for shifting}
{error}
{only a constant or a data register can be used for defining
the shift size. (only for 680x0)}
{none}
\errentry{1390}{operand must be in range 1..8}
{error}
{constants for shift size or \tty{ADDQ} argument can be only
within the 1..8 range (only for 680x0)}
{none}
\errentry{1400}{shift amplitude too big}
{error}
{(no more used)}
{none}
\errentry{1410}{invalid register list}
{error}
{The register list argument of \tty{MOVEM} or \tty{FMOVEM} has a
wrong format (only for 680x0)}
{none}
\errentry{1420}{invalid addressing mode for CMP}
{error}
{The operand combination used with the \tty{CMP} instruction is
not allowed (only for 680x0)}
{none}
\errentry{1430}{invalid CPU type}
{error}
{The processor type used as argument for \tty{CPU} command is
unknown to AS.}
{the unknown processor type}
\errentry{1440}{invalid control register}
{error}
{The control register used by a \tty{MOVEC} is not (yet) available
for the processor defined by the \tty{CPU} command.}
{none}
\errentry{1445}{invalid register}
{error}
{The register used, although valid, cannot be used in this
context.}
{none}
\errentry{1450}{RESTORE without SAVE}
{error}
{A \tty{RESTORE} command was found, that cannot be coupled with a
corresponding \tty{SAVE}.}
{none}
\errentry{1460}{missing RESTORE}
{error}
{After the assembling pass, a \tty{SAVE} command was missing.}
{none.}
\errentry{1465}{unknown macro control instruction}
{error}
{A macro option parameter is unknown to AS.}
{the dubious option.}
\errentry{1470}{missing ENDIF/ENDCASE}
{error}
{after the assembling, some of the \tty{IF}- or \tty{CASE}- constructs
were found without the closing command}
{none}
\errentry{1480}{invalid IF-structure}
{error}
{The command structure in a \tty{IF}- or \tty{SWITCH}- sequence is
wrong.}
{none}
\errentry{1483}{section name double defined}
{error}
{In this program module a section with the same name still
exists.}
{the multiple-defined name}
\errentry{1484}{unknown section}
{error}
{In the current scope, there are no sections with this name}
{the unknown name}
\errentry{1485}{missing ENDSECTION}
{error}
{Not all the sections were properly closed.}
{none}
\errentry{1486}{wrong ENDSECTION}
{error}
{The given \tty{ENDSECTION} does not refer to the most
deeply nested one.}
{none}
\errentry{1487}{ENDSECTION without SECTION}
{error}
{An \tty{ENDSECTION} command was found, but the associated section
was not defined before.}
{none}
\errentry{1488}{unresolved forward declaration}
{error}
{A symbol declared with a \tty{FORWARD} or \tty{PUBLIC} statement could
not be resolved.}
{the name of the unresolved symbol.}
\errentry{1489}{conflicting FORWARD $<->$ PUBLIC-declaration}
{error}
{A symbol was defined both as public and private.}
{the name of the symbol.}
\errentry{1490}{wrong numbers of function arguments}
{error}
{The number of arguments used for referencing a function
does not match the number of arguments defined in the
function definition.}
{none}
\errentry{1495}{unresolved literals (missing LTORG)}
{error}
{At the end of the program, or just before switching to
another processor type, unresolved literals still remain.}
{none}
\errentry{1500}{instruction not allowed on}
{error}
{Although the instruction is correct, it cannot be used with
the selected member of the CPU family.}
{none}
\errentry{1505}{addressing mode not allowed on}
{error}
{Although the addressing mode used is correct, it cannot be
used with the selected member of the CPU family.}
{none}
\errentry{1510}{invalid bit position}
{error}
{Either the number of bits specified is not allowed, or
the command is not completely specified.}
{none}
\errentry{1520}{only ON/OFF allowed}
{error}
{This pseudo command accepts as argument either \tty{ON} or
\tty{OFF}}
{none}
\errentry{1530}{stack is empty or undefined}
{error}
{It was tried to access a stack via a \tty{POPV} instruction
that was either never defined or already emptied.}
{the name of the stack in question}
\errentry{1540}{not exactly one bit set}
{error}
{Not exactly one bit was set in a mask passed to the
\tty{BITPOS} function.}
{none}
\errentry{1550}{ENDSTRUCT without STRUCT}
{error}
{An \tty{ENDSTRUCT} instruction was found though there is
currently no structure definition in progress.}
{none}
\errentry{1551}{open structure definition}
{error}
{After end of assembly, not all \tty{STRUCT} instructions
have been closed with appropriate \tty{ENDSTRUCT}s.}
{the innermost, unfinished structure definition}
\errentry{1552}{wrong ENDSTRUCT}
{error}
{the name parameter of an \tty{ENDSTRUCT} instruction does
not correspond to the innermost open structure
definition.}
{none}
\errentry{1553}{phase definition not allowed in structure definition}
{error}
{What should I say about that? \tty{PHASE} inside a record
simply does not make sense and only leads to
confusion...}
{none}
\errentry{1554}{invalid \tty{STRUCT} directive}
{error}
{Only \tty{EXTNAMES} resp. \tty{NOEXTNAMES} are allowed as
directives of a \tty{STRUCT} statement.}
{the unknown directive}
\errentry{1600}{unexpected end of file}
{error}
{It was tried to read past the end of a file with a
\tty{BINCLUDE} statement.}
{none}
\errentry{1700}{ROM-offset must be in range 0..63}
{error}
{The ROM table of the 680x0 coprocessor has only 64 entries.}
{none}
\errentry{1710}{invalid function code}
{error}
{The only function code arguments allowed are SFC, DFC, a
data register, or a constant in the interval of 0..15 (only
for 680x0 MMU).}
{none}
\errentry{1720}{invalid function code mask}
{error}
{Only a number in the interval 0..15 can be used as
function code mask (only for 680x0 MMU)}
{none}
\errentry{1730}{invalid MMU register}
{error}
{The MMU does not have a register with this name (only for
680x0 MMU).}
{none}
\errentry{1740}{level must be in range 0..7}
{error}
{The level for \tty{PTESTW} and \tty{PTESTR} must be a constant in the
range of 0...7 (only for 680x0 MMU).}
{none}
\errentry{1750}{invalid bit mask}
{error}
{The bit mask used for a bit field command has a wrong
format (only for 680x0).}
{none}
\errentry{1760}{invalid register pair}
{error}
{The register here defined cannot be used in this context,
or there is a syntactic error (only for 680x0).}
{none}
\errentry{1800}{open macro definition}
{error}
{An incomplete macro definition was found. Probably an
\tty{ENDM} was forgotten.}
{none}
\errentry{1805}{EXITM not called from within macro}
{error}
{\tty{EXITM} is designed to terminate a macro expansion. This
instruction only makes sense within macros and an attempt
was made to call it in the absence of macros.}
{none}
\errentry{1810}{more than 10 macro parameters}
{error}
{A macro cannot have more than 10 parameters}
{none}
\errentry{1815}{macro double defined}
{error}
{A macro was defined more than once in a program section.}
{the multiply defined macro name.}
\errentry{1820}{expression must be evaluatable in first pass}
{error}
{The command used has an influence on the length of the
emitted code, so that forward references cannot be resolved
here.}
{none}
\errentry{1830}{too many nested IFs}
{error}
{(no more implemented)}
{none}
\errentry{1840}{ELSEIF/ENDIF without IF}
{error}
{A \tty{ELSEIF}- or \tty{ENDIF}- command was found, that is not preceded
by an \tty{IF}- command.}
{none}
\errentry{1850}{nested / recursive macro call}
{error}
{(no more implemented)}
{none}
\errentry{1860}{unknown function}
{error}
{The function invoked was not defined before.}
{The name of the unknown function}
\errentry{1870}{function argument out of definition range}
{error}
{The argument does not belong to the allowed argument range
associated to the referenced function.}
{none}
\errentry{1880}{floating point overflow}
{error}
{Although the argument is within the range allowed to the
function arguments, the result is not valid}
{none}
\errentry{1890}{invalid value pair}
{error}
{The base-exponent pair used in the expression cannot be
computed}
{none}
\errentry{1900}{instruction must not start on this address}
{error}
{No jumps can be performed by the selected CPU from this
address.}
{none}
\errentry{1905}{invalid jump target}
{error}
{No jumps can be performed by the selected CPU to this
address.}
{none}
\errentry{1910}{jump target not on same page}
{error}
{Jump command and destination must be in the same memory
page.}
{none}
\errentry{1920}{code overflow}
{error}
{An attempt was made to generate more than 1024 code or
data bytes in a single memory page.}
{none}
\errentry{1925}{address overflow}
{error}
{The address space for the processor type actually used was
filled beyond the maximum allowed limit.}
{none}
\errentry{1930}{constants and placeholders cannot be mixed}
{error}
{Instructions that reserve memory, and instructions that define
constants cannot be mixed in a single pseudo instruction.}
{none}
\errentry{1940}{code must not be generated in structure definition}
{error}
{a \tty{STRUCT} construct is only designed to describe a
data structure and not to create one; therefore, no
instructions are allowed that generate code.}
{none}
\errentry{1950}{parallel construct not possible here}
{error}
{Either these instructions cannot be executed in parallel,
or they are not close enough each other, to do parallel
execution.}
{none}
\errentry{1960}{invalid segment}
{error}
{The referenced segment cannot be used here.}
{The name of the segment used.}
\errentry{1961}{unknown segment}
{error}
{The segment referenced with a \tty{SEGMENT} command does not
exist for the CPU used.}
{The name of the segment used}
\errentry{1962}{unknown segment register}
{error}
{The segment referenced here does not exist (8086 only)}
{none}
\errentry{1970}{invalid string}
{error}
{The string has an invalid format.}
{none}
\errentry{1980}{invalid register name}
{error}
{The referenced register does not exist, or it cannot
be used here.}
{none}
\errentry{1985}{invalid argument}
{error}
{The command used cannot be performed with the \tty{REP}-prefix.}
{none}
\errentry{1990}{indirect mode not allowed}
{error}
{Indirect addressing cannot be used in this way}
{none}
\errentry{1995}{not allowed in current segment}
{error}
{(no more implemented)}
{none}
\errentry{1996}{not allowed in maximum mode}
{error}
{This register can be used only in minimum mode}
{none}
\errentry{1997}{not allowed in minimum mode}
{error}
{This register can be used only in maximum mode}
{none}
\errentry{2000}{invalid combination of prefixes}
{error}
{The prefix combination here defined is not allowed, or it
cannot be translated into binary code}
{none}
\errentry{2010}{invalid escape sequence}
{error}
{The special character defined using a backslash sequence
is not defined}
{none}
\errentry{10001}{error in opening file}
{fatal}
{An error was detected while trying to open a file for input.}
{description of the I/O error}
\errentry{10002}{error in writing listing}
{fatal}
{An error happened while AS was writing the listing file.}
{description of the I/O error}
\errentry{10003}{file read error}
{fatal}
{An error was detected while reading a source file.}
{description of the I/O error}
\errentry{10004}{file write error}
{fatal}
{While AS was writing a code or share file, an error happened.}
{description of the I/O error}
\errentry{10006}{heap overflow}
{fatal}
{The memory available is not enough to store all the data
needed by AS. Try using the DPMI or OS/2 version of AS.}
{none}
\errentry{10007}{stack overflow}
{fatal}
{The program stack crashed, because too complex formulas, or
a bad disposition of symbols and/or macros were used. Try
again, using AS with the option \tty{-A}.}
{none}
\end{description}
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{I/O Error Messages}
The following error messages are generated not only by AS, but also by
the auxiliary programs, like PLIST, BIND, P2HEX, and P2BIN. Only the most
probable error messages are here explained. Should you meet an undocumented
error message, then you probably met a program bug! Please inform us
immediately about this!!
\begin{description}
\item[2]{file not found\\
The file requested does not exist, or it is stored on another
drive.}
\item[3]{path not found\\
The path of a file does not exist, or it is on another drive.}
\item[4]{too much open files\\
There are no more file handles available to DOS. Increase
their number changing the value associated to \tty{FILES=} in the file
\tty{CONFIG.SYS}.}
\item[5]{file access not allowed\\
Either the network access rights do not allow the file access, or
an attempt was done to rewrite or rename a protected file.}
\item[6]{invalid file handler}
\item[12]{invalid access mode}
\item[15]{invalid drive letter\\
The required drive does not exist.}
\item[16]{The file cannot be deleted}
\item[17]{RENAME cannot be done on this drive}
\item[100]{Unexpected end of file\\
A file access tried to go beyond the end of file, although according
to its structure this should not happen. The file is probably
corrupted.}
\item[101]{disk full\\
This is self explaining! Please, clean up !}
\item[102]{ASSIGN failed}
\item[103]{file not open}
\item[104]{file not open for reading}
\item[105]{file not open for writing}
\item[106]{invalid numerical format}
\item[150]{the disk is write-protected\\
When you don't use a hard disk as work medium storage, you should
sometimes remove the protecting tab from your diskette!}
\item[151]{unknown device\\
you tried to access a peripheral unit that is unknown to DOS. This
should not usually happen, since the name should be automatically
interpreted as a filename.}
\item[152]{drive not ready\\
close the disk drive door.}
\item[153]{unknown DOS function}
\item[154]{invalid disk checksum\\
A bad read error on the disk. Try again; if nothing changes,
reformat the floppy disk resp. begin to take care of your hard
disk!}
\item[155]{invalid FCB}
\item[156]{position error\\
the diskette/hard disk controller has not found a disk track. See
nr. 154 !}
\item[157]{format unknown\\
DOS cannot read the diskette format}
\item[158]{sector not found\\
As nr. 156, but the controller this time could not find a disk
sector in the track.}
\item[159]{end of paper\\
You probably redirected the output of AS to a printer. Assembler
printout can be veeery long...}
\item[160]{device read error\\
The operating system detected an unclassificable read error}
\item[161]{device write error\\
The operating system detected an unclassificable write error}
\item[162]{general failure error\\
The operating system has absolutely no idea of what happened to the
device.}
\end{description}
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Frequently Asked Questions}
In this chapter, I tried to collect some questions that arise very often
together with their answers. Answers to the problems presented in
this chapter might also be found at other places in this manual, but
one maybe does not find them immediately...
\begin{description}
\item[Q:]{I am fed up with DOS. Are there versions of AS for other
operating systems ?}
\item[A:]{Apart from the protected mode version that offers more memory when
working under DOS, ports exist for OS/2 and Unix systems like
Linux (currently in test phase). Versions that help operating
system manufacturers located in Redmont to become even richer are
currently not planned. I will gladly make the sources of AS
available for someone else who wants to become active in this
direction. The C variant is probably the best way to start a
port into this direction. He should however not expect support
from me that goes beyond the sources themselves...}
\vspace{0.3cm}
\item[Q:]{Is a support of the XYZ processor planned for AS?}
\item[A:]{New processors are appearing all the time and I am trying to keep
pace by extending AS. The stack on my desk labeled ''undone''
however never goes below the 4 inch watermark... Wishes coming
from users of course play an important role in the decision which
candidates will be done first. The internet and the rising amount
of documentation published in electronic form make the acquisition
of data books easier than it used to be, but it always becomes
difficult when more exotic or older architectures are wanted. If
the processor family in question is not in the list of families
that are planned (see chapter 1), adding a data book to a request
will have a highly positive influence. Borrowing books is also
fine.}
\vspace{0.3cm}
\item[Q:]{Having a free assembler is really fine, but I now also had use for
a disassembler...and a debugger...a simulator would also really be
cool!}
\item[A:]{AS is a project I work on in leisure time, the time I have when I
do not have to care of how to make my living. AS already takes a
significant portion of that time, and sometimes I make a time-out
to use my soldering iron, enjoy a Tangerine Dream CD, watch TV, or
simply to fulfill some basic human needs... I once started to
write the concept of a disassembler that was designed to create
source code that can be assembled and that automatically
separates code and data areas. I quickly stopped this project
again when I realized that the remaining time simply did not
suffice. I prefer to work on one good program than to struggle for
half a dozen of mediocre apps. Regarded that way, the answer to
the question is unfortunately ''no''...}
\vspace{0.3cm}
\item[Q:]{The screen output of AS is messed up with strange characters, e.g.
arrows and brackets. Why?}
\item[A:]{AS will by default use some ANSI control sequences for screen
control. These sequences will appear unfiltered on your screen
if you did not install an ANSI driver. Either install an ANSI
driver or use the DOS command \tty{SET USEANSI=N} to turn the
sequences off.}
\vspace{0.3cm}
\item[Q:]{AS suddenly terminates with a stack overflow error while
assembling my program. Did my program become to large?}
\item[A:]{Yes and No. Your program's symbol table has grown a bit
unsymmetrically what lead to high recursion depths while accessing
the table. Errors of this type especially happen in the
16-bit-OS/2 version of AS which has a very limited stack area.
Restart AS with the \tty{-A} command line switch. If this does not
help, too complex formula expression are also a possible cause of
stack overflows. In such a case, try to split the formula into
intermediate steps.}
\vspace{0.3cm}
\item[Q:]{It seems that AS does not assemble my program up to the end. It
worked however with an older version of AS (1.39).}
\item[A:]{Newer versions of AS no longer ignore the \tty{END} statement; they
actually terminate assembly when an \tty{END} is encountered.
Especially older include files made by some users tended to
contain an \tty{END} statement at their end. Simply remove the
superfluous \tty{END} statements.}
\vspace{0.3cm}
\item[Q:]{I made an assembly listing of my program because I had some more
complicated assembly errors in my program. Upon closer
investigation of the listing, I found that some branches do not
point to the desired target but instead to themselves!}
\item[A:]{This effect happens in case of forward jumps in the first pass.
The formula parser does not yet have the target address in its symbol
table, and as it is a completely independent module, it has to think of
a value that even does not hurt relative branches with short displacement
lengths. This is the current program counter itself...in the
second pass, the correct values would have appeared, but the second
pass did not happen due to errors in the first one. Correct the
other errors first so that AS gets into the second pass, and the
listing should look more meaningful again.}
\vspace{0.3cm}
\item[Q:]{Assembly of my program works perfectly, however I get an empty
file when I try to convert it with P2HEX or P2BIN.}
\item[A:]{You probably did not set the address filter correctly. This
filter by default cuts out an area ranging from 0 to 32 Kbytes.
If you program contains memory chunks outside this range, they
will be ignored. If your code is completely beyond the 32K
barrier (this is commonplace for processors of the 65xx and 68xx
series), you will get the result you just described. Simply
set the address filter to a range that suits your needs (see the
chapter dealing with P2BIN/P2HEX).}
\vspace{0.3cm}
\item[Q:]{I cannot enter the dollar character when using P2BIN or P2HEX
under Unix. The automatic address range setting does not work, instead
I get strange error messages.}
\item[A:]{Unix shells use the dollar character for expansion of shell
variables. If you want to pass a dollar character to an application,
prefix it with a backslash (\verb!\!). In the special case of the
address range specification for P2HEX and P2BIN, you may also use
\tty{0x} instead of the dollar character, which removes this prblen
completely.}
\end{description}
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Pseudo-Instructions Collected}
This appendix is designed as a quick reference to look up all pseudo
instructions provided by AS. The list is ordered in two parts: The
first part lists the instructions that are always available, and this
list is followed by lists that enumerate the instructions
additionally available for a certain processor family.
\subsubsection{Instructions that are always available}
\input{../doc_DE/pscomm.tex}
There is an additional \tty{SET} resp. \tty{EVAL} instruction (in case
\tty{SET} is already a machine instruction).
\input{../doc_DE/pscpu.tex}
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Predefined Symbols}
\label{AppInternSyms}
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|l|}
\hline
name & data type & definition & meaning \\
\hline
\hline
ARCHITECTURE & string & predef. & target platform AS was \\
& & & compiled for, in the style \\
& & & processor-manufacturer- \\
& & & operating system \\
BIGENDIAN & boolean & dyn.(0) & storage of constants MSB \\
& & & first ? \\
CASESENSITIVE & boolean & normal & case sensitivity in symbol \\
& & & names ? \\
CONSTPI & float & normal & constant Pi (3.1415.....) \\
DATE & string & predef. & date of begin of assembly \\
FALSE & boolean & predef. & 0 = logically ''false'' \\
HASFPU & boolean & dyn.(0) & coprocessor instructions \\
& & & enabled ? \\
HASPMMU & boolean & dyn.(0) & MMU instructions enabled ? \\
INEXTMODE & boolean & dyn.(0) & XM flag set for 4 Gbyte \\
& & & address space ? \\
INLWORDMODE & boolean & dyn.(0) & LW flag set for 32 bit \\
& & & instructions ? \\
INMAXMODE & boolean & dyn.(0) & processor in maximum \\
& & & mode ? \\
INSUPMODE & boolean & dyn.(0) & processor in supervisor \\
& & & mode ? \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Predefined Symbols - Part 1\label{TabInternSyms1}}
\end{table*}
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|l|}
\hline
name & data type & definition & meaning \\
\hline\hline
INSRCMODE & boolean & dyn.(0) & processor in source mode ? \\
FULLPMMU & boolean & dyn.(0/1) & full PMMU instruction set \\
& & & allowed ? \\
LISTON & boolean & dyn.(1) & listing enabled ? \\
MACEXP & boolean & dyn.(1) & expansion of macro con- \\
& & & structs in listing enabled ? \\
MOMCPU & integer & dyn. & number of target CPU \\
& & (68008) & currently set \\
MOMCPUNAME & string & dyn. & name of target CPU \\
& & (68008) & currently set \\
MOMFILE & string & special & current source file \\
& & & (including include files) \\
MOMLINE & integer & special & current line number in \\
& & & source file \\
MOMPASS & integer & special & number of current pass \\
MOMSECTION & string & special & name of current section or \\
& & & empty string if out of any \\
& & & section \\
MOMSEGMENT & string & special & name of address space \\
& & & currently selected \\
& & & with \tty{SEGMENT} \\
& & & \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Predefined Symbols - Part 2\label{TabInternSyms2}}
\end{table*}
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|l|}
\hline
name & data type & definition & meaning \\
\hline\hline
PADDING & boolean & dyn.(1) & pad byte field to even \\
& & & count ? \\
RELAXED & boolean & dyn.(0) & any syntax allowed integer \\
& & & constants ? \\
PC & integer & special & curr. program counter \\
& & & (Thomson) \\
TIME & string & predef. & time of begin of assembly \\
& & & (1. pass) \\
TRUE & integer & predef. & 1 = logically ''true'' \\
VERSION & integer & predef. & version of AS in BCD \\
& & & coding, e.g. 1331 hex for \\
& & & version 1.33p1 \\
WRAPMODE & Integer & predef. & shortened program counter \\
& & & assumed? \\
* & integer & special & curr. program counter \\
& & & (Motorola, Rockwell, Micro- \\
& & & chip, Hitachi) \\
\$ & integer & special & curr. program counter (Intel, \\
& & & Zilog, Texas, Toshiba, NEC, \\
& & & Siemens, AMD) \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Predefined Symbols - Part 3\label{TabInternSyms3}}
\end{table*}
To be exact, boolean symbols are just ordinary integer symbols with the
difference that AS will assign only two different values to them (0 or 1,
corresponding to False or True). AS does not store special symbols
in the symbol table. For performance reasons, they are realized with
hardcoded comparisons directly in the parser. They therefore do not
show up in the assembly listing's symbol table. Predefined symbols
are only set once at the beginning of a pass. The values of dynamic
symbols may in contrast change during assembly as they reflect
settings made with related pseudo instructions. The values added in
parentheses give the value present at the beginning of a pass.
The names given in this table also reflect the valid way to reference
these symbols in case-sensitive mode.
The names listed here should be avoided for own symbols; either one
can define but not access them (special symbols), or one will receive
an error message due to a double-defined symbol. The ugliest case is
when the redefinition of a symbol made by AS at the beginning of a
pass leads to a phase error and an infinite loop...
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Shipped Include Files}
The distribution of AS contains a couple of include files. Apart from
include files that only refer to a specific processor family (and whose
function should be immediately clear to someone who works with this
family), there are a few processor-independent files which include useful
functions. The functions defined in these files shall be explained
briefly in the following sections:
\section{BITFUNCS.INC}
This file defines a couple of bit-oriented functions that might be
hardwired for other assemblers. In the case of AS however, thaey are
implemented with the help of user-defined functions:
\begin{itemize}
\item{{\em mask(start,bits)} returns an integer with {\em bits} bits set
starting at position {\em start};}
\item{{\em invmask(start,bits)} returns one's complement to {\em
mask()};}
\item{{\em cutout(x,start,bits)} returns {\em bits} bits masked out from
{\em x} starting at position {\em start} without shifting them to
position 0;}
\item{{\em hi(x)} returns the second lowest byte (bits 8..15) of {\em
x};}
\item{{\em lo(x)} returns the lowest byte (bits 8..15) of {\em x};}
\item{{\em hiword(x)} returns the second lowest word (bits 16..31) of
{\em x};}
\item{{\em loword(x)} returns the lowest word (bits 0..15) of {\em x};}
\item{{\em odd(x)} returns TRUE if {\em x} is odd;}
\item{{\em even(x)} returns TRUE if {\em x} is even;}
\item{{\em getbit(x,n)} extracts bit {\em n} out of {\em x} and returns
it as 0 or 1;}
\item{{\em shln(x,size,n)} shifts a word {\em x} of length {\em size} to
the left by {\em n} places;}
\item{{\em shrn(x,size,n)} shifts a word {\em x} of length {\em size} to
the right by {\em n} places;}
\item{{\em rotln(x,size,n)} rotates the lowest {\em size} bits of an
integer {\em x} to the left by {\em n} places;}
\item{{\em rotrn(x,size,n)} rotates the lowest {\em size} bits of an
integer {\em x} to the right by {\em n} places;}
\end{itemize}
\section{CTYPE.INC}
This include file is similar to the C include file {\tt ctype.h} which
offers functions to classify characters. All functions deliver either
TRUE or FALSE:
\begin{itemize}
\item{{\em isdigit(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is a valid decimal
digit (0..9);}
\item{{\em isxdigit(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is a valid hexadecimal
digit (0..9, A..F, a..f);}
\item{{\em isupper(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is an uppercase
letter, excluding special national characters);}
\item{{\em islower(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is a lowercase
letter, excluding special national characters);}
\item{{\em isalpha(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is a letter, excluding
special national characters);}
\item{{\em isalnum(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is either a letter or
a valid decimal digit;}
\item{{\em isspace(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is an 'empty' character
(space, form feed, line feed, carriage return, tabulator);}
\item{{\em isprint(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is a printable character,
i.e. no control character up to code 31;}
\item{{\em iscntrl(ch)} is the opposite to {\em isprint()};}
\item{{\em isgraph(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is a printable and
visible character;}
\item{{\em ispunct(ch)} becomes TRUE if {\em ch} is a printable special
character (i.e. neither space nor letter nor number);}
\end{itemize}
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Acknowledgments}
\begin{quote}\it
''If I have seen farther than other men, \\
it is because I stood on the shoulders of giants.'' \\
\hspace{2cm} --Sir Isaac Newton
\rm\end{quote}
\begin{quote}\it
''If I haven't seen farther than other men, \\
it is because I stood in the footsteps of giants.'' \\
\hspace{2cm} --unknown
\rm\end{quote}
\par
If one decides to rewrite a chapter that has been out of date for two
years, it is almost unavoidable that one forgets to mention some of
the good ghosts who contributed to the success this project had up
to now. The first ''thank you'' therefore goes to the people whose
names I unwillingly forgot in the following enumeration!
The concept of AS as a universal cross assembler came from Bernhard
(C.) Zschocke who needed a ''student friendly'', i.e. free cross
assembler for his microprocessor course and talked me into extending
an already existing 68000 assembler. The rest is history...
The microprocessor course held at RWTH Aachen also always provided the
most engaged users (and bug-searchers) of new AS features and
therefore contributed a lot to today's quality of AS.
The internet and FTP have proved to be a big help for spreading AS and
reporting of bugs. My thanks therefore go to the FTP admins (Bernd
Casimir in Stuttgart, Norbert Breidor in Aachen, and J\"urgen Mei\ss\-burger
in J\"ulich). Especially the last one personally engaged a lot to
establish a practicable way in J\"ulich.
As we are just talking about the ZAM: Though Wolfgang E. Nagel is not
personally involved into AS, he is at least my boss and always puts
at least four eyes on what I am doing. Regarding AS, there seems to
be at least one that smiles...
A program like AS cannot be done without appropriate data books and
documentation. I received information from an enormous amount of
people, ranging from tips up to complete data books. An enumeration
follows (as stated before, without guarantee for completelessness!):
Ernst Ahlers, Charles Altmann, Rolf Buchholz, Bernd Casimir,
Gunther Ewald, Stephan Hruschka, Peter Kliegelh\"ofer, Ulf Meinke,
Matthias Paul, Norbert Rosch, Steffen Schmid, Leonhard Schneider,
Ernst Schwab, Michael Schwingen, Oliver Sellke, Christian Stelter,
Oliver Thamm, Thorsten Thiele.
...and an ironic ''thank you'' to Rolf-Dieter-Klein and Tobias Thiel who
demonstrated with their ASM68K how one should \bb{not} do it and thereby
indirectly gave me the impulse to write something better!
I did not entirely write AS on my own. AS contains the OverXMS
routines from Wilbert van Leijen which can move the overlay modules
into the extended memory. A really nice library, easy to use without
problems!
The TMS320C2x/5x code generators and the file \tty{STDDEF2x.INC} come
from Thomas Sailer, ETH Zurich. It's surprising, he only needed one
weekend to understand my coding and to implement the new code generator.
Either that was a long nightshift or I am slowly getting old...
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Changes since Version 1.3}
\begin{itemize}
\item{version 1.31:
\begin{itemize}
\item{additional MCS-51 processor type 80515. The number
is again only stored by the assembler. The file
\tty{STDDEF51.INC} was extended by the necessary SFRs.
\bb{CAUTION!} Some of the 80515 SFRs have moved to other
addresses!}
\item{additional support for the Z80 processor;}
\item{faster 680x0 code generator.}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.32:
\begin{itemize}
\item{syntax for zero page addresses for the 65xx family
was changed from \tty{addr.z} to \tty{$<$addr} (similar to 68xx);}
\item{additional support for the 6800, 6805, 6301, and
6811 processors;}
\item{the 8051 part now also understands \tty{DJNZ, PUSH}, and
\tty{POP} (sorry);}
\item{the assembly listing now not also list the symbols
but also the macros that have been defined;}
\item{additional instructions \tty{IFDEF/IFNDEF} for conditional
assembly based on the existence of a symbol;}
\item{additional instructions \tty{PHASE/DEPHASE} to support code
that shall be moved at runtime to a different address;}
\item{additional instructions \tty{WARNING, ERROR}, and \tty{FATAL} to print
user-defined error messages;}
\item{the file \tty{STDDEF51.INC} additionally contains the macro
\tty{USING} to simplify working with the MCS-51's register
banks;}
\item{command line option \tty{u} to print segment usage;}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.33:
\begin{itemize}
\item{additionally supports the 6809 processor;}
\item{added string variables;}
\item{The instructions \tty{TITLE, PRTINIT, PRTEXIT, ERROR},
\tty{WARNING}, and \tty{FATAL} now expect a string expression.
Constants therefore now have to be enclosed in
'' instead of ' characters. This is also true
for \tty{DB}, \tty{DC.B}, and \tty{BYT};}
\item{additional instruction \tty{ALIGN} to align the program
counter for Intel processors;}
\item{additional instruction \tty{LISTING} to turn the generation
of an assembly listing on or off;}
\item{additional instruction \tty{CHARSET} for user-defined
character sets.}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.34:
\begin{itemize}
\item{the second pass is now omitted if there were errors
in the first pass;}
\item{additional predefined symbol \tty{VERSION} that contains
the version number of AS;}
\item{additional instruction \tty{MESSAGE} to generate additional
messages under program control;}
\item{formula parser is now accessible via string constants;}
\item{if an error in a macro occurs, additionally the line
number in the macro itself is shown;}
\item{additional function \tty{UPSTRING} to convert a string to
all upper-case.}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.35:
\begin{itemize}
\item{additional function \tty{TOUPPER} to convert a single
character to upper case;}
\item{additional instruction \tty{FUNCTION} for user-defined
functions;}
\item{additional command line option \tty{D} to define symbols
from outside;}
\item{the environment variable \tty{ASCMD} for commonly used
command line options was introduced;}
\item{the program will additionally be checked for double
usage of memory areas if the u option is enabled;}
\item{additional command line option \tty{C} to generate a cross
reference list.}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.36:
\begin{itemize}
\item{additionally supports the PIC16C5x and PIC17C4x
processor families;}
\item{the assembly listing additionally shows the nesting
depth of include files;}
\item{the cross reference list additionally shows the
definition point of a symbol;}
\item{additional command line option \tty{A} to force a more
compact layout of the symbol table.}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.37:
\begin{itemize}
\item{additionally supports the processors 8086, 80186,
V30, V35, 8087, and Z180;}
\item{additional instructions \tty{SAVE} and \tty{RESTORE} for an
easier switching of some flags;}
\item{additional operators for logical shifts and bit
mirroring;}
\item{command line options may now be negated with a
plus sign;}
\item{additional filter AS2MSG for a more comfortable
work with AS under Turbo-Pascal 7.0;}
\item{\tty{ELSEIF} now may have an argument for construction
of \tty{IF\--THEN\--ELSE} ladders;}
\item{additional \tty{CASE} construct for a more comfortable
conditional assembly;}
\item{user-defined functions now may have more than one
argument;}
\item{P2HEX can now additionally generate hex files in
a format suitable for 65xx processors;}
\item{BIND, P2HEX, and P2BIN now have the same scheme
for command line processing like AS;}
\item{additional switch \tty{i} for P2HEX to select one out
three possibilities for the termination record;}
\item{additional functions \tty{ABS} and \tty{SGN};}
\item{additional predefined symbols \tty{MOMFILE} and \tty{MOMLINE};}
\item{additional option to print extended error messages;}
\item{additional instruction \tty{IFUSED} and \tty{IFNUSED} to check
whether a symbol has been used so far;}
\item{The environment variables \tty{ASCMD, BINDCMD} etc. now
optionally may contain the name of a file that
provides more space for options;}
\item{P2HEX can now generate the hex formats specified
by Microchip (p4);}
\item{a page length specification of 0 now allows to
suppress automatic formfeeds in the assembly listing
completely (p4);}
\item{symbols defined in the command line now may be
assigned an arbitrary value (p5).}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.38:
\begin{itemize}
\item{changed operation to multipass mode. This enables
AS to generate optimal code even in case of forward
references;}
\item{the 8051 part now also knows the generic \tty{JMP} and
\tty{CALL} instructions;}
\item{additionally supports the Toshiba TLCS-900 series
(p1);}
\item{additional instruction \tty{ASSUME} to inform the assembler
about the 8086's segment register contents (p2);}
\item{additionally supports the ST6 series from
SGS-Thomson (p2);}
\item{..and the 3201x signal processors from Texas
Instruments (p2);}
\item{additional option \tty{F} for P2HEX to override the
automatic format selection (p2);}
\item{P2BIN now can automatically set the start resp.
stop address of the address window by specifying
dollar signs (p2);}
\item{the 8048 code generator now also knows the 8041/42
instruction extensions (p2);}
\item{additionally supports the Z8 microcontrollers (p3).}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.39:
\begin{itemize}
\item{additional opportunity to define sections and local
symbols;}
\item{additional command line switch \tty{h} to force hexadecimal
numbers to use lowercase;}
\item{additional predefined symbol \tty{MOMPASS} to read the
number of the currently running pass;}
\item{additional command line switch \tty{t} to disable
individual parts of the assembly listing;}
\item{additionally knows the L variant of the TLCS-900
series and the MELPS-7700 series from Mitsubishi
(p1);}
\item{P2HEX now also accepts dollar signs as start resp.
stop address (p2);}
\item{additionally supports the TLCS-90 family from
Toshiba (p2);}
\item{P2HEX now also can output data in Tektronix and
16 bit Intel Hex format (p2);}
\item{P2HEX now prints warnings for address overflows
(p2);}
\item{additional include file \tty{STDDEF96.INC} with address
definitions for the TLCS-900 series (p3);}
\item{additional instruction \tty{READ} to allow interactive
input of values during assembly (p3);}
\item{error messages are written to the STDERR channel
instead of standard output (p3);}
\item{the \tty{STOP} instruction missing for the 6811 is now
available (scusi, p3);}
\item{additionally supports the $\mu$PD78(C)1x family from
NEC (p3);}
\item{additionally supports the PIC16C84 from NEC (p3);}
\item{additional command line switch \tty{E} to redirect error
messages to a file (p3);}
\item{The MELPS-7700's 'idol' 65816 is now also available
(p4);}
\item{the ST6 pseudo instruction \tty{ROMWIN} has been removed
was integrated into the \tty{ASSUME} instruction (p4);}
\item{additionally supports the 6804 from SGS-Thomson (p4);}
\item{via the \tty{NOEXPORT} option in a macro definition, it is
now possible to define individually for every macro
whether it shall appear in the \tty{MAC} file or not (p4);}
\item{the meaning of \tty{MACEXP} regarding the expansion of
macros has changed slightly due to the additional
\tty{NOEXPAND} option in the macro definition (p4);}
\item{The additional \tty{GLOBAL} option in the macro definition
now additionally allows to define macros that are
uniquely identified by their section name (p4).}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.40:
\begin{itemize}
\item{additionally supports the DSP56000 from Motorola;}
\item{P2BIN can now also extract the lower resp. upper
half of a 32-bit word;}
\item{additionally supports the TLCS-870 and TLCS-47
families from Toshiba (p1);}
\item{a prefixed \tty{!} now allows to reach machine instructions
hidden by a macro (p1);}
\item{the \tty{GLOBAL} instruction now allows to export symbols
in a qualified style (p1);}
\item{the additional \tty{r} command line switch now allows to
print a list of constructs that forced additional
passes (p1);}
\item{it is now possible to omit an argument to the \tty{E}
command line option; AS will then choose a fitting
default (p1);}
\item{the \tty{t} command line option now allows to suppress
line numbering in the assembly listing (p1);}
\item{escape sequences may now also be used in ASCII style
integer constants (p1);}
\item{the additional pseudo instruction \tty{PADDING} now allows
to enable or disable the insertion of padding bytes
in 680x0 mode (p2);}
\item{\tty{ALIGN} is now a valid instruction for all targets
(p2);}
\item{additionally knows the PIC16C64's SFRs (p2);}
\item{additionally supports the 8096 from Intel (p2);}
\item{\tty{DC} additionally allows to specify a repetition factor
(r3);}
\item{additionally supports the TMS320C2x family from Texas
Instruments (implementation done by Thomas Sailer, ETH
Zurich, r3); P2HEX has been extended appropriately;}
\item{an equation sign may be used instead of \tty{EQU} (r3);}
\item{additional \tty{ENUM} instruction to define enumerations
(r3);}
\item{\tty{END} now has a real effect (r3);}
\item{additional command line switch \tty{n} to get the internal
error numbers in addition to the error messages (r3);}
\item{additionally supports the TLCS-9000 series from
Toshiba (r4);}
\item{additionally supports the TMS370xxx series from Texas
Instruments, including a new \tty{DBIT} pseudo instruction
(r5);}
\item{additionally knows the DS80C320's SFR's (r5);}
\item{the macro processor is now also able to include files
from within macros. This required to modify the
format of error messages slightly. If you use
AS2MSG, replace it with the new version! (r5)}
\item{additionally supports the 80C166 from Siemens (r5);}
\item{additional \tty{VAL} function to evaluate string
expressions (r5);}
\item{it is now possible to construct symbol names with the
help of string expressions enclosed in braces (r5);}
\item{additionally knows the 80C167's peculiarities (r6);}
\item{the MELPS740's special page addressing mode is now
supported (r6);}
\item{it is now possible to explicitly reference a symbol
from a certain section by appending its name enclosed
in brackets. The construction with an \tty{@} sign has
been removed! (r6)}
\item{additionally supports the MELPS-4500 series from
Mitsubishi (r7);}
\item{additionally supports H8/300 and H8/300H series from
Hitachi (r7);}
\item{settings made with \tty{LISTING} resp. \tty{MACEXP} may now be
read back from predefined symbols with the same names
(r7);}
\item{additionally supports the TMS320C3x series from Texas
Instruments (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the SH7000 from Hitachi (r8);}
\item{the Z80 part has been extended to also support the
Z380 (r9);}
\item{the 68K part has been extended to know the
differences of the 683xx micro controllers (r9);}
\item{a label not any more has to be placed in the first
row if it is marked with a double dot (r9);}
\item{additionally supports the 75K0 series from NEC (r9);}
\item{the additional command line option o allows to set
a user-defined name for the code file (r9);}
\item{the \verb!~~! operator has been moved to a bit more senseful
ranking (r9);}
\item{\tty{ASSUME} now also knows the 6809's DPR register and its
implications (pardon, r9);}
\item{the 6809 part now also knows the 6309's secret
extensions (r9);}
\item{binary constants now also may be written in a C-like
notation (r9);}
\end{itemize}}
\item{version 1.41:
\begin{itemize}
\item{the new predefined symbol \tty{MOMSEGMENT} allows to
inquire the currently active segment;}
\item{\tty{:=} is now allowed as a short form for \tty{SET/EVAL};}
\item{the new command line switch \tty{q} allows to force a
''silent'' assembly;}
\item{the key word \tty{PARENT} to reference the parent section
has been extended by \tty{PARENT0..PARENT9};}
\item{the PowerPC part has been extended by the
microcontroller versions MPC505 and PPC403;}
\item{symbols defined with \tty{SET} or \tty{EQU} may now be assigned
to a certain segment (r1);}
\item{the SH7000 part now also knows the SH7600's
extensions (and should compute correct
displacements...) (r1);}
\item{the 65XX part now differentiates between the 65C02
and 65SC02 (r1);}
\item{additionally to the symbol \tty{MOMCPU}, there is now also
a string symbol \tty{MOMCPUNAME} that contains the
processor's full name (r1);}
\item{P2HEX now also knows the 32-bit variant of the Intel
hex format (r1);}
\item{additionally knows the 87C750's limitations (r2);}
\item{the internal numbers for fatal errors have been moved
to the area starting at 10000, making more space for
normal error messages (r2);}
\item{unused symbols are now marked with a star in the
symbol table (r2);}
\item{additionally supports the 29K family from AMD (r2);}
\item{additionally supports the M16 family from Mitsubishi
(r2);}
\item{additionally supports the H8/500 family from Hitachi
(r3);}
\item{the number of data bytes printed per line by P2HEX
can now be modified (r3);}
\item{the number of the pass that starts to output warnings
created by the \tty{r} command line switch is now variable
(r3);}
\item{the macro processor now knows a \tty{WHILE} statement that
allows to repeat a piece of code a variable number of
times (r3);}
\item{the \tty{PAGE} instruction now also allows to set the line
with of the assembly listing (r3);}
\item{CPU aliases may now be defined to define new pseudo
processor devices (r3);}
\item{additionally supports the MCS/251 family from Intel
(r3);}
\item{if the cross reference list has been enabled, the
place of the first definition is given for double
definitions of symbols (r3);}
\item{additionally supports the TMS320C5x family from Texas
Instruments (implementation done by Thomas Sailer,
ETH Zurich, r3);}
\item{the OS/2 version should now also correctly work with
long file names. If one doesn't check every s**t
personally... (r3);}
\item{the new pseudo instruction \tty{BIGENDIAN} now allows to
select in MCS-51/251 mode whether constants should
be stored in big endian or little endian format (r3);}
\item{the 680x0 part now differentiates between the full
and reduced MMU instruction set; a manual toggle can
be done via the \tty{FULLPMMU} instruction (r3);}
\item{the new command line option \tty{I} allows to print a list
of all include files paired with their nesting level
(r3);}
\item{additionally supports the 68HC16 family from Motorola
(r3);}
\item{the \tty{END} statement now optionally accepts an argument
as entry point for the program (r3);}
\item{P2BIN and P2HEX now allow to move the contents of a
code file to a different address (r4);}
\item{comments appended to a \tty{SHARED} instruction are now
copied to the share file (r4);}
\item{additionally supports the 68HC12 family from Motorola
(r4);}
\item{additionally supports the XA family from Philips
(r4);}
\item{additionally supports the 68HC08 family from Motorola
(r4);}
\item{additionally supports the AVR family from Atmel (r4);}
\item{to achieve better compatibility to the AS11 from
Motorola, the pseudo instructions \tty{FCB, FDB, FCC}, and
\tty{RMB} were added (r5);}
\item{additionally supports the M16C from Mitsubishi (r5);}
\item{additionally supports the COP8 from National
Semiconductor (r5);}
\item{additional instructions \tty{IFB} and \tty{IFNB} for conditional
assembly (r5);}
\item{the new \tty{EXITM} instruction now allows to terminate a
macro expansion (r5);}
\item{additionally supports the MSP430 from Texas
Instruments (r5);}
\item{\tty{LISTING} now knows the additional variants
\tty{NOSKIPPED} and \tty{PURECODE} to remove code that
was not assembled from the listing (r5);}
\item{additionally supports the 78K0 family from NEC (r5);}
\item{\tty{BIGENDIAN} is now also available in PowerPC mode
(r5);}
\item{additional \tty{BINCLUDE} instruction to include binary
files (r5);}
\item{additional \tty{TOLOWER} and \tty{LOWSTRING} functions to convert
characters to lower case (r5);}
\item{it is now possible to store data in other segments
than \tty{CODE}. The file format has been extended
appropriately (r5);}
\item{the \tty{DS} instruction to reserve memory areas is now
also available in Intel mode (r5);}
\item{the \tty{U} command line switch now allows to switch AS
into a case sensitive mode that differentiates
between upper and lower case in the names of symbols,
user-defined functions, macros, macro parameters, and
sections (r5);}
\item{\tty{SFRB} now also knows the mapping rules for bit
addresses in the RAM areas; warnings are generated
for addresses that are not bit addressable (r5);}
\item{additional instructions \tty{PUSHV} and \tty{POPV} to save symbol
values temporarily (r5);}
\item{additional functions \tty{BITCNT, FIRSTBIT, LASTBIT}, and
\tty{BITPOS} for bit processing (r5);}
\item{the 68360 is now also known as a member of the CPU32
processors (r5);}
\item{additionally supports the ST9 family from SGS-Thomson
(r6);}
\item{additionally supports the SC/MP from National
Semiconductor (r6);}
\item{additionally supports the TMS70Cxx family from Texas
Instruments (r6);}
\item{additionally supports the TMS9900 family from Texas
Instruments (r6);}
\item{additionally knows the 80296's instruction set
extensions (r6);}
\item{the supported number of Z8 derivatives has been
extended (r6);}
\item{additionally knows the 80C504's mask defects (r6);}
\item{additional register definition file for Siemens' C50x
processors (r6);}
\item{additionally supports the ST7 family from SGS-Thomson
(r6);}
\item{the Tntel pseudo instructions for data disposal are
now also valid for the 65816/MELPS-7700 (r6);}
\item{for the 65816/MELPS-7700, the address length may now
be set explicitly via prefixes (r6);}
\item{additionally supports the 8X30x family from Signetics
(r6);}
\item{from now on, \tty{PADDING} is enabled by default only
for the 680x0 family (r7);}
\item{the new predefined symbol \tty{ARCHITECTURE} can now be
used to query the platform AS was compiled for (r7);}
\item{additional statements \tty{STRUCT} and \tty{ENDSTRUCT}
to define data structures (r7);}
\item{hex and object files for the AVR tools may now be generated
directly (r7);}
\item{\tty{MOVEC} now also knows the 68040's control registers
(r7);}
\item{additional \tty{STRLEN} function to calculate the length
of a string (r7);}
\item{additional ability to define register symbols (r7 currently
only Atmel AVR);}
\item{additionally knows the 6502's undocumented instructions (r7);}
\item{P2HEX and P2BIN now optionally can erase the input files
automatically (r7);}
\item{P2BIN can additionally prepend the entry address to the
resulting image (r7);}
\item{additionally supports the ColdFire family from Motorola as a
variation of the 680x0 core (r7);}
\item{\tty{BYT/FCB, ADR/FDB}, and \tty{FCC} now also allow the
repetition factor known from DC (r7);}
\item{additionally supports Motorola's M*Core (r7);}
\item{the SH7000 part now also knows the SH7700's
extensions (r7);}
\item{the 680x0 part now also knows the 68040's additional
instructions (r7);}
\item{the 56K part now also knows the instruction set extensions
up to the 56300 (r7).}
\item{the new \tty{CODEPAGE} statement now allows to keep several
character sets in parallel (r8);}
\item{The argument variations for \tty{CHARSET} have been extended
(r8);}
\item{New string functions \tty{SUBSTR} and \tty{STRSTR} (r8);}
\item{additional \tty{IRPC} statement in the macro processor (r8);}
\item{additional \tty{RADIX} statement to set the default numbering
system for integer constants (r8);}
\item{instead of {\tt ELSEIF}, it is now valid to simply write {\tt
ELSE} (r8);}
\item{$==$ may be used as equality operator instead of $=$ (r8);}
\item{\tty{BRANCHEXT} for the Philips XA now allows to automatically
extend the reach of short branches (r8);}
\item{debug output is now also possible in NoICE format (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the i960 family from Intel (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the $\mu$PD7720/7725 signal processors
from NEC (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the $\mu$PD77230 signal processor from
NEC (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the SYM53C8xx SCSI processors from
Symbios Logic (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the 4004 from Intel (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the SC14xxx series of National (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the instruction extensions of the PPC
403GC (r8);}
\item{additional command line option {\tt cpu} to set the default
target processor (r8);}
\item{key files now also may be referenced from the command line
(r8);}
\item{additional command line option {\tt shareout} to set the
output file for SHARED definitions (r8);}
\item{new statement {\tt WRAPMODE} to support AVR processors with
a shortened program counter (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the C20x instruction subset in the C5x
part (r8);}
\item{hexadecimal address specifications for the tools now may also
be made in C notation (r8);}
\item{the numbering system for integer results in \verb!\{...}!
expressions is now configurable via \tty{OUTRADIX} (r8);}
\item{the register syntax for 4004 register pairs has been corrected
(r8);}
\item{additionally supports the F$^{2}$MC8L family from Fujitsu
(r8);}
\item{P2HEX now allows to set the minimum address length for S
record addresses (r8);}
\item{additionally supports the ACE family from Fairchild (r8);}
\item{{\tt REG} is now also allowed for PowerPCs (r8);}
\item{additional switch in P2HEX to relocate all addresses (r8);}
\item{The switch \tty{x} now additionally allows a second level
of detailness to print the source line in question (r8).}
\end{itemize}}
\end{itemize}
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\chapter{Hints for the AS Source Code}
\label{ChapSource}
As I already mentioned in the introduction, I release the source code of
AS on request. The following shall give a few hints to their usage.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Language Preliminaries}
In the beginning, AS was a program written in Turbo-Pascal. This was
roughly at the end of the eighties, and there were a couple of reasons for
this choice: First, I was much more used to it than to any C compiler, and
compared to Turbo Pascal's IDE, all DOS-based C compilers were just
crawling along. In the beginning of 1997 however, it became clear that
things had changed: One factor was that Borland had decided to let its
confident DOS developers down (once again, explicitly no 'thank you', you
boneheads from Borland!) and replaced version 7.0 of Borland Pascal with
something called 'Delphi', which is probably a wonderful tool to develop
Windows programs which consist of 90\% user interface and accidentaly a
little bit of content, however completely useless for command-line driven
programs like AS. Furthermore, my focus of operating systems had made a
clear move towards Unix, and I probably could have waited arbitrarily long
for a Borland Pascal for Linux (to all those remarking now that Borland
would be working on something like that: this is {\em Vapourware}, don\'t
believe them anything until you can go into a shop and actually buy it!).
It was therefore clear that C was the way to go.
After this eperience what results the usage of 'island systems' may have,
I put a big emphasize on portability while doing the translation to C;
however, since AS for example deals with binary data in an exactly format
and uses operating systen-specific functions at some places which may need
adaptions when one compliles AS the first time for a new platform.
AS is tailored for a C compiler that conforms to the ANSI C standard; C++
is explicitly not required. If you are still using a compiler conforming
to the outdated Kernighan\&Ritchie standard, you should consider getting a
newer compiler: The ANSI C standard has been fixed in 1989 and there
should be an ANSI C compiler for every contemporary platform, maybe by
using the old compiler to build GNU-C. Though there are some switches in
the source code to bring it nearer to K\&R, this is not an officially
supported feature which I only use internally to support a quite antique
Unix. Everything left to say about K\&R is located in the file {\tt
README.KR}.
The inclusion of some additional features not present in the Pascal
version (e.g. dynamically loadable message files, test suite, automatic
generation of the documentation from {\em one} source format) has made the
source tree substantially more complicated. I will attempt to unwire
everything step by step:
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Capsuling System dependencies}
As I already mentioned, As has been tailored to provide maximum platform
independence and portability (at least I believe so...). This means
packing all platform dependencies into as few files as possible. I will
describe these files now, and this section is the first one because it is
probably one of the most important:
The Build of all components of AS takes place via a central {\tt
Makefile}. To make it work, it has to be accompanied by a fitting {\tt
Makefile.def} that gives the platform dependent settings like compiler
flags. The subdirectory {\tt Makefile.def-samples} contains a couple of
includes that work for widespread platforms (but which need not be
optimal...). In case your platform is not among them, you may take the
file {\tt Makefile.def.tmpl} as a starting point (and send me the
result!).
A further component to capure system dependencies is the file {\tt
sysdefs.h}. Practically all compilers predefine a couple of preprocessor
symbols that describe the target processor and the used operating system.
For example, on a Sun Sparc under Solaris equipped with the GNU compiler,
the symbols \verb!__sparc! and \verb!__SVR4!. {\tt sysdefs.h} exploits
these symbols to provide a homogeneous environment for the remaining,
system-independent files. Especially, this covers integer datatypes of a
specific length, but it may also include the (re)definition of C functions
which are not present or non-standard-like on a specific platform. It's
best to read this files yourself if you like to know which things may
occur... Generally, the \verb!#ifdef! statement are ordered in two
levels: First, a specific processor platform is selected, the the
operating systems are sorted out in such a section.
If you port AS to a new platform, you have to find two symbols typical for
this platform and extend {\tt sysdefs.h} accordingly. Once again, I'm
interested in the result...
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{System-Independent Files}
...represent the largest part of all modules. Describing all functions in
detail is beyond the scope of this description (those who want to know
more probably start studying the sources, my programming style isn't that
horrible either...), which is why I can only give a short list at this
place with all modules their function:
\subsection{Modules Used by AS}
\subsubsection{as.c}
This file is AS's root: it contains the {\em main()} function of AS, the
processing of all command line options, the overall control of all passes
and parts of the macro processor.
\subsubsection{asmallg.c}
This module processes all statements defined for all processor targets,
e.g. \tty{EQU} and \tty{ORG}. The \tty{CPU} pseudo-op used to switch
among different processor targets is also located here.
\subsubsection{asmcode.c}
This module contains the bookkeping needed for the code output file. It
exports an interface that allows to open and close a code file and offers
functions to write code to (or take it back from) the file. An important
job of this module is to buffer the write process, which speeds up
execution by writing the code in larger blocks.
\subsubsection{asmdebug.c}
AS can optionally generate debug information for other tools like
simulators or debuggers, allowing a backward reference to the source code.
They get collected in this module and can be output after assembly in one
of several formats.
\subsubsection{asmdef.c}
This modules only contains declarations of constants used in different
places and global variables.
\subsubsection{asmfnums.c}
AS assigns internally assigns incrementing numbers for each used source
file. These numbers are used for quick referencing. Assignment of
numbers and the conversion between names and numbers takes place here.
\subsubsection{asmif.c}
Here ara ll routines located controlling conditional assembly. The most
important exported variable is a flag called \tty{IfAsm} which controls
whether code generation is currently turned on or off.
\subsubsection{asminclist.c}
This module holds the definition of the list stucture that allows AS to
print the nesting of include files to the assembly list file.
\subsubsection{asmitree.c}
When searching for the mnemonic used in a line of code, a simple linear
comparison with all available machine instructions (as it is still done in
most code generators, for reasons of simplicity and laziness) is not
necessary the most effective method. This module defines two improved
structures (binary tree and hash table) which provide a more efficient
search and are destined to replace the simple linear search on a
step-by-step basis...priorities as needed...
\subsubsection{asmmac.c}
Routines to store and execute macro constructs are located in this module.
The real macro processor is (as already mentioned) in {\tt as.c}.
\subsubsection{asmpars.c}
Here we really go into the innards: This module stores the symbol tables
(global and local) in two binary trees. Further more, there is a quite
large procedure {\tt EvalExpression} which analyzes and evaluates a (formula)
expression. The procedure returns the result (integer, floating point, or
string) in a varaint record. However, to evaluate expressions during code
generation, one should better use the functions \tty{EvalIntExpression,
EvalFloatExpression}, and \tty{EvalStringExpression}. Modifications for
tha esake of adding new target processors are unnecessary in this modules
and should be done with extreme care, since you are touching something
like 'AS's roots'.
\subsubsection{asmsub.c}
This module collects a couple of commonly used subroutines which primarily
deal with error handling and 'advanced' string processing.
\subsubsection{bpemu.c}
As already mentioned at the beginning, AS originally was a program written
in Borland Pascal. For some intrinsic functions of the compiler, it was
simpler to emulate those than to touch all places in the source code where
they are used. Well...
\subsubsection{chunks.c}
This module defines a data type to deal with a list of address ranges.
This functionality is needed by AS for allocation lists; furthermore,
P2BIN and P2HEX use such lists to warn about overlaps.
\subsubsection{cmdarg.c}
This module implements the overall mechanism of command line arguments.
It needs a specification of allowed arguments, splits the command line and
triggers the appropriate callbacks. In detail, the mechanism includes
the following:
\begin{itemize}
\item{Processing of arguments located in an environment variable or
a corresponding file;}
\item{Return of a set describing which command line arguments have not
been processed;}
\item{A backdoor for situations when an overlaying IDE converts the passed
command line completely into upper or lower case.}
\end{itemize}
\subsubsection{codepseudo.c}
You will find at this place pseudo instructions that are used by
a subset of code generators. On the one hand, this is the Intel group of
\tty{DB..DT}, and on the other hand their counterparts for 8/16 bit CPUs
from Motorola or Rockwell. Someone who wants to extend AS by a
processor fitting into one of these groups can get the biggest part
of the necessary pseudo instructions with one call to this module.
\subsubsection{codevars.c}
For reasons of memory efficiency, some variables commonly used by diverse
code generators.
\subsubsection{endian.c}
Yet another bit of machine dependence, however one you do not have to
spend attention on: This module automatically checks at startup whether
a host machine is little or big endian. Furthermore, checks are made if
the type definitions made for integer variables in {\tt sysdefs.h} really
result in the correct lengths.
\subsubsection{headids.c}
At this place, all processor families supported by AS are collected with
their header IDs (see chapter \ref{SectCodeFormat}) and the output format
to be used by default by P2HEX. The target of this table is to centralize
the addition of a new processor as most as possible, i.e. in contrast to
earlier versions of AS, no further modifications of tool sources are
necessary.
\subsubsection{ioerrs.c}
The conversion from error numbers to clear text messages is located here.
I hope I'll never hit a system that does not define the numbers as macros,
because I would have to rewrite this module completely...
\subsubsection{nlmessages.c}
The C version of AS reads all messages from files at runtime after the
language to be used is clear. The format of message files is not a simple
one, but instead a special compact and preindexed format that is generated
at runtime by a program called 'rescomp' (we will talk about it later).
This module is the counterpart to rescomp that reads the correct language
part into a character field and offers functions to access the messages.
\subsubsection{nls.c}
This module checks which country-dependent settings (date and time format,
country code) are present at runtime. Unfortunately, this is a highly
operating system-dependend task, and currently, there are only three
methods defines: The MS-DOS method, the OS/2 method and the typical Unix
method via {\em locale} functions. For all other systems, there is
unfortunately currently only \verb!NO_NLS! available...
\subsubsection{stdhandl.c}
On the one hand, here is a special open function located knowing the
special strings {\tt !0...!2} as file names and creating duplicates of the
standard file handles {\em stdin, stdout,} and {\em stderr}. On the other
hand, investiagations are done whether the standard output has been
redirected to a device or a file. On no-Unix systems, this unfortunately
also incorporates some special operations.
\subsubsection{stringlists.c}
This is just a little 'hack' that defines routines to deal with linear
lists of strings, which are needed e.g. in the macro processor of AS.
\subsubsection{strutil.c}
Some commonly needed string operations have found their home here.
\subsubsection{version.c}
The currently valid version is centrally stored here for AS and all other
tools.
\subsubsection{code????.c}
These modules form the main part of AS: each module contains the code
generator for a specific processor family.
\subsection{Additional Modules for the Tools}
\subsubsection{hex.c}
A small module to convert integer numbers to hexadecimal strings. It's
not absolutely needed in C any more (except for the conversion of {\em
long long} variables, which unfortunately not all {\tt printf()}'s
support), but it somehow survived the porting from Pascal to C.
\subsubsection{p2bin.c}
The sources of P2BIN.
\subsubsection{p2hex.c}
The sources of P2HEX.
\subsubsection{pbind.c}
The sources of BIND.
\subsubsection{plist.c}
The sources of PLIST.
\subsubsection{toolutils.c}
All subroutines needed by several tools are collected here, e.g. for
reading of code files.
\section{Modules Needed During the Build of AS}
\subsubsection{a2k.c}
This is a minimal filter converting ANSI C source files to
Kernighan-Ritchie style. To be exact: only function heads are converted,
even this only when they are roughly formatted like my programming style.
Noone should therefore think this were a universal C parser!
\subsubsection{addcr.c}
A small filter needed during installation on DOS- or OS/2-systems. Since
DOS and OS/2 use a CR/LF for a newline, inc ontrast to the single LF of
Unix systems, all assembly include files provided with AS are sent through
this filter during assembly.
\subsubsection{bincmp.c}
For DOS and OS/2, this module takes the task of the {\em cmp} command,
i.e. the binary comparison of files during the test run. While this would
principally be possible with the {\em comp} command provided with the OS,
{\em bincmp} does not have any nasty interactive questions (which seem to
be an adventure to get rid of...)
\subsubsection{findhyphen.c}
This is the submodule in {\em tex2doc} providing hyphenation of words.
The algorithm used for this is shamelessly stolen from TeX.
\subsubsection{grhyph.c}
The definition of hyphenation rules for the german language.
\subsubsection{rescomp.c}
This is AS's 'resource compiler', i.e. the tool that converts a readable
file with string resources into a fast, indexed format.
\subsubsection{tex2doc.c}
A tool that converts the LaTeX documentation of AS into an ASCII format.
\subsubsection{tex2html.c}
A tool that converts the LaTeX documentation of AS into an HTML document.
\subsubsection{umlaut.c and unumlaut.c}
These tiny programs convert national special characters between their
coding in ISO8859-1 (all AS files use this format upon delivery) and their
system-specific coding. Apart from a plain ASCII7 variant, there are
currently the IBM character sets 437 and 850.
\subsubsection{ushyph.c}
The definition of hyphenation rules for the english language.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Generation of Message Files}
As already mentioned, the C source tree of AS uses a dynamic load
principle for all (error) messages. In contrast to the Pasacl sources
where all messages were bundled in an include file and compiled into the
programs, this method eliminates the need to provide AS in multiple
language variants; there is only one version which checks for the
langugage to be used upon runtime and loads the corresponding component
from the message files. Just to remind: Under DOS and OS/2, the {\tt
COUNTRY} setting is queried, while under Unix, the environment variables
{\tt LC\_MESSAGES, LC\_ALL,} and {\tt LANG} are checked.
\subsection{Format of the Source Files}
A source file for the message compiler {\em rescomp} usually has the
suffix {\tt .res}. The message compiler generates one or two files from a
source:
\begin{itemize}
\item{a binary file which is read at runtime by AS resp. its tools}
\item{optionally one further C header file assigning an index number to
all messages. These index numbers in combination with an index
table in the binary file allow a fast access to to individual
messages at runtime.}
\end{itemize}
The source file for the message compiler is a pure ASCII file and can
therefore be modified with any editor. It consists of a sequence of
control commands with parameters. Empty lines and lines beginning with a
semicolon are ignored. Inclusion of other files is possible via the {\tt
Include} statement:
\begin{verbatim}
Include <Datei>
\end{verbatim}
The first two statements in every source file must be two statements
describing the languages defined in the following. The more important one
is {\tt Langs}, e.g.:
\begin{verbatim}
Langs DE(049) EN(001,061)
\end{verbatim}
describes that two languages will be defined in the rest of the file. The
first one shall be used under Unix when the language has been set to {\tt
DE} via environment variable. Similarly, It shall be used under DOS and
OS/2 when the country code was set to 049. Similarly, the second set
shall be used for the settings {\tt DE} resp. 061 or 001. While multiple
'telephone numbers' may point to a single language, the assignment to a
Unix language code is a one-to-one correspondence. This is no problem in
practice since the {\tt LANG} variables Unix uses describe subversions via
appendices, e.g.:
\begin{verbatim}
de.de
de.ch
en.us
\end{verbatim}
AS only compares the beginning of the strings and therefore still comes to
the right decision.
The {\tt Default} statement defines the language that shall be used if
either no language has been set at all or a language is used that is not
mentioned in the asrgument list of {\tt Langs}. This is typically the
english language:
\begin{verbatim}
Default EN
\end{verbatim}
These definitions are followed by an arbitrary number of {\tt Message}
statements, i.e. definitions of messages:
\begin{verbatim}
Message ErrName
": Fehler "
": error "
\end{verbatim}
In case {\em n} languages were announced via the {\tt Langs} statement,
the message compiler takes {\bf exactly} the following {\em n} as the
strings to be stored. It is therefore impossible to leave out certain
languages for individual messages, and an empty line following the strings
should in no way be misunderstood as an end marker for the list; inserted
lines between statements only serve purposes of better readability. It is
however allowed to split individual messages across multiple lines in the
source file; all lines except for the last one have to be ended with a
backslash as continuation character:
\begin{verbatim}
Message TestMessage2
"Dies ist eine" \
"zweizeilige Nachricht"
"This is a" \
"two-line message"
\end{verbatim}
As already mentioned, source files are pure ASCII files; national special
characters may be placed in message texts (and the compiler will correctly
pass them to the resulting file), a big disadvantage however is that such
a file is not fully portable any more: in case it is ported to another
system using a different coding for national special characters, the user
will probably be confronted with strange characters at runtime...special
character should therefore always be written via special sequences
borrowed from HTML resp. SGML (see table \ref{TabSpecChars}). Linefeeds
can be inserted into a line via \verb!\n!, similar to C.
\begin{table*}[htb]
\begin{center}\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
Sequenz... & ergibt... \\
\hline
\hline
\verb!&auml; &ouml; &uuml;! & "a "o "u (Umlaute)\\
\verb!&Auml; &Ouml; &Uuml;! & "A "O "U \\
\verb!&szlig;! & "s (scharfes s) \\
\verb!&agrave; &egrave; &igrave; &ograve; &ugrave;! & \'a \'e \'i \'o \'u (Accent \\
\verb!&Agrave; &Egrave; &Igrave; &Ograve; &Ugrave;! & \'A \'E \'I \'O \'U grave) \\
\verb!&aacute; &eacute; &iacute; &oacute; &uacute;! & \`a \`e \`i \`o \`u (Accent \\
\verb!&Aacute; &Eacute; &Iacute; &Oacute; &Uacute;! & \`A \`E \`I \`O \`I agiu) \\
\verb!&acirc; &ecirc; &icirc; &ocirc; &ucirc;! & \^a \^e \^i \^o \^u (Accent \\
\verb!&Acirc; &Ecirc; &Icirc; &Ocirc; &Ucirc;! & \^A \^E \^I \^O \^U circonflex) \\
\verb!&ccedil; &Ccedil;! & \c{c} \c{C}(Cedilla) \\
\verb!&ntilde; &Ntilde;! & \~n \~N \\
\verb!&aring; &Aring;! & \aa \AA \\
\verb!&aelig; &Aelig;! & \ae \AE \\
\verb!&iquest; &iexcl;! & umgedrehtes ! oder ? \\
\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\caption{Sonderzeichenschreibweise des {\em rescomp}\label{TabSpecChars}}
\end{table*}
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Creation of Documentation}
A source distribution of AS contains this documentation in LaTeX format
only. Other formats are created from this one automatically via tools
provided with AS. One reason is to reduce the size of the source
distribution, another reason is that changes in the documentation only
have to be made once, avoiding inconsistencies.
LaTex was chosen as the master format because...because...because it's
been there all the time before. Additionally, TeX is almost arbitrarily
portable and fits quite well to the demands of AS. A standard
distribution therefore allows a nice printout on about any printer; for a
conversion to an ASCII file that used to be part of earlier distributions,
the converter {\em tex2doc} is included, additionally the converter {\em
tex2html} allowing to put the manual into the Web.
Generation of the documentation is started via a simple
\begin{verbatim}
make docs
\end{verbatim}
The two converters mentioned are be built first, then applied to the TeX
documentation and finally, LaTeX itself is called. All this of course for
all languages...
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Test Suite}
Since AS deals with binary data of a precisely defined structure, it is
naturally sensitive for system and compiler dependencies. To reach at
least a minimum amount of secureness that everything went right during
compilation, a set of test sources is provided in the subdirectory {\tt
tests} that allows to test the freshly built assembler. These programs
are primarily trimmed to find faults in the translation of the machine
instruction set, which are commonplace when integer lenghts vary.
Target-independent features like the macro processors or conditional
assembly are only casually tested, since I assume that they work
everywhere when they work for me...
The test run is started via a simple {\em make test}. Each test program
is assembled, converted to a binary file, and compared to a reference
image. A test is considered to be passed if and only if the reference
image and the newly generated one are identical on a bit-by-bit basis. At
the end of the test, the assembly time for every test is printed (those
who want may extend the file BENCHES with these results), accompanied with
a success or failure message. Track down every error that occurs, even if
it occurs in a processor target you are never going to use! It is always
possible that this points to an error that may also come up for other
targets, but by coincidence not in the test cases.
%%---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\section{Adding a New Target Processor}
The probably most common reason to modify the source code of AS is to add
a new target processor. Apart from adding the new module to the
Makefile, there are few places in other modules that need a modification.
The new module will do the rest by registering itself in the list of code
generators. I will describe the needed steps in a cookbook style in the
following sections:
\subsubsection{Choosing the Processor's Name}
The name chosen for the new processor has to fulfill two criterias:
\begin{enumerate}
\item{The name must not be already in use by another processor. If one
starts AS without any parameters, a list of the names already in
use will be printed.}
\item{If the name shall appear completely in the symbol \tty{MOMCPU}, it may
not contain other letters than A..F (except right at the
beginning). The variable \tty{MOMCPUNAME} however will always report
the full name during assembly. Special characters are generally
disallowed, lowercase letters will be converted by the \tty{CPU}
command to uppercase letters and are therefore senseless in the
processor name.}
\end{enumerate}
The first step for registration is making an entry for the new processor
(family) in the file {\tt headids.c}. As already mentioned, this file is
also used by the tools and specifies the code ID assigned to a processor
family, along with the default hex file format to be used. I would like
to have some coordination before choosing the ID...
\subsubsection{Definition of the Code Generator Module}
The unit's name that shall be responsible for the new processor
should bear at least some similarity to the processor's name (just
for the sake of uniformity) and should be named in the style of
\tty{code....}. The head with include statements is best taken from
another existing code generator.
Except for an initialization function that has to be called at the
begginning of the {\tt main()} function in module {\tt as.c}, the new
module neither has to export variables nor functions as the complete
communication is done at runtime via indirect calls. They are simply done
by a call to the function
\tty{AddCPU} for each processor type that shall be treated by this unit:
\begin{verbatim}
CPUxxxx:=AddCPU('XXXX',SwitchTo_xxxx);
\end{verbatim}
\tty{'XXXX'} is the name chosen for the processor which later must be used
in assembler programs to switch AS to this target processor.
\tty{SwitchTo\_xxxx} (abbreviated as the ''switcher'' in the following) is
a procedure without parameters that is called by AS when the switch to the
new processor actually takes place. \tty{AddCPU} delivers an integer
value as result that serves as an internal ''handle'' for the new
processor. The global variable \tty{MomCPU} always contains the handle of
the target processor that is currently set. The value returned by
\tty{AddCPU} should be stored in a private variable of type \tty{CPUVar}
(called \tty{CPUxxxx} in the example above). In case a code generator
module implements more than one processor (e.g. several processors of a
family), the module can find out which instruction subset is currently
allowed by comparing \tty{MomCPU} against the stored handles.
The switcher's task is to ''reorganize'' AS for the new target
processor. This is done by changing the values of several global
variables:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{ValidSegs}: Not all processors have all address spaces defined
by AS. This set defines which subset the \tty{SEGMENT} instruction
will enable for the currently active target processor. At least the
\tty{CODE} segment has to be enabled. The complete set of allowed
segments can be looked up the file \tty{fileformat.h} (\tty{Seg....}
constants).}
\item{\tty{SegInits}: This array stores the initial program counter values
for the individual segments (i.e. the values the program counters
will initially take when there is no \tty{ORG} statement). There are
only a few exceptions (like logically separated address spaces
that physically overlap) which justify other initial values than
0.}
\item{\tty{Grans}: This array specifies the size of the smallest addressable
element in bytes for each segment, i.e. the size of an element
that increases an address by 1. Most processors need a value of
1, even if they are 16- or 32-bit processors, but the PICs and
signal processors are cases where higher values are required.}
\item{\tty{ListGrans}: This array specifies the size of byte groups that shall
be shown in the assembly listing. For example, instruction words
of the 68000 are always 2 bytes long though the code segment's
granularity is 1. The \tty{ListGran} entry therefore has to be set to
2.}
\item{\tty{SegLimits}: This array stores the highest possible address for
each segment, e.g. 65535 for a 16-bit address space. This array
need not be filled in case the code generator takes over the
{\tt ChkPC} method.}
\item{\tty{ConstMode}: This variable may take the values
\tty{ConstModeIntel}, \tty{ConstModeMoto}, or \tty{ConstModeC}
and rules which syntax has to be used to specify the base of
integer constants.}
\item{\tty{PCSymbol}: This variable contains the string an assembler program
may use to to get the current value of the program counter.
Intel processors for example usually use a dollar sign.}
\item{\tty{TurnWords}: If the target processor uses big-endian addressing and
one of the fields in \tty{ListGran} is larger than one, set this flag
to true to get the correct byte order in the code output file.}
\item{\tty{SetIsOccupied}: Some processors have a \tty{SET} machine instruction.
AS will allow \tty{SET} instructions to pass through to the code
generator and instead use \tty{EVAL} if this flag is set.}
\item{\tty{HeaderID}: This variable contains the ID that is used to mark the
current processor family in the the code output file (see the
description of the code format described by AS). I urge to
contact me before selecting the value to avoid ambiguities.
Values outside the range of \$01..\$7f should be avoided as they
are reserved for special purposes (like a future extension to
allow linkable code). Even though this value is still hard-coded
in most code generators, the preferred method is now to fetch this
value from {\tt headids.h} via {\tt FindFamilyByName}.}
\item{\tty{NOPCode}: There are some situations where AS has to fill unused
code areas with NOP statements. This variable contains the
machine code of the NOP statement.}
\item{\tty{DivideChars}: This string contains the characters that are valid
separation characters for instruction parameters. Only extreme
exotics like the DSP56 require something else than a single comma
in this string.}
\item{\tty{HasAttrs}: Some processors like the 68k series additionally split
an instruction into mnemonic and attribute. If the new processor
also does something like that, set this flag to true and AS will
deliver the instructions' components readily split in the string
variables \tty{OpPart} and \tty{AttrPart}. If this flag is however set to
false, no splitting will take place and the instruction will be
delivered as a single piece in \tty{OpPart}. \tty{AttrPart} will stay empty
in this case. One really should set this flag to false if the
target processor does not have attributes as one otherwise looses
the opportunity to use macros with a name containing dots (e.g.
to emulate other assemblers).}
\item{\tty{AttrChars}: In case \tty{HasAttrs} is true, this string has to contain
all characters that can separate mnemonic and attribute. In most
cases, this string only contains a single dot.}
\end{itemize}
Do not assume that any of these variables has a predefined value; set
them \bb{all}!!
Apart from these variables, some function pointers have to be set that
form the link form AS to the ''active'' parts of the code
generator:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{MakeCode}: This routine is called after a source line has been
split into mnemonic and parameters. The mnemonic is stored into
the variable \tty{OpPart}, and the parameters can be looked up in the
array \tty{ArgStr}. The number of arguments may be read from
\tty{ArgCnt}.
The binary code has to be stored into the array \tty{BAsmCode}, its
length into \tty{CodeLen}. In case the processor is word oriented
like the 68000 (i.e. the \tty{ListGran} element corresponding to the
currently active segment is 2), the field may be addressed
wordwise via \tty{WAsmCode}. There is also \tty{DAsmCode} for extreme
cases... The code length has to be given in units corresponding
to the current segment's granularity.}
\item{\tty{SwitchFrom}: This parameter-less procedure enables the code generator
module to do ''cleanups'' when AS switches to another target processor.
This hook allows e.g. to free memory that has been allocated in the
generator and that is not needed as long as the generator is not
active. It may point to an empty procedure in the simplest case.
One example for the usage of this hook is the module \tty{CODE370} that
builds its instruction tables dynamically and frees them again after
usage.}
\item{\tty{IsDef}: Some processors know additional instructions that impose
a special meaning on a label in the first row like \tty{EQU} does. One
example is the \tty{BIT} instruction found in an 8051 environment. This
function has to return TRUE if such a special instruction is
present. In the simplest case (no such instructions), the routine
may return a constant FALSE.}
\end{itemize}
Optionally, the code generator may additionally set the following function
pointers:
\begin{itemize}
\item{\tty{ChkPC} : Though AS internally treats all program counters as
either 32 or 64 bits, most processors use an address space that is
much smaller. This function informs AS whether the current program
counter has exceeded its allowed range. This routine may of course
be much more complicated in case the target processor has more than
one address space. One example is in module \tty{code16c8x.c}. In
case everything is fine, the function has to return TRUE, otherwise
FALSE. The code generator only has to implement this function if
it did not set up the array {\tt SegLimits}. This may e.g. become
necessary when the allowed range of addresses in a segment is
non-continuous.}
\item{\tty{InternSymbol} : Some processorcs, e.g. such with a register
bank in their internal RAM, predefine such 'registers' as symbols,
and it wouldn't make much sense to define them in a separate include
file with 256 or maybe more {\tt EQU}s. This hook allows access to
the code generator of AS: It obtains an expression as an ASCII
string and sets up the passed structure of type {\em TempResult}
accordingly when one of these 'built-in' symbols is detected. The
element {\tt Typ} has to be set to {\tt TempNone} in case the check
failed. Errors messages from this routine should be avoided as
unidentified names could signify ordinary symbols (the parser will
check this afterwards). Be extreme careful with this routine as
it allows you to intervene into the parser's heart!}
\end{itemize}
By the way: People who want to become immortal may add a copyright
string. This is done by adding a call to the procedure \tty{AddCopyright}
in the module's initialization part (right next to the \tty{AddCPU} calls):
\begin{verbatim}
AddCopyright(
"Intel 80986 code generator (C) 2010 Jim Bonehead");
\end{verbatim}
The string passed to \tty{AddCopyright} will be printed upon program start
in addition to the standard message.
If needed, the unit may also use its initialization part to hook into
a list of procedures that are called prior to each pass of assembly.
Such a need for example arises when the module's code generation
depends on certain flags that can be modified via pseudo
instructions. An example is a processor that can operate in either
user or supervisor mode. In user mode, some instructions are
disabled. The flag that tells AS whether the following code executes
in user or supervisor mode might be set via a special pseudo
instruction. But there must also be an initialization that assures
that all passes start with the same state. The hook offered via
\tty{InitPassProc} offers a chance to do such initializations. The
principle is similar to the redirection of an interrupt vector: the
unit saves the old value prior to pointing the procedure variable to
its own routine (the routine must be parameter-less and \tty{FAR} coded).
The new routine first calls the old chain of procedures and
afterwards does its own operations.
The function chain built up via \tty{CleanUpProc} works similar to
\tty{InitPassProc}: It enables code generators to do clean-ups after
assembly (e.g. freeing of literal tables). This makes sense when
multiple files are assembled with a single call of AS. Otherwise, one
would risk to have 'junk' in tables from the previous run. No module
currently exploits this feature.
\subsubsection{Writing the Code Generator itself}
Now we finally reached the point where your creativity is challenged:
It is up to you how you manage to translate mnemonic and parameters
into a sequence of machine code. The symbol tables are of course
accessible (via the formula parser) just like everything exported
from \tty{ASMSUB}. Some general rules (take them as advises and not as
laws...):
\begin{itemize}
\item{Try to split the instruction set into groups of instructions that
have the same operand syntax and that differ only in a few bits
of their machine code. For example, one can do all instructions
without parameters in a single table this way.}
\item{Most processors have a fixed spectrum of addressing modes. Place
the parsing of an address expression in a separate routine so you
an reuse the code.}
\item{The subroutine \tty{WrError} defines a lot of possible error codes and
can be easily extended. Use this! It is no good to simply issue
a ''syntax error'' on all error conditions!}
\end{itemize}
Studying other existing code generators should also prove to be
helpful.
\subsubsection{Modifications of Tools}
A microscopic change to the tolls' sources is still necessary, namely to
the routine {\tt Granularity()} in {\tt toolutils.c}: in case one of the
processor's address spaces has a granularity different to 1, the swich
statement in this place has to be adapted accordingly, otherwise PLIST,
P2BIN, and P2HEX start counting wrong...
\section{Localization to a New Language}
You are interested in this topic? Wonderful! This is an issue that is
often neglected by other programmers, especially when they come from the
country on the other side of the big lake...
The localization to a new language can be split into two parts: the
adaption of program messages and the translation of the manual. The
latter one is definitely a work of gigantic size, however, the adaption of
program messages should be a work doable on two or three weekends, given
that one knows both the new and one of the already present messages.
Unfortunately, this translation cannot be done on a step-by-step basis
because the resource compiler currently cannot deal with a variable amount
of languages for different messages, so the slogan is 'all or nothing'.
The first oeration is to add the new language to {\tt header.res}. The
two-letter-abbreviation used for this language is best fetched from the
nearest Unix system (in case you don't work on one anyway...), the
international telephone prefix from a DOS manual.
When this is complete, one can rebuild all necessary parts with a simple
{\em make} and obtains an assembler that supports one more language. Do
not forget to forward the results to me. This way, all users will benefit
from this with the next release :-)
%%===========================================================================
\cleardoublepage
\begin{thebibliography}{99}
\bibitem{Williams} Steve Williams: \\
{\em 68030 Assembly Language Reference.\/} \\
Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1989
\bibitem{AMD29K} Advanced Micro Devices: \\
{\em AM29240, AM29245, and AM29243 RISC
Microcontrollers.\/} \\
1993
\bibitem{AtAVR} Atmel Corp.: \\
{\em AVR Enhanced RISC Microcontroller Data Book.\/} \\
May 1996
\bibitem{AVRObj} Atmel Corp.: \\
{\em 8-Bit AVR Assembler and Simulator Object File
Formats (Preliminary).\/} \\
(part of the AVR tools documentation)
\bibitem{CMD816} CMD Microcircuits: \\
{\em G65SC802/G65SC816 CMOS 8/16-Bit Microprocessor.\/} \\
Family Data Sheet.
\bibitem{CPM68K} Digital Research: \\
{\em CP/M 68K Operating System User's Guide.\/} \\
1983
\bibitem{Cyrix} Cyrix Corp.: \\
{\em FasMath 83D87 User's Manual.\/} \\
1990
\bibitem{Dallas320} Dallas Semiconductor: \\
{\em DS80C320 High-Speed Micro User's Guide.\/} \\
Version 1.30, 1/94
\bibitem{Fair1101} Fairchild Semiconductor: \\
{\em ACE1101 Data Sheet.\/} \\
Preliminary, May 1999
\bibitem{Fair1202} Fairchild Semiconductor: \\
{\em ACE1202 Data Sheet.\/} \\
Preliminary, May 1999
\bibitem{Fair8004} Fairchild Semiconductor: \\
{\em ACEx Guide to Developer Tools.\/}
AN-8004, Version 1.3 September 1998
\bibitem{FujitsuCD} Fujitsu Limited: \\
{\em June 1998 Semiconductor Data Book.\/} \\
CD00-00981-1E
\bibitem{Hit180} Hitachi Ltd.: \\
{\em 8-/16-Bit Microprocessor Data Book.\/} \\
1986
\bibitem{Hit63} Trevor J.Terrel \& Robert J. Simpson: \\
{\em Understanding HD6301X/03X CMOS Microprocessor
Systems.\/} \\
published by Hitachi
\bibitem{HitH8_3} Hitachi Microcomputer: \\
{\em H8/300H Series Programming Manual.\/} \\
(21-032, no year of release given)
\bibitem{SH7000} Hitachi Semiconductor Design \& Development Center: \\
{\em SH Microcomputer Hardware Manual
(Preliminary).\/}
\bibitem{SH7700} Hitachi Semiconductor and IC Div.: \\
{\em SH7700 Series Programming Manual.\/} \\
1st Edition, September 1995
\bibitem{HitH8_5} Hitachi Semiconductor and IC Div.: \\
{\em H8/500 Series Programming Manual.\/} \\
(21-20, 1st Edition Feb. 1989)
\bibitem{HitH8_532} Hitachi Ltd.: \\
{\em H8/532 Hardware Manual.\/} \\
(21-30, no year of release given)
\bibitem{HitH8_534} Hitachi Ltd.: \\
{\em H8/534,H8/536 Hardware Manual.\/} \\
(21-19A, no year of release given)
\bibitem{PPC403} IBM Corp.: \\
{\em PPC403GA Embedded Controller User's Manual.\/} \\
First Edition, September 1994
\bibitem{IntEmb} Intel Corp.: \\
{\em Embedded Controller Handbook.\/} \\
1987
\bibitem{IntMic} Intel Corp.: \\
{\em Microprocessor and Peripheral Handbook, Volume I
Microprocessor.\/} \\
1988
\bibitem{Int960} Intel Corp. : \\
{\em 80960SA/SB Reference Manual.\/} \\
1991
\bibitem{Int196} Intel Corp.: \\
{\em 8XC196NT Microcontroller User's Manual.\/} \\
June 1995
\bibitem{Int251} Intel Corp.: \\
{\em 8XC251SB High Performance CHMOS Single-Chip
Microcontroller.\/} \\
Sept. 1995, Order Number 272616-003
\bibitem{Int296} Intel Corp.: \\
{\em 80296SA Microcontroller User's Manual.\/} \\
Sept. 1996
\bibitem{Kaku} Hirotsugu Kakugawa: \\
{\em A memo on the secret features of 6309.\/} \\
(available via World Wide Web: \\
http://www.cs.umd.edu/users/fms/comp/CPUs/6309.txt)
\bibitem{MicroChip} Microchip Technology Inc.: \\
{\em Microchip Data Book.\/} \\
1993 Edition
\bibitem{Mit41} Mitsubishi Electric: \\
{\em Single-Chip 8-Bit Microcomputers.\/} \\
Vol.2, 1987
\bibitem{Mit16} Mitsubishi Electric: \\
{\em Single-Chip 16-Bit Microcomputers.\/} \\
Enlarged edition, 1991
\bibitem{Mit8} Mitsubishi Electric: \\
{\em Single-Chip 8 Bit Microcomputers.\/} \\
Vol.2, 1992
\bibitem{Mit4500} Mitsubishi Electric: \\
{\em M34550Mx-XXXFP Users's Manual.\/} \\
Jan. 1994
\bibitem{MitM16} Mitsubishi Electric: \\
{\em M16 Family Software Manual.\/} \\
First Edition, Sept. 1994
\bibitem{MitM16C} Mitsubishi Electric: \\
{\em M16C Software Manual.\/} \\
First Edition, Rev. C, 1996
\bibitem{Mit30600} Mitsubishi Electric: \\
{\em M30600-XXXFP Data Sheet.\/} \\
First Edition, April 1996
\bibitem{GreenM16} documentation about the M16/M32-developer's package
from Green Hills Software
\bibitem{MotMic} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em Microprocessor, Microcontroller and Peripheral
Data.\/} \\
Vol. I+II, 1988
\bibitem{Mot81} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em MC68881/882 Floating Point Coprocessor User's
Manual.\/} \\
Second Edition, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs 1989
\bibitem{Mot51} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em MC68851 Paged Memory Management Unit User's
Manual.\/} \\
Second Edition, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs 1989,1988
\bibitem{Mot32} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em CPU32 Reference Manual.\/} \\
Rev. 1, 1990
\bibitem{Mot56} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em DSP56000/DSP56001 Digital Signal Processor User's
Manual.\/} \\
Rev. 2, 1990
\bibitem{Mot340} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em MC68340 Technical Summary.\/} \\
Rev. 2, 1991
\bibitem{Mot16} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em CPU16 Reference Manual.\/} \\
Rev. 1, 1991
\bibitem{Mot68K} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em Motorola M68000 Family Programmer's
Reference Manual.\/} \\
1992
\bibitem{Mot332} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em MC68332 Technical Summary.\/} \\
Rev. 2, 1993
\bibitem{Mot601} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em PowerPC 601 RISC Microprocessor User's Manual.\/} \\
1993
\bibitem{Mot505} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em PowerPC(tm) MPC505 RISC Microcontroller Technical
Summary.\/} \\
1994
\bibitem{Mot12} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em CPU12 Reference Manual.\/} \\
1st edition, 1996
\bibitem{Mot08} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em CPU08 Reference Manual.\/} \\
Rev. 1 (no year of release given im PDF-File)
\bibitem{Mot360} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em MC68360 User's Manual.\/}
\bibitem{MotCold} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em MCF 5200 ColdFire Family Programmer's Reference
Manual.\/} \\
1995
\bibitem{MotMCore} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em M*Core Programmer's Reference Manual.\/} \\
1997
\bibitem{Mot56300} Motorola Inc.: \\
{\em DSP56300 24-Bit Digital Signal Processor
Family Manual.\/} \\
Rev. 0 (no year of release given im PDF-File)
\bibitem{SCMP} National Semiconductor: \\
{\em SC/MP Program\-mier- und
As\-sem\-bler-Hand\-buch.\/} \\
Publication Number 4200094A, Aug. 1976
\bibitem{AsmCop} National Semiconductor: \\
{\em COP800 Assembler/Linker/Librarian User's
Manual.\/} \\
Customer Order Number COP8-ASMLNK-MAN \\
NSC Publication Number 424421632-001B \\
August 1993
\bibitem{Cop87L84} National Semiconductor: \\
{\em COP87L84BC microCMOS One-Time-Programmable (OTP)
Microcontroller.\/} \\
Preliminary, March 1996
\bibitem{Nat14xxx} National Semiconductor: \\
{\em SC14xxx DIP commands Reference guide.} \\
Application Note AN-D-031, Version 0.4, 12-28-1998
\bibitem{NECV} NEC Corp.: \\
{\em $\mu$pD70108/$\mu$pD70116/$\mu$pD70208/$\mu$pD70216/$\mu$pD72091
Data Book.\/} \\
(no year of release given)
\bibitem{NEC78K0} NEC Electronics Europe GmbH: \\
{\em User's Manual $\mu$COM-87 AD Family.\/} \\
(no year of release given)
\bibitem{NEC75} NEC Corp.: \\
{\em $\mu$COM-75x Family 4-bit CMOS Microcomputer User's
Manual.\/} \\
Vol. I+II (no year of release given)
\bibitem{NECSig} NEC Corp.: \\
{\em Digital Signal Processor Product Description.\/} \\
PDDSP.....067V20 (no year of release given)
\bibitem{NEC78} NEC Corp.: \\
{\em $\mu$PD78070A, 78070AY 8-Bit Single-Chip Microcontroller
User's Manual.\/} \\
Document No. U10200EJ1V0UM00 (1st edition), August 1995
\bibitem{NEC7814} NEC Corp.: \\
{\em Data Sheet $\mu$PD78014.\/}
\bibitem{PhilXA} Philips Semiconductor: \\
{\em 16-bit 80C51XA Microcontrollers (eXtended
Architecture).\/} \\
Data Handbook IC25, 1996
\bibitem{SGS04} SGS-Thomson Microelectronics: \\
{\em 8 Bit MCU Families EF6801/04/05 Databook.\/}\\
1st edition, 1989
\bibitem{SGS62} SGS-Thomson Microelectronics: \\
{\em ST6210/ST6215/ST6220/ST6225 Databook.\/} \\
1st edition, 1991
\bibitem{ST7Man} SGS-Thomson Microelectronics: \\
{\em ST7 Family Programming Manual.\/} \\
June 1995
\bibitem{SGS9} SGS-Thomson Microelectronics: \\
{\em ST9 Programming Manual.\/} \\
3rd edition, 1993
\bibitem{Siem166} Siemens AG: \\
{\em SAB80C166/83C166 User's Manual.\/} \\
Edition 6.90
\bibitem{Siem167} Siemens AG: \\
{\em SAB C167 Preliminary User's Manual.\/} \\
Revision 1.0, July 1992
\bibitem{Siem502} Siemens AG: \\
{\em SAB-C502 8-Bit Single-Chip Microcontroller User's
Manual.\/} \\
Edition 8.94
\bibitem{Siem501} Siemens AG: \\
{\em SAB-C501 8-Bit Single-Chip Microcontroller User's
Manual.\/} \\
Edition 2.96
\bibitem{Siem504} Siemens AG: \\
{\em C504 8-Bit CMOS Microcontroller User's Manual.\/} \\
Edition 5.96
\bibitem{Syb68K} C.Vieillefond: \\
{\em Programmierung des 68000.\/} \\
Sybex-Verlag D\"usseldorf, 1985
\bibitem{Sym8xx} Symbios Logic Inc: \\
{\em Symbios Logic PCI-SCSI-I/O Processors Programming
Guide.\/} \\
Version 2.0, 1995/96
\bibitem{Ti990} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em Model 990 Computer/TMS9900 Microprocessor
Assembly Language Programmer's Guide.\/} \\
1977, Manual No. 943441-9701
\bibitem{Ti9900} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em TMS9995 16-Bit Microcomputer.\/} \\
Preliminary Data Manual
1981
\bibitem{TiC10} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em First-Generation TMS320 User's Guide.\/} \\
1988, ISBN 2-86886-024-9
\bibitem{Ti7000} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em TMS7000 family Data Manual.\/} \\
1991, DB103
\bibitem{TiC30} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em TMS320C3x User's Guide.\/} \\
Revision E, 1991
\bibitem{TiC20} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em TMS320C2x User's Guide.\/} \\
Revision C, Jan. 1993
\bibitem{Ti370} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em TMS370 Family Data Manual.\/} \\
1994, SPNS014B
\bibitem{Ti430FamSoft} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em MSP430 Family Software User's Guide.\/} \\
1994, SLAUE11
\bibitem{Ti430Met} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em MSP430 Metering Application.\/} \\
1996, SLAAE10A
\bibitem{Ti430FamArch} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em MSP430 Family Architecture User's Guide.\/} \\
1995, SLAUE10A
\bibitem{TiC60} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em TMS320C62xx CPU and Instruction Set Reference
Manual.\/} \\
Jan. 1997, SPRU189A
\bibitem{TiC20x} Texas Instruments: \\
{\em TMS320C20x User's Guide.\/} \\
April 1999, SPRU127C
\bibitem{Tosh90} Toshiba Corp.: \\
{\em 8-Bit Microcontroller TLCS-90 Development System
Manual.\/} \\
1990
\bibitem{Tosh870} Toshiba Corp.: \\
{\em 8-Bit Microcontroller TLCS-870 Series Data
Book.\/} \\
1992
\bibitem{Tosh900} Toshiba Corp.: \\
{\em 16-Bit Microcontroller TLCS-900 Series Users
Manual.\/} \\
1992
\bibitem{Tosh900L} Toshiba Corp.: \\
{\em 16-Bit Microcontroller TLCS-900 Series Data Book:
TMP93CM40F/ TMP93CM41F.\/} \\
1993
\bibitem{Tosh47} Toshiba Corp.: \\
{\em 4-Bit Microcontroller TLCS-47E/47/470/470A Development
System Manual.\/} \\
1993
\bibitem{Tosh9000} Toshiba Corp.: \\
{\em TLCS-9000/16 Instruction Set Manual Version
2.2.\/} \\
10. Feb 1994
\bibitem{Val8X} Valvo GmbH: \\
{\em Bipolare Mikroprozessoren und bipolare
LSI-Schaltungen.\/} \\
Datenbuch, 1985, ISBN 3-87095-186-9
\bibitem{Zilog} data sheets from Zilog about the Z80 family
\bibitem{ZilZ8} Zilog Inc.: \\
{\em Z8 Microcontrollers Databook.\/} \\
1992
\bibitem{ZilZ8_2} Zilog Inc.: \\
{\em Discrete Z8 Microcontrollers Databook.\/} \\
(no year of release given)
\bibitem{ZilZ380} Zilog Inc.: \\
{\em Z380 CPU Central Processing Unit User's
Manual.\/} \\
(no year of release given)
\end{thebibliography}
\cleardoublepage
\printindex
\end{document}
Reference in New Issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink